JP6031477B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine that gives a point in a specific gaming state and gives a privilege (for example, a right to shift to a more advantageous gaming state than the specific gaming state) when the total of the points reaches a predetermined threshold has been proposed. Has been. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a technique for granting a privilege when the total number of points given during a predetermined number of games reaches a predetermined threshold.

JP 2003-275374 A

  However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, if the total number of points does not reach a predetermined threshold during a predetermined number of games, the points acquired during that period become invalid. In the above case, depending on the player, the willingness to play can be reduced. Considering the above circumstances, the present invention makes it possible to grant a privilege according to the total number of points acquired even when the total number of points at the end of a specific period does not reach the threshold value. With the goal.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention accepts a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and stopping and displaying a combination of symbols as a result of the game, and a player's operation. A game starting means for starting a game, an internal lottery means for determining one of a plurality of types of winning combinations by lottery when the game is started, and a stop operation operated by a player when stopping a symbol The combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the variable display means is determined according to the means, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery means, and the player's operation mode for the stop operation means. Winning determination means, specific game determination means for determining a transition to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state, and points are given under specific conditions in the specific game state And point awarding means that a point storage means for storing the total value of the points given by the point providing means, if the total value of the points given by the point providing means has reached a certain threshold, identified from the total value When the point subtraction means for storing the numerical value obtained by subtracting the threshold value in the point storage means as the total value of the points given by the point grant means and the total value of the points given by the point grant means reaches a specific threshold value, Depending on the total value of points stored by the point storage means at the time when the specific gaming state ends, the first privilege granting means for granting the privilege and whether or not the privilege is given when the specific gaming state ends. 2nd privilege provision means to determine.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not a privilege is granted when the specific gaming state ends is determined according to the point information at the time when the specific gaming state ends. Therefore, even if the point is less than the threshold, a privilege corresponding to the point is given and not wasted.

  According to the present invention, since a privilege is given according to the point at the end of the specific gaming state, a decrease in the player's gaming motivation is suppressed.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows each symbol arranged in each reel. It is a conceptual diagram of the effective line set to a display window. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol code table. It is a conceptual diagram of the winning area lottery table in the RT0 gaming state. It is a conceptual diagram of the winning area lottery table in the RT1 gaming state. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination rule table. It is a figure explaining the replay which stops in each stop operation order. It is a figure explaining the bell stopped in each stop operation order. It is a conceptual diagram of a rotating effect production table. It is a conceptual diagram of transfer operation lottery table. It is explanatory drawing of AT start turning effect. It is a conceptual diagram of an AT start line determination table. It is explanatory drawing of SP start rotation effect. It is explanatory drawing of a red seven rotator effect. It is a conceptual diagram of a red seven times effect production lottery table and a red seven line lottery table. It is explanatory drawing of SP end rotation effect. It is explanatory drawing of a black-and-white seven drum effect. It is a conceptual diagram of a black and white seven production lottery table and a black and white seven stop pattern table that are referred to in the black and white seven cylinder production. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st stage of a combo drum effect. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd stage of a combo drum effect, and a 3rd stage. It is a conceptual diagram of a black and white seven production lottery table and a black and white seven stop pattern table referred to in the combo drum production. It is explanatory drawing of a rush rotator effect. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation | variation at the time of a white seven stop. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation | variation at the time of a black seven stop. It is a conceptual diagram of each table used for a rush rotator effect. It is a conceptual diagram of a reel lock lottery table. It is explanatory drawing of the transition of a main state. It is explanatory drawing of a sub state. It is explanatory drawing of the transition of a substate. It is a conceptual diagram of a normal lottery table. It is a conceptual diagram of a 1st addition table. It is explanatory drawing of an addition mode scenario. It is a conceptual diagram of a scenario state transfer table. It is a conceptual diagram of an addition state determination table. It is explanatory drawing of a lottery mode scenario. It is a conceptual diagram of a lottery state determination table. It is explanatory drawing of the mode and state in a normal state. It is a conceptual diagram of an initial HP table. It is a conceptual diagram of each table used in a periodic chance state. It is a conceptual diagram of a special victory determination table. It is a schematic diagram of the image of a periodic chance state. It is a schematic diagram of an image in a normal state. It is a conceptual diagram of an enemy character determination table. It is explanatory drawing of the change of a display of an enemy character display part. It is a conceptual diagram of an enemy character display value determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of a back mode determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of an additional value determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of an effect lottery table. It is explanatory drawing in the production | presentation in a 1st display part and a 2nd display part. It is a conceptual diagram of each table used in a special chance state. It is a schematic diagram of the image of a special chance state. It is a conceptual diagram of a background change table. It is a time chart of a special chance state. It is a schematic diagram of the image of a special precursor state. It is a time chart of a special precursor state and continuous production. It is a conceptual diagram of an AT level determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of the 2nd addition table. It is a conceptual diagram of the addition state determination table during AT. It is a schematic diagram of the image of AT state. It is a conceptual diagram of the additional number determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of a special addition production | presentation determination table. It is a schematic diagram of each image of the special addition effect in which the addition value below the threshold value of the second counter is added. It is a schematic diagram of each image of the special addition effect in which the addition value larger than the threshold value of the second counter is added. It is a conceptual diagram of a special AT determination table. It is a conceptual diagram of each table referred by return determination processing. It is a conceptual diagram of a stock number determination table. It is explanatory drawing of the stop operation order alert | reported by each game state. It is a flowchart of a starting process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a setting change process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the game control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of an initial setting process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the automatic insertion process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the game start pre-processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the insertion medal acceptance process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a BET operation acceptance process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the adjustment operation acceptance process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a demonstration display command transmission process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the internal lottery process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the rotation effect control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of AT start spinning effect processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of SP start spinning effect processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a combo spinning effect process and a rush spinning effect process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the wait process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the stop process of the main CPU. It is a conceptual diagram of a priority order storage area. It is a flowchart of the priority order storing process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a stop control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the display determination process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the hopper drive process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the main state transition process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a normal state control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of replay of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the AT state control process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of SP state control processing of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the interruption process of the main CPU. It is a flowchart of a sub activation process of the sub CPU. It is a flowchart of each task of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process of the sub CPU. It is a flowchart of effect control processing of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the start operation process of the sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a special chance state process of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a normal state process of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a periodic chance state management process and an AT state management process of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a periodic chance state management process and an AT state management process of a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the effect button input task of the sub CPU412. It is a time chart of the special game state of 2nd Embodiment. It is the conceptual diagram of the winning combination determination table of 3rd Embodiment, and the time chart of a special game state. It is a conceptual diagram of each storage area of the main RAM of the modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Structure of gaming machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. A player plays a game with the gaming machine 1 using a game medium (for example, a medal or a game ball). In the present embodiment, a gaming machine 1 (pachislot machine) in which medals are used as gaming media is illustrated.

  The gaming machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 2 having an opening on the front side (player side) and a front door 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the internal structure of the cabinet 2. As shown in FIG. 2, the cabinet 2 is provided with a hinge mechanism 2a. The front door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge mechanism 2a so that the opening of the cabinet 2 can be opened and closed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of the rear surface of the front door 3 (the surface on the inner side of the gaming machine 1).

  Side lamps 5 (5a, 5b) are provided on each of the left and right ends of the front face of the front door 3. Each side lamp 5 includes, for example, a light emitter such as a light emitting diode and a light-transmitting lens that covers the light emitter. The side lamp 5 emits light in a manner corresponding to each effect in the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a waist panel 6. On the waist panel 6, the name of the gaming machine 1 is drawn. Inside the gaming machine 1, a light emitter that irradiates the waist panel 6 is provided. For example, a light emitting diode or a cold cathode tube is adopted as the light emitter that irradiates the waist panel 6. In addition, a tray unit 7 for storing medals is provided below the waist panel 6. The tray unit 7 is formed in a shape that allows the player to freely take out the stored medals.

  The front door 3 is provided with a medal insertion portion 8 having an opening into which a medal is inserted, and a medal payout opening 9 through which a medal from the inside of the gaming machine 1 is discharged. When a prescribed number (for example, three) of medals is inserted from the medal insertion unit 8, one game can be started. The prescribed number is set according to the state of the game. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 9 are stored in the tray unit 7.

  A panel 10 is provided on the front center side of the front door 3. A substantially rectangular display window 11 is formed in the center of the panel 10. From the display window 11, a plurality of reels 12 (12L, 12C, 12R) provided inside the cabinet 2 can be visually recognized.

  Each reel 12 includes a substantially cylindrical drum portion and a belt-like sheet member attached to the outer peripheral surface of the drum portion. The sheet member of the reel 12 is light transmissive, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row. The reels 12 are rotatably provided and are arranged in the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. Specifically, the reels 12 are arranged so that the rotation axes are positioned on substantially the same straight line. Each reel 12 is fixed to a reel support 12F. The plurality of reels 12 are rotated by stepping motors 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) provided individually.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the symbols arranged on each reel 12 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer periphery of each of the plurality of reels 12 is divided into 21 unit areas U (so-called “frames”). As shown in FIG. 4, one symbol is drawn in each unit region U. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of types of symbols including a symbol “bell” and a symbol “replay x” are drawn on each reel 12.

  Three symbols for each reel 12 are stopped and displayed on the display window 11 of the front door 3 shown in FIG. That is, in the state where the three reels 12 are stopped, a total of nine symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 11. Each symbol of the reel 12 can be generally identified by the player even when the reel 12 is rotating. Therefore, the player can perform an operation to stop the reel 12 (a so-called eye-opening) at a timing when a specific symbol passes through the display window 11.

  When a prescribed number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion unit 8, an effective line is set. FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram of an effective line. The effective line is one unit area U of any one of the unit areas U of the reel 12L and one unit area U of the reel 12C and one unit of the reel 12R among the unit areas stopped and displayed in the display window 11. This is a region connecting the region U. The effective line of the present embodiment is a line that connects the unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR1 of the reel 12R among the unit areas U that are stopped and displayed in the display window 11.

  A combination of symbols as a result of the game is stopped and displayed on the active line. When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, a profit is given to the player in accordance with the stopped symbol combination. For example, when a combination of symbols related to winning is stopped and displayed on the active line, a medal is awarded to the player. Further, when a combination of symbols relating to replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player is given the right to replay. Specifically, when a combination of symbols related to re-game is displayed in the current game, the next game can be started even if no medal is inserted. The combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is determined for each game in accordance with the result of an internal lottery process to be described later.

  In the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the upper unit area UC1 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an “upper line”. Similarly, a line connecting the middle unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the middle unit area UR2 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a “middle stage”. In addition, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the lower unit area UC3 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a “lower line”. A line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an “upper right line”. Similarly, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a “right downward line”.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 includes a loading indicator lamp 13, a BET lamp 14 (14 a, 14 b, 14 c), a start lamp 15, a payout number display 16, a stored number display 17, and a replay display lamp 18. A plurality of indicators (hereinafter referred to as “main indicator ML”) including a weight lamp 19 and a stop lamp 20 are provided.

  The insertable display lamp 13 notifies whether or not a medal from the medal insertion unit 8 can be received. Specifically, in a state where a medal from the medal insertion unit 8 can be received, the insertion possibility display lamp 13 is lit. On the other hand, in a state where medals cannot be received, the insertion possible display lamp 13 is turned off. For example, during the period in which the reel 12 is rotating, the medal cannot be received, and therefore the insertable display lamp 13 is turned off. On the other hand, when all the reels 12 are stopped and a medal can be accepted, the thrown-in indicator lamp is lit.

  The BET lamp 14 displays the number of betting medals. The BET lamp 14 includes a single lamp 14a, a double lamp 14b, and a triple lamp 14c. When one betting medal is set, one lamp 14a is turned on. When two betting medals are set, one lamp 14a and two lamps 14b are turned on, and three betting medals are set. And the single lamp 14a, the double lamp 14b, and the triple lamp 14c are turned on.

  The start lamp 15 notifies whether or not a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) can be accepted. Specifically, the start lamp 15 is turned on when a predetermined number of betting medals are set or when a combination of symbols relating to replay is stopped on the active line.

  The payout number display 16 displays the number of medals awarded to the player when the winning symbol combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the symbol combination “Replay x-Bell-Bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line, eight medals are given to the player, and the payout number display 16 displays the value “8”.

  The number of medals awarded to the player can be electrically stored (stored) in the gaming machine 1 (main RAM 303 described later) (hereinafter, the number of medals stored is referred to as “credit number”). The number of credits is added when a medal is awarded as a result of the game. The credit amount is added when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 in a state where a prescribed number of betting medals are inserted. However, there is an upper limit (50 cards) for the number of credits.

  The stored number display 17 displays the number of credits. Specifically, the stored number display unit 17 variably displays a numerical value “0” to a numerical value “50” according to the stored credit number.

  The replay display lamp 18 notifies that replay is in progress. Specifically, the re-game display lamp 18 is lit until the next game ends after the combination of symbols related to the re-game is stopped and displayed on the active line in the current game. When the re-game display lamp 18 is lit, the player is notified that the next game start operation can be performed without using a medal.

  The weight lamp 19 is lit during a wait period from when a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) is started until rotation of each reel 12 is started. The wait period is provided in order to make an average time length required for one game more than a predetermined time length (about 4.1 seconds). The stop lamp 20 notifies that the game is in a stop state that is impossible.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 has a 1 BET button 21, a MAX-BET button 22, a checkout button 23, a start lever 24, a plurality of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R), an effect button 26, and direction designation. A plurality of operation units including buttons 27 are provided. Each operation unit is operated by a player.

  The 1BET button 21 is operated when setting one betting medal using the stored medals. For example, when the 1BET button 21 is operated in a state where no betting medal is set, a numerical value “1” is subtracted from the number of credits to set one betting medal. That is, the player can set one betting medal using the stored medal by operating the 1BET button 21.

  The MAX-BET button 22 is operated when setting a specified number of betting medals using the stored medals. For example, when the MAX-BET button 22 is operated in a state where no betting medal is set, three (specified number) are subtracted from the number of credits, and three betting medals are set.

    The settlement button 23 is operated when a medal stored as the number of credits and a betting medal are settled. When the checkout button 23 is operated, the total number of medals including the number of credits and the betting medals is paid out from the medal payout opening 9. Note that the betting medal may be settled by the first operation of the settlement button 23 and the credit amount may be settled by the second operation.

  The start lever 24 is operated by the player when the game is started. The player can instruct the start of the game by performing a start operation on the start lever 24 in a state where the game can be started. The start lever 24 of the present embodiment can tilt in any direction of 360 degrees from a state substantially perpendicular to the front door 3. Further, the handle part of the start lever 24 is formed of a resin having translucency, and a lever effect lamp 42 is incorporated therein. The lever effect lamp 42 is lit and blinks in a predetermined effect.

  The stop button 25 is operated by the player when stopping the rotating reel 12. The stop button 25 includes a stop button 25L, a stop button 25C, and a stop button 25R. The stop button 25L corresponds to the reel 12L, the stop button 25C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the stop button 25R corresponds to the reel 12R. When the stop button 25 corresponding to the reel 12 is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”) during the period in which the reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 stops.

  Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the first stop operation in each game is referred to as a first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Control in which the gaming machine 1 (main CPU 301 described later) stops the reel 12 based on the first stop operation is referred to as first stop control. Similarly, stop control of the reel 12 based on the second stop operation is referred to as second stop control, and stop control of the reel 12 based on the third stop operation is referred to as third stop control. Further, the frame (unit area U) of the reel 12 positioned on the effective line of the display window 11 at the time when the stop operation is performed is referred to as a stop operation position.

  When all the reels 12 are stopped, the combination of symbols as a result of the game is displayed on the active line, and the game ends. As will be described later, when the game is started, each reel 12 is accelerated to a certain rotational speed. During a period in which each reel 12 is at a constant rotation speed (a period in which the reel 12 is in a steady rotation), a stop operation for stopping and displaying a result of a game (a normal game described later) on the active line becomes possible. On the other hand, during the acceleration period from the start of rotation of each reel 12 to the steady rotation, even if the reel 12 is rotating, a stop operation for displaying the result of the normal game is not accepted.

  The effect button 26 is operated by the player when giving an instruction regarding the effect. For example, the user can instruct execution of a specific effect by operating the effect button 26. That is, the specific effect is executed when the effect button 26 is operated (trigger). Note that the MAX-BET button 22 can also have the function of the effect button 26. According to the above configuration, the effect button 26 is omitted, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The direction designation button 27 is operated by the player when a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30, for example. The direction designation button 27 includes an upper button, a lower button, a right button, and a left button. For example, by operating the direction designation button 27, the cursor for designating options displayed on the menu image can be moved. Specifically, when the up button is operated, the cursor in the menu image moves upward. Similarly, when the lower button is operated, the cursor moves downward, when the right button is operated, the cursor moves rightward, and when the left button is operated, the cursor moves leftward.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 of the front door 3 includes a plurality of effect lamps 28 (28a to 28j) and a plurality of stop operation sequence display lamps 29 (29L, 29C, 29R). Among the plurality of effect lamps 28, effect lamp 28a to effect lamp 28e are provided on the left side of display window 11 in front view, and effect lamp 28j from effect lamp 28f to display window 11 in front view. It is provided on the right side. Each effect lamp 28 notifies the current effect state (for example, AT state) and the like.

  Each stop operation order display lamp 29 is provided in an area below the display window 11 in the panel 10 and notifies the player of the operation order (operation mode) of each stop button 25. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 29L is provided at a position corresponding to the reel 12L (lower left side of the display window 11), and the stop operation order display lamp 29C is set at a position corresponding to the reel 12C (the display window 11 of the display window 11). The stop operation order display lamp 29R is provided at a position corresponding to the reel 12R (lower right side of the display window 11). For example, it is assumed that the stop button 25R is notified by the first stop operation, the stop button 25C by the second stop operation, and the order of the stop button 25L by the third stop operation (so-called reverse pressing) is notified to the player. In the above case, the stop operation order display lamp 29R is lit when the game is started, the stop operation order display lamp 29C is lit after the stop button 25R is operated, and the stop operation order is displayed after the stop button 25C is operated. The display lamp 29L is lit.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a liquid crystal display device 30 that displays various images is provided above the display window 11 of the front door 3. The liquid crystal display device 30 displays a moving image and a still image according to an effect executed on the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 30 notifies information related to a result of an internal lottery process, which will be described later, information suggesting an effect state, and the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front door 3 is provided with speakers 31 (31L, 31R) and speakers 32 (32L, 32R). The speaker 31 is provided on the lower end side of the front door 3 and includes a speaker 31L attached to the left side as viewed from the player side and a speaker 31R attached to the right side. The speaker 32 is provided on the upper end side of the front door 3 and includes a speaker 32L attached to the left side as viewed from the player side and a speaker 32R attached to the right side. The speaker 31 and the speaker 32 output sound (music, sound and sound effect) according to the effect. For example, the speaker 31 and the speaker 32 output sound related to the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 30, the effect lamp 28, the side lamp 5, the stop operation order display lamp 29 or the lever effect lamp 42 described above. . The speaker 31 and the speaker 32 are attached to the back surface of the front door 3, and a plurality of sound emitting holes are formed on the surface of the front door 3 at positions corresponding to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32.

  A return button 33 is provided on the front door 3. The return button 33 is operated in order to clear the medal clogging in the medal flow path inside the gaming machine 1. By operating the return button 33, medals clogged in the medal flow path are discharged from the medal payout opening 9.

  The front door 3 is provided with a locking device 4 in which a keyhole is formed. When the locking device 4 of the front door 3 is engaged with a locking piece (not shown) of the cabinet 2, the front door 3 is locked. As shown in FIG. 1, the keyhole of the locking device 4 is located in front of the front door 3, and a key (not shown) for unlocking the front door 3 can be inserted. As will be described later, various operation units (for example, a setting change button 37) are provided inside the cabinet 2. Each operation section inside the cabinet 2 is operated by a key manager (for example, a store clerk in a game hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed) that unlocks the front door 3.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a selector 34 capable of switching the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. Specifically, the selector 34 includes a solenoid (not shown), and the medal flow path is switched according to the ON / OFF state of the solenoid. Further, the ON / OFF state of the solenoid is changed according to whether or not insertion of medals is permitted. For example, when the insertion of medals is permitted, the solenoid of the selector 34 is in the ON state, and the selector 34 guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 into the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, an insertion medal guide member 522 is provided in the vicinity of the right side of the selector 34 in a front view. The inserted medal guide member 522 guides the medal that has passed through the selector 34 to a hopper 520 provided in the cabinet 2.

  On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is not permitted (for example, when the reel 12 is rotating), the solenoid of the selector 34 is in the OFF state, and the selector 34 uses the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 as a gaming machine. Lead outside of 1. Further, even when the insertion of medals is permitted, the selector 34 guides illegal medals and foreign objects inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 to the outside of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge medal guide member 523 is provided near the lower side of the selector 34 in a front view. The discharged medal guide member 523 guides medals and the like from the selector 34 to the medal payout opening 9 on the front side of the front door 3.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a hopper 520 configured to include a tank portion 521 a for storing medals and a discharge slit 521 b for discharging medals is provided inside the cabinet 2. The medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 are stored in the tank unit 521a, and the medals stored in the tank unit 521a are paid out to the tray unit 7 from the discharge slit 521b through the medal payout opening 9. For example, the hopper 520 pays out medals when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line or when the checkout button 23 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a payout medal guide member 524 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. The payout medal guide member 524 guides the medal from the hopper 520 to the medal payout exit 9. Specifically, the payout medal guide member 524 has an opening, and the opening faces the discharge slit 521b of the hopper 520 in a state where the front door 3 is closed. The medals discharged from the discharge slit 521b enter the opening of the payout medal guide member 524 and are guided to the medal payout exit 9 by the payout medal guide member 524.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an auxiliary storage portion 530 is provided inside the cabinet 2. The auxiliary storage unit 530 stores medals overflowing from the hopper 520. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides the hole which penetrates the bottom part of the auxiliary storage part 530, and the bottom part of the cabinet 2, and discharges the medal overflowing from the hopper to the exterior of the gaming machine 1 through the hole.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2. Specifically, the main control board 300 is housed in a transparent board case and attached to the back plate of the cabinet 2. Various electronic components including a later-described main CPU 301 are mounted on the main control board 300. The main control board 300 is electrically connected to various boards including a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub-control board 400, and a power board 500, which will be described later, via connectors. Note that the various substrates described above may be formed of a single substrate or a plurality of substrates.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a setting display unit 36 and a setting change button 37 are formed inside the cabinet 2. The setting display unit 36 displays a setting value set in the gaming machine 1. The set value is a numerical value related to the payout rate of the gaming machine 1, and various lotteries are executed with a probability corresponding to the set value in each game. For example, setting values “1” to “6” are provided, and when the setting value “6” is set, the payout rate is the highest. In the present embodiment, when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a key hole (not shown) for setting change and rotated, the setting display unit 36 displays a numerical value corresponding to the setting value.

  The setting change button 37 is operated when changing the numerical value of the setting display unit 36. For example, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where the numerical value “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value “2” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Thereafter, each time the setting change button 37 is operated, the setting display unit 36 adds and displays numerical values one by one. However, when the setting change button 37 is operated while the numerical value “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. For example, when the start lever 24 is operated during the period in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 at the time of the operation is set as the setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a sub control board 400 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3. The sub-control board 400 includes various boards including an effect control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2. The power supply device 510 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter (both not shown), generates a DC voltage from an AC voltage supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and generates a plurality of types from the generated DC voltage. Generate DC voltage. For example, the power supply device 510 is supplied to a DC voltage of 32V used for driving a motor or a solenoid, a DC voltage of 12V supplied to the liquid crystal display device 30, and an electronic circuit board (for example, the main control board 300). A DC voltage of 5V is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply device 510 is provided with a power button 511 and a reset button 512. When the power button 511 is turned on, power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power button 511 is turned off, the power is shut off. The reset button 512 is operated when resetting a gaming state or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a shielding plate 513 is positioned on the front side of the power button 511 and the reset button 512. The shielding plate 513 can move between a position where the power button 511 and the reset button 512 are shielded and a position where the shield button 511 is not shielded. Specifically, when the front door 3 is closed, the shielding plate 513 shields the power button 511 and the reset button 512. According to the above configuration, for example, an illegal act of inserting a wire from the outside of the gaming machine 1 into the sound emission hole of the speaker 31 and operating the power button 511 or the reset button 512 inside the gaming machine 1 is suppressed.

<Circuit machine circuit>
This is the end of the description of the structure of the gaming machine 1. Hereinafter, the function of each circuit provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 300, a sub control board 400, a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500, as shown in FIG.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305. Note that the main CPU 301, the main ROM 302, and the main RAM 303 may be provided as separate electronic devices, or may be provided as a one-chip microcomputer in which each element is integrally configured.

  The main ROM 302 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301 and various data (for example, a winning area lottery table) in a nonvolatile manner. The main RAM 303 stores various data used in each process executed by the main CPU 301.

  The main CPU 301 reads various control programs stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby including various types including the sub control board 400, each reel 12, the hopper 520, and the main display ML. Control the equipment.

  The random number generator 304 generates a random value R1 used in an internal lottery process to be described later. The random number generator 304 of this embodiment includes a counter circuit, a sampling circuit, and a pulse generation circuit (all not shown), and generates a hardware random number. Specifically, the pulse generation circuit outputs a signal to the counter circuit at a predetermined cycle. The numerical value of the counter circuit is incremented by “1” every time a signal is input from the pulse generation circuit. The sampling circuit stores the numerical value of the counter circuit as the random number value R1 when the player starts the game. The random value R1 is generated in the range of numerical values “0” to “65535”. A software random number may be adopted as the random value R1.

  In the present embodiment, a random value R2 is generated in addition to the random value R1. The random number value R2 is a software random number acquired from a register built in the main CPU 301, and is generated in the range of numerical values “0” to “255”. As will be described later, the random value R2 is used in the spinning drum effect control process.

  The I / F circuit 305 inputs a signal from each switch SW (for example, the start switch 24SW) of each operation unit (for example, the start lever 24) and each sensor SE (for example, the medal sensor 34SE) to the main CPU 301. The signal from each switch SW and each sensor SE is a high level or low level signal. In the present embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a first level (high level or low level) signal is represented as an ON signal, and a second level (low level or high level) signal is represented as an OFF signal. To do. Whether the first level of the ON signal is high level or low level is set according to the type of the switch SW or the sensor SE.

  The I / F circuit 305 outputs various signals for driving the main display ML, the hopper 520, and each reel 12 to the outside of the main control board 300. Further, the I / F circuit 305 outputs various commands to the sub control board 400. In order to prevent an illegal command from being input to the main control board, the command from the sub control board 400 is not received by the main control board 300.

  A signal from the main control board 300 is input to the reel board 100. The reel substrate 100 outputs a drive pulse to each reel 12 in response to a signal from the main control substrate 300. Each stepping motor 101 of each reel 12 is driven in accordance with a drive pulse from the reel substrate 100.

  The stepping motor 101 includes a plurality of (four) coils. Among the coils, the excitation coil combination is sequentially switched every time a drive pulse is input from the reel substrate 100, and the reels 12 are rotated by sequentially switching the excitation coil combinations. Specifically, when the combination of the excited coils of the stepping motor 101 is switched only once, the reel 12 rotates by a predetermined angle. For example, when the pulse is applied 24 times, the reel 12 rotates by an angle corresponding to one frame (unit area U), and when the pulse is applied 504 times, the reel 12 rotates once. In the above configuration, when the time interval at which the drive pulse is applied is short, the rotation speed of the reel is faster than when the time interval is long.

  ON / OFF signals from a plurality of reel sensors 111 (111L, 111C, 111R) are input to the main control board 300 via the reel board 100. Of the reel sensors 111, the reel sensor 111L corresponds to the reel 12L, the reel sensor 111C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the reel sensor 111R corresponds to the reel 12R. Each reel sensor 111 outputs an ON signal when the rotation angle of the corresponding reel 12 is the reference position. On the other hand, each reel sensor 111 outputs an OFF signal when the rotation angle of each reel 12 is other than the reference position. The main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 can determine the rotation angle of each reel 12 from the signal from each reel sensor 111 and the number of times the drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101.

  The relay board 200 relays a signal from the main control board 300 to the main display ML. In response to the signal output from the main control board 300, the main display ML is driven. The relay board 200 relays an ON / OFF signal input to the main control board 300 from each sensor (such as a start switch 24SW described later) that detects the operation of each operation unit (such as the start lever 24).

  The 1BET switch 21SW detects an operation of the 1BET button 21 by the player. The ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input, the main CPU 301 adds one medal to the betting medal.

  The MAX-BET switch 22SW detects the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 by the player. The ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 through the relay board 200. When the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input, the main CPU 301 sets a prescribed number of medals as betting medals. Hereinafter, the 1BET switch 21SW and the MAX-BET switch 22SW may be collectively referred to as “BET switches”.

  The settlement switch 23SW detects the operation of the settlement button 23 by the player. The ON signal from the settlement switch 23SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200.

  When an ON signal is input from the settlement switch 23SW, or when a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 outputs a hopper drive signal to the hopper 520. The hopper drive signal is input from the main control board 300 to the hopper 520 through the power supply board 500. The hopper 520 pays out medals when a hopper drive signal is input.

  The payout sensor 112SE inputs a payout signal to the main control board 300 every time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. The payout signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. For example, a payout sensor 112SE is provided at a position where a medal passing through the discharge slit 521b of the hopper 520 is detected, and when a medal is detected, the payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal. The main CPU 301 can determine the number of medals paid out by counting the number of times the payout signal is input.

  Full tank sensor 530SE detects that auxiliary storage unit 530 is full. Specifically, the full tank sensor 530SE is provided at a predetermined height from the bottom of the auxiliary storage unit 530. When the medals inside the auxiliary storage unit 530 increase and reach the position of the full tank sensor 530SE, an ON signal Is output to the main control board 300. The ON signal of the full sensor 530SE is input to the main control board 300 through the power supply board 500. When the ON signal of the full sensor 530SE is input, the main CPU 301 displays a message “hopper full error” on the liquid crystal display device 30, for example, and shifts to an error state. When the message is displayed, for example, after an amusement shop clerk collects medals in the auxiliary storage unit 530, the error state is canceled by operating the reset button 512.

  The power switch 511SW is switched to an ON state or an OFF state by operating the power button 511. When the power switch 511SW is in the ON state, power is supplied from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1, and when the power switch SW is in the OFF state, the power from the power supply device 510 to the gaming machine 1 is shut off. The power supply device 510 generates a DC voltage when power is supplied. The DC voltage generated by the power supply device 510 is supplied to various devices including the hopper 520 through the power supply substrate 500.

  The reset switch 512SW is provided in the power supply device 510 and outputs a reset signal to the main control board 300 when the reset button 512 is operated. The reset signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500. When receiving the reset signal, the main CPU 301 cancels the error state, for example. Note that a plurality of reset switches 512SW (reset buttons 512) may be provided. For example, in addition to the reset switch 512SW provided in the power supply device 510, the lock device 4 may be provided with a reset switch. For example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking device 4 and the key is rotated to the right, the front door 3 is unlocked, and when the key is rotated to the left, a reset signal is output from the reset switch. Preferably employed.

  The setting change switch 37SW detects an operation of the setting change button 37. The ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300. When an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW, the main CPU 301 updates the display on the setting display unit 36. When an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW during a period when the setting value is not displayed on the setting display unit 36, the main CPU 301 determines a predetermined value in the same manner as when a reset signal is input from the reset switch 512SW. It is good also as a structure which performs reset operation.

  The medal sensor 34SE detects medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8. Specifically, the medal sensor 34SE outputs an ON signal when a medal is located inside the selector 34 in the medal flow path. On the other hand, the medal sensor 34SE outputs an OFF signal when no medal is located inside the selector 34. The ON / OFF signal from the medal sensor 34SE is input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. In addition to the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 described above, a medal sensor may be provided on the inserted medal guide member 522 located downstream of the selector 34. In the above configuration, when the ON signal of the medal sensor of the inserted medal guide member 522 is input after the ON signal of the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 is input, the main CPU 301 determines that an appropriate medal has been inserted. May be. On the other hand, for example, when the ON signal of the medal sensor of the inserted medal guide member 522 is not input after the ON signal of the medal sensor 34SE of the selector 34 is input, there is a possibility that the medal stays in the medal flow path. Therefore, the main CPU 301 may notify an error.

  ON / OFF signals from a plurality of stop switches 25SW (25SWL, 25SWC, 25SWR) are input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. Of the stop switches 25SW, the stop switch 25SWL corresponds to the stop button 25L, the stop switch 25SWC corresponds to the stop button 25C, and the stop switch 25SWR corresponds to the stop button 25R. The main CPU 301 performs stop control of the reel 12 corresponding to the stop switch 25SW to which the ON signal is input. Specifically, when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWL, the reel 12L is controlled to stop. Similarly, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the reel 12C when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWC, and performs stop control of the reel 12R when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWR.

  The start switch 24SW detects the operation of the start lever 24 by the player. The ON signal from the start switch 24SW is input to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. When the ON signal is input from the start switch 24SW, the main CPU 301 controls, for example, each stepping motor 101 to rotate each reel 12. Further, an ON signal from the setting change switch 37 </ b> SW is input to the main control board 300.

  The start switch 24SW of the present embodiment is formed so as to be able to detect the direction in which the start lever 24 is operated. Specifically, the start switch 24SW can individually detect any of push-up operation for pushing up the start lever 24, push-down operation for pushing down, right-hand operation for tilting to the right, and left-hand operation for tilting to the left as viewed from the player side. is there. For example, when the start switch 24SW is operated to the right side, the start switch 24SWU that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pushed up, the start switch 24SWd that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pushed down, and ON. The sensor includes a start switch 24SWR that outputs a signal and a start switch 24SWL that outputs an ON signal when operated to the left. According to the above configuration, for example, it is possible to vary the effect that is executed when the start lever 24 is pressed and when the start lever 24 is pressed.

<Sub control board>
The sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 30, the speakers (31, 32), and each lamp (for example, the effect lamp 28). As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control board 400 includes a plurality of boards including an effect control board 410, an image control board 420, and a sound board 430. The sub-control board 400 includes various sensors including an effect button switch 26SW and a direction specifying switch 27SW, a side lamp 5, an effect lamp 28, a stop operation order display lamp 29, and a lever effect lamp 42. Various lamps are electrically connected.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the effect control board 410 includes an I / F circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a sub ROM 413, and a sub RAM 414. The effect control board 410 (sub CPU 412) controls various lamps including the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, and the lever effect lamp 42, and the sound board 430. In addition, the effect control board 410 gives a command for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 30 to the image control board 420.

  The sub ROM 413 stores a control program executed by the sub CPU 412 and various data. For example, an effect lottery table for determining the type of effect and lamp data indicating flashing patterns of various lamps are stored in the sub ROM 413.

  The sub RAM 414 functions as a work area for storing various data in a volatile (temporary) manner. The I / F circuit 411 receives a command from the main control board 300 (I / F circuit 305). The command received by the I / F circuit 411 is supplied to the sub CPU 412. The command received by the I / F circuit 411 includes, for example, a display winning combination command indicating the type of winning combination stopped on the active line.

  The sub CPU 412 executes a control program stored in the sub ROM 413 and controls various lamps (for example, the side lamp 5) and the sound board 430 based on each data stored in the sub ROM 413. For example, the sub CPU 412 reads data indicating the blinking pattern of the side lamp 5 from the sub ROM 413 and blinks the side lamp 5. Further, the sub CPU 412 generates a random value R3 used in an effect control process to be described later. As the random value R3, for example, a random number in the range of 0 to 65535 is preferably employed. Note that the sub ROM 413 may be composed of a single electronic component or a plurality of electronic components (storage devices).

  The image control board 420 displays various images on the liquid crystal display device 30 in accordance with commands from the effect control board 410. As shown in FIG. 6, the image control board 420 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 421, a liquid crystal control ROM 422, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 423, a CGROM 424, and a VRAM 425.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 421 executes a control program stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 422, and gives an instruction according to a command from the effect control board 410 to the VDP 423. The CGROM 424 stores compressed and encoded image data (for example, texture data). The VDP 423 includes an image decoder and a drawing circuit (both not shown). When an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 421 is input to the VDP 423, the image decoder reads image data from the CGROM 424 in response to the instruction. The image decoder decompresses (decodes) the read image data and stores it in the VRAM 425. The drawing circuit displays various images on the liquid crystal display device 30 in accordance with the image data stored in the VRAM 425.

  The sound board 430 is controlled by the sub CPU 412 to generate an acoustic signal. The acoustic signal generated by the sound board 430 is supplied to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32 and output as a sound wave. As shown in FIG. 6, the sound board 430 includes a sound source IC 431, a sound source ROM 432, and an amplifier 433. The sub CPU 412 controls the sound board 430 according to a command from the main control board 300.

  The sound source ROM 432 compresses and stores a plurality of sound data. Each piece of acoustic data is data indicating, for example, each piece of music including a music piece in a specific game state, a sound output every time the player operates the stop button 25, and an error sound output in an error state.

  The sound source IC 431 generates a sound signal from the sound data of the sound source ROM 432, and includes a decoder, a control register, and an A / D converter (all not shown). The decoder of the sound source IC 431 reads sound data from the sound source ROM 432 in accordance with an instruction from the sub CPU 412. The decoder of the sound source IC 431 adjusts the volume of the read sound data and then stores the sound data in the control register. A plurality of acoustic data is stored in the control register, and each acoustic data stored in the control register is supplied to the A / D converter in the stored order. The A / D converter generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data and supplies it to the amplifier 433.

  The amplifier 433 amplifies the acoustic signal supplied from the sound source IC 431 (A / D converter) and supplies it to the speaker 31 and the speaker 32. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 controls the sound source IC 431 to generate an acoustic signal. However, for example, the liquid crystal control CPU 421 described above may control the sound source IC 431. The CPU to be controlled may be provided separately from the sub CPU 412 and the liquid crystal control CPU 421.

<Each data used by main CPU>
The description of each circuit of the gaming machine 1 is as described above. Hereinafter, various data stored in the main ROM 302 will be described with reference to the drawings. The main ROM 302 includes a symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 7, a symbol code table shown in FIG. 8, a winning area lottery table shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, a winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 11, and a winning combination definition table shown in FIG. FIG. 15 shows a spinning effect table, FIG. 16 shows a transition operation lottery table, FIG. 18 shows an AT start line determination table, FIG. 21 shows a red seven times spinning effect lottery table and a red seven line lottery table, Black and white seven lottery table and black and white seven stop pattern table shown, black seven availability determination lottery table and black seven stop pattern table shown in FIG. 27, white seven continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 31, rush start position lottery table, initial stock lottery table, Stock continuation rate lottery table and rush fluctuation lottery table Various data including the reel lock lottery table shown in FIG. 32 is stored.

  FIG. 7 is a conceptual diagram of the symbol arrangement table. In the symbol arrangement table, the symbol position is associated with the symbol type at the symbol position. Each symbol position (“00” to “20”) in the symbol arrangement table corresponds to each unit area U shown in FIG. 4, and each symbol in the symbol arrangement table is drawn on the reel 12 shown in FIG. Corresponds to each symbol. The symbol position located in the middle line during rotation is stored in the symbol counter of the main RAM 303.

  FIG. 8 is a conceptual diagram of the symbol code table. The symbol code table is configured to include data (symbol code) specifying each symbol of each reel 12. As understood from FIG. 4 or FIG. 7, each reel 12 has “red seven”, “black seven”, “white seven”, “SP symbol”, “replay x”, “replay y”, “replay z”, “bell”, “watermelon” 10 kinds of symbols “Cherry” are arranged. As shown in FIG. 8, each symbol code corresponds to each of ten types of symbols. Specifically, “Red Seven” corresponds to symbol code 01 “00000001”, “Black Seven” corresponds to symbol code 02 “00000010”, and “White Seven” corresponds to symbol code 03 “ “00000011” corresponds to “SP symbol”, symbol code 04 “00000100” corresponds, “replay x” corresponds to symbol code 05 “00000101”, and “replay y” corresponds to symbol code 06. “00000110” corresponds, “Replay z” corresponds to “00000111” of symbol code 07, “Bell” corresponds to “00001000” of symbol code 08, and “Watermelon” corresponds to “code“ 09 ”. “00000101” corresponds to “Cherry”, and “00001010” of symbol code 10 corresponds to “Cherry”.

  9 and 10 are conceptual diagrams of the winning area lottery table. The main CPU 301 determines a winning area by using a winning area lottery table and a random value R1 in an internal lottery process to be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, each winning area lottery table includes a plurality of winning areas and lottery values corresponding to the winning areas. 9 and 10 show the names of the winning areas. The winning area lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 for each set value (1 to 6). FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 illustrate a winning area lottery table that is referred to when the set value is “1”.

  Each winning area of the winning area lottery table designates each winning combination defined in the winning combination determining table shown in FIG. For example, it is assumed that the “common bell” in the winning area “05” is determined by the internal lottery process. The winning area “05” designates the winning combination “Push Order Unquestioned Bell” and the winning combination “Correcting Bell”. That is, a plurality of types of winning combinations may be won in duplicate.

  The combination of symbols of the winning combination designated in the winning area is permitted to stop on the active line. Specifically, when the winning areas “00” to “22” in the winning area are won, each winning combination is permitted to stop on the active line in the won game and is not carried over to the next and subsequent games. On the other hand, when the “bonus” in the winning area “23” is won, the winning combination “bonus combination” can be carried over to the next and subsequent games. That is, if the winning combination “bonus combination” cannot be stopped to the active line, the winning combination “bonus combination” is carried over to the next game.

  When the winning combination “bonus combination” is not carried over, the game is in the RT0 gaming state. On the other hand, when the winning combination “bonus combination” is carried over, it becomes the RT1 gaming state. That is, the game after the winning area “bonus” is won in the RT0 gaming state is in the RT1 gaming state. As understood from FIG. 10, in the game in which the “bonus combination” is carried over (RT1 gaming state), the lottery value of the winning area “bonus” is “0”, and in the RT1 gaming state, “bonus” is I wo n’t win.

  Each lottery value in the winning area lottery table is a numerical value that is subtracted from the random value R1 in the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value corresponding to each winning area from the random number value R1 in ascending order of the winning area (from “00” to “23”). In the internal lottery process, a winning area is determined when the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R1 becomes a negative number. The larger the lottery value, the higher the probability of becoming a negative number when subtracted from the random value R1. That is, the winning area having a larger lottery value in the winning area has a higher probability of winning.

  Of the plurality of winning area lottery tables shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the winning area lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state is used in the internal lottery process. The RT gaming state of this embodiment includes an RT0 gaming state and an RT1 gaming state. FIG. 9 is a winning area lottery table in the RT0 gaming state, and FIG. 10 is a winning area lottery table in the RT1 gaming state.

  As understood from FIGS. 9 and 10, each lottery value in the winning areas “00” to “04” (hereinafter referred to as “re-game winning area”) is different for each RT gaming state. Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG. 9, a lottery value “8978” is allocated to the winning area of “batting order replay X1” in the replaying winning area, and lottery values of other replaying winning areas. Is the numerical value “0”. That is, in the RT0 gaming state, the probability that the “batting order replay X1” of the re-game winning area is won and the re-game winning area is determined is 8978/65536.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value “9231” is assigned to the winning area “batting order replay X1”, the lottery value “9230” is assigned to the winning area “batting order replay X2”, and the winning area “batting order” is selected. A lottery value “4489” is assigned to each of “replay Y1” and “batting order replay Y2”, and a lottery value “2” is assigned to the winning area “SP confirmed replay”. That is, in the RT1 gaming state, the probability of the replay winning area being determined is “27441/65536” in which “batting order replay” and “SP confirmed replay” are won in the replay winning area. As understood from FIGS. 9 and 10, the lottery values in the winning areas “05” to “22” (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning area”) are common to each RT gaming state.

  When the bonus combination stops on the active line, the bonus game state is entered. In each game in the bonus game state, the internal lottery process is not performed, and any of the winning combinations from the winning areas “05” to “22” stops on the active line. Further, the bonus game state ends when the prescribed number is 2 (3 except for the bonus game state) and a total of 28 medals are awarded. In a game with two prescribed numbers, two medals are paid out when the winning combination in the winning winning area stops on the active line. That is, the net increase in the number of medals in the bonus game state (the difference between the payout medal and the bet medal) is zero.

  FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination defining table that defines combinations of symbols for each winning combination. As shown in FIG. 12, the winning combination rule table includes the permission bit number of each winning combination, the combination of symbols of each winning combination, and the number of medals to be paid out when each winning combination stops on the active line. Composed. FIG. 12 shows the number of payouts when each winning combination stops on the active line in a game state where the specified number is three.

  For example, in a game in which the winning combination “normal replay” is won (a game in which winning areas “00” to “04” are won), the combination of symbols of “normal replay” can be stopped on the active line. Specifically, the symbol “bell” is displayed on the unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the symbol “replay x” or “replay y” is displayed on the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the symbols “red seven” and “white seven” are displayed on the unit area UR1 of the reel 12R. The combination of symbols “replay z” or “cherry” can be stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the winning combination “Push order unquestioned bell” “correct answer bell” “incorrect answer 1-6, C, R” “watermelon 1, 2” “single combination AK” “one control” When a “combination” (a winning combination designated by the game in which the winning winning area is won) is displayed on the active line, a payout number of medals corresponding to each winning combination is awarded to the player. In the present embodiment, a winning combination in which medals are paid out when displayed on the active line is referred to as a “winning winning combination”. Also, “Normal Replay”, “Special Replay”, “Control Replay 1 to 3”, “SP Matched Replay”, “Follow Replay 1, 2” (the winning combination designated by the game where the replay winning area is won) are on the active line. When displayed, the next game is set to replay. In the present embodiment, the winning combination in which the next game is set to be replayed when displayed on the active line is collectively referred to as replay.

In this embodiment, in each game in which a bonus combination is carried over, either a replay or a winning combination is always won. In a game in which both the bonus combination and the winning winning combination can be stopped on the active line, the symbols of the winning combination are displayed on the active line with priority over the symbols of the bonus combination. Further, in a game in which both the bonus combination and the replay can be stopped on the active line, each symbol of the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line in preference to each symbol of the bonus combination. In the above configuration, when the symbols are arranged as shown in FIG. 4, the bonus combination does not stop on the active line.

As described above, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player because the winning probability of replay is higher than the RT0 gaming state. In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is carried over, the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line thereafter, so that the state in which the bonus combination is carried over is maintained. That is, the RT1 gaming state advantageous for the player is maintained.

  Each permission bit number in the winning combination defining table designates each display permission bit in the display permission bit storage area of the main RAM 303. The display permission bit storage area is configured to include a plurality of display permission bits, and each display permission bit corresponds to each winning combination. For example, assume that the batting order bell A1 in the winning area “06” wins and the winning combination “correct answer bell”, “incorrect answer 1”, and “incorrect answer C” is permitted to stop on the active line. In the above case, each display permission bit specified by the permission bit numbers “9”, “10”, and “16” in the display permission bit storage area is set to “1”, and the other bits are set to “0”. .

  The main RAM 303 stores a display combination storage area to be compared with the display permission bit storage area in the display determination process described later. The display combination storage area includes a plurality of displayable bits, and each displayable bit corresponds to each winning combination (similar to the display permission bit storage area). Each displayable bit is set to “1” when there is a possibility that the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit stops on the active line, and there is no possibility that the corresponding winning combination stops on the active line. In this case, it is set to “0”. For example, at the time when each reel 12 starts to rotate, all winning combinations may stop at the active line, so all displayable bits are set to “1”. Each displayable bit in the display combination storing area is updated every time each reel 12 is stopped, and at the time when all the reels 12 are stopped, only the displayable bits corresponding to the winning combination actually stopped on the active line. Becomes “1”.

  The winning combination won in the internal lottery process stops on the active line according to the operation mode of each stop button 25 of the player. Specifically, each winning combination stops on the active line according to the stop operation position of each stop button 25 and the order of the stop operation. For example, a symbol located within a range of 4 frames from the stop operation position (5 frames including the stop operation position) (hereinafter referred to as “retraction range”) can be stopped on the active line, and a symbol located outside the range is Even the symbols that make up the winning combination are not stopped on the active line (so-called “missing” occurs). As described above, a plurality of types of winning combinations may be won in a single game. In a game in which a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, for example, a winning combination that stops on the active line is selected according to the order of stop operations.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams of the correspondence relationship between the winning area, the stop operation order, and the winning combination (a combination of symbols stopped on the effective line) that stops on the active line when the stop operation is performed in each stop operation order. It is.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a winning combination that stops at the active line in each stop operation order in a game in which replay is won.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when any of the winning areas “batting order replay” (X1, X2, Y1, Y2) is won, “normal replay” or “special replay” is set to the active line according to the mode of the stop operation. Stop. Specifically, in the game in which the winning area “batting order replay X1” is determined, when the stop button 25L or the stop button 25C is first stopped, “normal replay” stops on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop button 25R is subjected to the first stop operation, the “special replay” is stopped on the active line. In the game in which the winning area “batting order replay X2” is determined, when the stop button 25L or the stop button 25R is first stopped, “normal replay” is stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop button 25C is operated for the first stop, “special replay” is stopped on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game in which the winning area “batting order replay Y1” is determined, when the stop button 25L or the stop button 25R is operated for the first stop, “special replay” stops on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop button 25C is subjected to the first stop operation, “normal replay” is stopped on the active line. Further, in the game in which the winning area “batting order replay Y2” is determined, when the stop button 25L or the stop button 25C is first stopped, “special replay” is stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when the stop button 25R is subjected to the first stop operation, “normal replay” is stopped on the active line.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the winning area “SP confirmed replay” is won, “SP-equipped replay”, “follow replays 1 and 2” or “normal replay” is stopped on the active line according to the mode of the stop operation. Specifically, in the game where the winning area “SP confirmed replay” is won, when the stop button 25L or the stop button 25R is first stopped, and within the drawing range of each symbol of “SP complete replay”. When each reel 12 is stopped, “SP aligned replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  On the other hand, in the game where the winning area “SP confirmed replay” is won, the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 25L or the stop button 25R, and each reel is within the drawing range of each symbol of “SP-equipped replay”. When 12 is not stopped, “Follow Replay 1” or “Follow Replay 2” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, when each reel 12 is not operated to be stopped within the drawing range of each symbol of “SP-equipped replay” and the stop button 25L is operated for the first stop, “follow replay 1” is an effective line. Is stopped. Further, among the cases where the stop button 25R is operated for the first stop, when the stop button 25C is operated for the second stop (in the case of the right middle left push order), “follow replay 2” is displayed regardless of the stop operation position. When the stop button 25L is stopped and displayed on the active line and the second stop operation is performed (in the case of the right and left middle pressing order), “follow replay 1” or “follow replay 2” becomes the active line depending on the stop operation position. Stopped display. In the game where the winning area “SP confirmed replay” is won, when the stop button 25C is first stopped, the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a winning combination that stops on the active line in each stop operation order in a game in which any of the winning areas “06” to “13” is won. When any of the winning areas “06” to “13” is determined, any of “correct answer bell”, “illegal answer 1-6, C, R” and “one-player A” is designated as the winning combination. (See FIG. 11).

  In the game where any of the winning areas “06” to “13” is won, when the stop button 25L is operated for the first stop, “illegal answer 1 to 6” or losing eyes are stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, when the stop button 25L is subjected to the first stop operation, the left symbol “bell” of “illegal answer 1 to 6” is stopped on the reel 12L regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, the middle symbol and the right symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the stop operation position. For example, the left symbol “bell” of fraudulent answer 1 can be stopped at the active line regardless of the stop operation position, but the middle symbol “red seven” and the right symbol “Replay x” “watermelon” Depending on the position, it cannot be stopped at the active line. As understood from the above explanation, when the reel 12L is first stopped in the game where “batting order bell” is won, as shown in FIG. 14, any “illegal dismissal” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Or missed out and the losing eyes stop.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “batting order bell A1” is won, the stop operation sequence in which the reel 12C is the first stop operation, the reel 12L is the second stop operation, and the reel 12R is the third stop operation. In the case of (hereinafter simply referred to as “middle left / right stop operation sequence”), the winning combination “correct answer bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Similarly, when a stop operation is performed in the order of “middle right and left” in a game where the winning area “batting order bell A2” is won, a stop operation is performed in the order of “middle left and right” in a game where the winning area “batting order bell A3” is won. In the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle right left” in the game where the winning area “batting order bell A4” is won, “correct bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In addition, if the winning operation “batting order bell B1” is stopped in the order of “middle right”, the stopping operation is performed in the order of “middle right left” in the game where the winning area “batting order bell B2” is won. If the winning area “batting order bell B3” has been stopped in the order of “middle right” in the game where the winning area “batting order bell B3” has been won, the order of “right middle left” in the game where the winning area “batting order bell B4” has been won If a stop operation is performed at “”, the “correct answer bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the stop operation order in which the winning combination “correct bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game in which any winning area “batting order bell” (A1 to 4, B1 to 4) is won is referred to as correct answer pressing order.

  As shown in FIG. 14, when the winning area “batting order bell” is won and the first stop operation is other than the reel 12L and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the correct push order, C or illegal answer R is stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, if the winning area “batting order bells A1 to A4” is won and the first stop operation is other than the reel 12L and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the correct push order, C is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when the winning area “batting order bells B1 to B4” is won and the first stop operation is other than the reel 12L and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the correct answer pressing order, the unauthorized answerer R is valid. Stopped on the line. For example, as shown in FIG. 14, in the game in which “batting order bell A1” is won (the correct pressing order is “middle left and right”), the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle right left” “right left middle” “right middle left”. In such a case, “illegal answer C” is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  As understood from the above explanation, in the game where the winning area “batting order bell” is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct answer pressing order, the “correct answer bell” (the number of payouts is 8) stops on the active line. When the stop operation is performed in a direction other than the correct answer pressing order, “illegal answer” (the number of payouts is 1) or the dismissal stops at the active line. Therefore, when the game is played in the correct push order, it is advantageous for the player as compared to the case where the game is played out of the correct push order. As will be described in detail later, the sub CPU 412 notifies the correct push order of the correct bells in the AT state. The AT state ends when the remaining number counter that is subtracted according to the number of medals paid out is subtracted to the end value (0).

  FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram of the spinning drum production table. In the present embodiment, there is a case where a spinning effect that varies each reel 12 in a specific manner is executed in a period from when the game is started until the result of the game is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 15, each turning effect includes an AT start turning effect, an SP starting turning effect, a red seven turning effect, an SP end turning effect, a black and white seven turning effect, a combo turning effect, and a rush time. Includes torso production. Each rotator effect corresponds to each rotator effect number (1-7).

  When the main CPU 301 decides to execute any of the rotating effects, the main CPU 301 stores the rotating effects number corresponding to the rotating effects in the rotating effect number storage area of the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 executes a spinning effect according to the main state including the main state 0, the main state 1, and the main state 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the main CPU 301 shifts from the main state 0 to the main state 1, the main CPU 301 executes an AT start spinning effect. The main CPU 301 executes the SP start spinning effect when transitioning from the main state 0 or the main state 1 to the main state 2, and executes the SP end spinning effect when transitioning from the main state 2 to the main state 1. To do. The main CPU 301 executes a black and white seven-turn effect, a combo-turn effect, and a rush-turn effect in the main state 1, and executes a red seven-turn effect in the main state 2.

  The main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 1 or the main state 2 on the condition that the stop operation is performed in a specific order (hereinafter referred to as “transition operation order”) in the main state 0. Similarly, in the main state 1, the process shifts to the main state 0 on condition that the stop operation is performed in a specific order.

  The main CPU 301 determines the transfer operation order by transfer operation lottery processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the transfer operation order using the random value R2 and the transfer operation lottery table in the game won by the batting order replay (X1, X2, Y1, Y2).

  FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram of each transfer operation lottery table. Each transition operation lottery table includes a first transition operation lottery table shown in part (a) of FIG. 16 and a second transition operation lottery table shown in part (b) of FIG. The first transfer operation lottery table is used when the batting order replay X1 or the batting order replay Y1 is won, and the second transfer operation lottery table is used when the batting order replay X2 or the batting order replay Y2 is won. Each transfer operation lottery table includes each lottery value of each setting pattern (a1 to a4, b1 to b4). Each lottery value is sequentially subtracted from the random value R2, and a setting pattern in which the subtraction result is a negative number is determined.

  The main CPU 301 sets one of the stop operation orders (middle left / right, middle right / left, right / left middle, right middle / left) as the movement operation order according to the setting pattern determined in the movement operation lottery process. The transfer operation order includes order 1, order 2, and order 3, and order 1 to order 3 are set to different stop operation orders.

  As shown in part (a) of FIG. 16, in the game in which the hitting order replay X1 and the hitting order replay Y1 are won, one of the setting patterns a1 to a4 is determined. When the setting pattern a1 is determined, the operation order of “middle left and right” in the stop operation order is set to order 1, the operation order of “middle right and left” is set to order 2, and the operation order of “right and left middle” is set. Set to order 3. Similarly, when the pattern a2 is determined, the operation order of “middle left and right” is set to order 1, the operation order of “middle right and left” is set to order 2, and the operation order of “middle right and left” is order 3. Set to When the pattern a3 is determined, the operation order of “middle right / left” is set to order 1, the operation order of “middle left / right” is set to order 2, and the operation order of “middle right / left” is set to order 3. Is done. When the pattern a4 is determined, the “middle right left” operation order of the stop operation orders is set to order 1, the “middle left and right” operation order is set to order 2, and the “right middle left” operation order is set to Set to order 3.

  As shown in part (b) of FIG. 16, in the game where the hitting order replay X2 and the hitting order replay Y2 are won, one of the setting patterns b1 to b4 is determined. When the setting pattern b1 is determined, the operation order “right middle left” of the stop operation order is set to order 1, the operation order “right middle left” is set to order 2, and the operation order “middle left and right” is set. Is set to order 3. Similarly, when the pattern b2 is determined, the operation order “right middle left” is set to order 1, the operation order “right middle left” is set to order 2, and the operation order “middle right left” is order 3. Set to When the pattern b3 is determined, the operation order “right middle left” is set to order 1, the operation order “right middle left” is set to order 2, and the operation order “middle left and right” is order 3. Is set. When the pattern b4 is determined, the “right middle left” operation order is set to order 1, the “right left middle” operation order is set to order 2, and the “middle right left” operation order is set to the stop operation order. Set to order 3.

  For example, when the stop operation is performed in order 1 in the main state 0, the AT start spinning effect (see FIG. 15) is executed and the state shifts to the main state 1. Specifically, in each game where the hitting order replay is won, if the stop operation is performed twice in succession in the order 1, the AT start spinning effect is executed, and the main state 1 is entered. In other words, if the game in which the batting order replay is won is stopped in order 1, and then the game in which the batting order replay is won again is stopped in order 1, the AT start spinning effect is executed and the main state 1 is entered. To do.

  Further, in the main state 0, when the stop operation is performed in the order 3 consecutively twice in each game in which the hitting order replay is won, the process proceeds to the main state 1 without executing the AT start spinning effect. In addition, for example, in the main state 0, when the stop order operation is stopped twice in each game in which the hitting order replay is won, the SP start spinning effect is executed and the main state 2 is entered. Furthermore, in the main state 1, when a stop operation is performed in sequence 1 twice consecutively in each game in which the hitting order replay is won, the execution of the black and white seven-turn effect (see FIG. 15) is determined. In the main state 1, when a stop operation is performed outside the operation order set in the order 1 to 3, the main state 0 is entered.

  As understood from the above description, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, in the game in which the hitting order replay is won, the main state shifts according to the stop operation order of the player, and the spinning effect (AT start spinning) The execution of the production, the SP start spinning production, and the black and white seven spinning production) is determined. As will be described in detail later, the sub CPU 412 appropriately notifies the transition operation order. The player can execute each turning effect by following the notified transition operation order.

  By the way, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the moving operation order (orders 1 to 3) is not set at random. For example, in all games won by batting order replay, “middle left and right” may be set in order 1, “middle right and left” in order 2, and “middle right and left” in order 3. However, in the above configuration, it becomes easy to intentionally execute the spinning effect. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the transition operation order is set at random. According to this embodiment, intentional execution of the spinning effect is suppressed.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the operation of each reel 12 in the AT start spinning effect. The main CPU 301 executes an AT start spinning effect when the sub CPU 412 shifts to the AT state. The AT start spinning effect is executed in a period from when the game is started to when each reel 12 is steadily rotated (a period until a stop operation for displaying the result of the game is possible).

  When the AT start spinning effect is started, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1) in FIG. 17). Thereafter, when any one of the stop buttons 25 is operated while each reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 is stopped, and the symbol “red seven” is stopped and displayed.

  In the AT start spinning effect, the symbol “red seven” is stopped and displayed regardless of the timing when the stop button 25 is operated. That is, even if the stop button 25 is operated at a timing when the symbol “Red Seven” is not positioned within the drawing range (5 frames including the frame at the stop operation position), the symbol “Red Seven” is stopped and displayed. The In the present embodiment, the operation of the stop button 25 in the spinning effect is referred to as “pseudo stop operation”.

  The rotation of each reel 12 in the AT start spinning effect continues until the corresponding stop button 25 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed. In the example of FIG. 17, the stop button 25L is pseudo-stopped and the symbol “red seven” is displayed on the reel 12L ((2) of FIG. 17), and then the stop button 25C is pseudo-stopped to the reel 12C. The symbol “Red Seven” is displayed ((3) in FIG. 17). Thereafter, the stop button 25R is pseudo-stopped and the symbol “red seven” is displayed on the reel 12R ((4) in FIG. 17). When all the stop buttons 25 are subjected to a pseudo stop operation, a combination of symbols “red seven-red seven-red seven” (hereinafter referred to as “red seven uniform”) is stopped and displayed. Further, when the reel 12 is not stopped when the specified time has elapsed since the start of the AT start spinning effect, the main CPU 301 automatically stops the reel 12 to stop and display the red seven-match. .

  FIG. 17 shows an example in which the red seven-alignment is stopped and displayed on the middle line. As will be described later, the red seven-alignment includes the middle line, the upper line, the lower line, the upper right line, and the lower right line. Stop anyway. FIG. 17 shows an example in which the stop button 25L (left), the stop button 25C (middle), and the stop button 25R (right) are operated in this order. The stop button 25 can be operated in any order.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the notification period is started. In the notification period, for example, a message “AT started!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. The notification period is, for example, a time period of 5 seconds. After the notification period ends, when the start lever 24 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, the spinning effect ends and each reel 12 rotates normally.

  The positional relationship between the reels 12 is adjusted in a period from the start of rotation of each reel 12 to the steady rotation (that is, a period until the game can be stopped). Specifically, the positional relationship between the reels 12 is adjusted to the relative positional relationship at the time when the immediately preceding game is finished. That is, the relative positional relationship between the reels 12 that are normally rotated is the same when the AT start spinning effect is executed and when the AT start spinning effect is not executed.

  The main CPU 301 determines the line on which the red seven alignment in the AT start spinning effect is stopped and displayed by the AT start line determination process. Specifically, in the AT start line determination process, a line on which the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed is determined using the random number R2 and the AT start line determination table.

  FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram of an AT start line determination table. As shown in FIG. 18, the AT start line determination table is configured to include each lottery value for each line on which the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed. In the AT start line determination process, the main CPU 301 sequentially subtracts each lottery value from the random number value R2, and sets the line where the subtraction result is a negative number as a line where the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed in the AT start spinning effect. decide. As will be described in detail later, the sub CPU 412 determines the AT level in accordance with the line on which the red seven alignment in the AT start spinning effect is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the operation of each reel 12 in the SP start spinning effect. When the sub CPU 412 shifts to the SP state, the main CPU 301 executes the SP start spinning effect. The SP start spinning effect is executed in a period from when the game is started until each reel 12 is steadily rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the SP start spinning effect includes an SP aligned pattern A and an SP aligned pattern B. In any SP aligned pattern, a combination of SP symbols (hereinafter referred to as “SP symbol aligned”) is stopped and displayed at the end of the spinning effect, but the variation of each reel 12 until the SP aligned is stopped and displayed. The mode is different for each SP aligned pattern. The type of SP start spinning effect is determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, the SP aligned pattern A is selected with a probability of 3/4, and the SP aligned pattern B is selected with a probability of 1/4.

  When the SP aligned pattern A is selected, when a game start operation is performed, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1a) in FIG. 19). If any one of the stop buttons 25 is operated while each reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 is stopped and “SP symbol” is stopped and displayed. When the SP matching pattern A is selected, when all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped, the SP symbol matching is stopped and displayed on the middle line ((2a) in FIG. 19). Further, when the reel 12 is not stopped when a specified time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed after the SP aligned pattern A is started, the main CPU 301 automatically stops the reel 12 to align the SP symbols. To stop display. When the SP symbol set is stopped and displayed, a notification period (5 seconds) is started. After the notification period has elapsed, when the start lever 24 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, each reel 12 rotates normally.

  On the other hand, when the SP aligned pattern B is selected, the symbol “red seven” is stopped and displayed on each reel 12 when a pseudo stop operation of each stop button 25 is performed after the game start operation. Specifically, when the stop button 25L is pseudo-stopped, “Red Seven” stops in the middle of the reel 12L. Similarly, when the stop button 25C is pseudo-stopped, “Red Seven” stops at the middle stage of the reel 12C. That is, when the stop button 25L and the stop button 25C are pseudo-stopped, “Red Seven” is tempered. On the other hand, when the stop button 25R is pseudo-stopped, the symbol “red seven” is stopped and displayed not in the middle stage but in the lower stage. Therefore, in the SP-aligned pattern B, a combination of symbols (hereinafter referred to as “red seven-off”) in which the right symbols of the red seven-aligned are shifted is stopped and displayed ((2b) in FIG. 19). Further, if the reel 12 is not stopped at the time when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP aligned pattern B, the main CPU 301 automatically stops the reel 12 to remove the red seven. To stop display.

  In the SP-aligned pattern B, when the red seven off is stopped and displayed, the promotion notification period (for example, 5 seconds) starts. In the promotion notification period, for example, the message “Promote to SP!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. When the start lever 24 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the promotion notification period elapses, the SP aligned pattern A is started.

  As described above, in the SP aligned pattern B, the stop positions of the reels 12L and 12C are common to the AT start spinning effect. Therefore, until the stop button 25R is pseudo-stopped (until the promotion notification period is started), whether the type of the turning effect being executed is the AT start turning effect or the SP starting turning effect. Cannot be specified depending on the stop position of each reel 12. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, the player's expectation for the SP symbol pattern can be maintained for a long period of time as compared with the configuration in which the SP pattern B is not provided.

  When the SP start spinning effect is executed, the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 2 and the sub CPU 412 shifts to the SP state. In each game in the main state 2, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the red seven turn effect (see FIG. 15). FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the operation of each reel 12 in the red seven turn effect. The red seven-rotor effect is executed in a period from when the game is started until each reel 12 is steadily rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the red seven-rotation effect includes a red seven-aligned pattern and a red seven-off pattern. In the red seven uniform pattern, the red seven uniform (red seven-red seven-red seven) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the red seven off pattern, red seven out (red seven-red seven-other than red seven, red seven-other than red seven-red seven, other than red seven-red seven-red seven) is stopped and displayed.

  When the red-seven uniform pattern is selected, when the game is started, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1a) in FIG. 20). If any one of the stop buttons 25 is operated while each reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 is stopped, and “Red Seven” is stopped and displayed. When the red seven-match pattern is selected, when all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped, the red seven-match is stopped and displayed on any line ((3a) in FIG. 20). If the reel 12 is not stopped when a specified time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the red seven-aligned pattern, the main CPU 301 automatically stops the reel 12 and aligns the red seven-aligned pattern. To stop display. When the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the notification period (5 seconds) is started. After the notification period has elapsed, when the start lever 24 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, each reel 12 rotates normally.

  When the red seven-off pattern is selected, after the game start operation is performed, if any two pseudo stop operations of the stop button 25 are performed, the symbol “red seven” is displayed as a template (2a ). In the present embodiment, the line (the lower line in the example of FIG. 20) on which the symbol “Red Seven” is tempered is determined by lottery. In addition, even if the pseudo stop operation is performed in any operation order, the symbol “red seven” is tempered to any line. When the pseudo stop operation of the third stop button 25 is performed, red seven-off is stopped and displayed on any line ((3b) in FIG. 20). If the reel 12 is not stopped when a specified time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the red seven-off pattern, the main CPU 301 automatically stops the reel 12 to release the red seven-off pattern. To stop display.

  According to the above configuration, the display manner of each reel 12 at the time when the two stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped is common to the red seven-aligned pattern and the red seven-off pattern. Therefore, before all the reels 12 stop, the player cannot specify whether the pattern is a red seven-aligned pattern or a red seven-off pattern depending on the stop position of each reel 12.

  When all the reels 12 are stopped and red seven off is stopped and displayed, a notification period (for example, 5 seconds) starts. When the start lever 24 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the notification period elapses, each reel 12 rotates normally.

  When execution of the red seven-rotor effect is determined, the red seven-rotor effect reservation flag is turned on. The red seven times effect reservation flag is stored in the main RAM 303, for example. As will be described in detail later, in the next game in which the red seven-rotation effect reservation flag is set to the ON state, the red seven-rotation effect is executed.

  In each game in the main state 2 (SP state), whether or not to execute the red seven times effect is determined using the red seven times effect lottery table. Further, when the execution of the red seven-match pattern is determined in the red seven-rotation effect, a line for stopping and displaying the red seven-match pattern is determined using the SP red-seven-line lottery table. The part (a) of FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram of a red seven-rotor effect drawing lottery table, and the part (b) of FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram of an SP middle red seven-line lottery table.

  As shown in part (a) of FIG. 21, the red seven times effect drawing lottery table includes a lottery value of “no production”, a lottery value of “out of red seven”, and a lottery value of “red seven match”. Composed. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2 in the red seven effect lottery process. If the result of subtracting the lottery value of “no effect” becomes a negative number, the red seven-turn effect is not executed in the next game. On the other hand, when the result of subtracting the lottery value of “Red Seven Out” becomes a negative number, the spinning effect of the Red Seven Out Pattern is executed in the next game. In addition, when the result of subtracting the lottery value of “red seven uniform” becomes a negative number, the spinning effect of the red seven uniform pattern is executed in the next game.

  As shown in part (b) of FIG. 21, the red seven line lottery table is configured to include lottery values for each line where the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed in the red seven-rotor effect. Each lottery value is sequentially subtracted from the random number value R2, and the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed on the line where the subtraction result is a negative number.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the SP end spinning effect. Main state 2 (SP state) ends with a predetermined number of games. In the present embodiment, when 20 games are played, the main state 2 ends, and the SP end spinning effect is executed in the last game (the 20th game) in the main state 2. In the SP end turning effect, similar to the red seven turning effect (the turning effect executed by the first to the 19th time in the main state 2), after all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped, Alignment or red seven off is stopped.

  In the final game in the main state 2, the SP end spinning effect is executed even when “no effect” is determined in the previous red seven effect lottery process. In addition, the line where the red seven-alignment and the red seven-off are stopped and displayed in the SP end rotation effect are determined by the same method as the line where the red seven-alignment and the red seven-off is displayed in a red seven-rotation effect. .

  When the start operation of the SP end spinning effect is performed, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1) in FIG. 22). If any one of the stop buttons 25 is operated while each reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 is stopped, and “Red Seven” is stopped and displayed.

  When the pseudo stop operation is performed for all the stop buttons 25 in the SP end turning effect, whether or not the red seven-match pattern is determined at least once in each game in the main state 2 (the first to 19th games) ( Depending on whether or not the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed) and whether or not the red seven uniform pattern is determined in the previous red seven production lottery process, the red seven uniform or the red seven off is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reel 12 is not stopped when a specified time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP end turning effect, the main CPU 301 automatically stops the reel 12 and causes the red seven Align or red out of red is stopped.

  Specifically, in the previous red seven production lottery process, the red seven-match pattern is not won, and the red seven-match pattern is determined at least once for each game from the first to the 19th game in the main state 2. If it is, red seven off is stopped and displayed (2a). On the other hand, if the red seven-match pattern is won in the previous red seven production lottery process, or if the red seven-match pattern has not been determined once in each game from the first to the 19th game in the main state 2, The red seven uniform is stopped and displayed (2b).

  As understood from the above description, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the execution of the red seven-match pattern is not determined in the main state 2, in the specific game (final game) in the main state 2 The red seven-match pattern is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the main state 2, it is also said that at least one red seven match is guaranteed. As will be described in detail later, every time the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed in the SP state, the AT set number counter of the sub RAM 414 is incremented.

  When all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped, the result notification period is started. The result notification period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the result notification period, the number of times the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the current SP state (main state 2) is notified. For example, in the current SP state, when three red sevens are stopped and displayed, a message “3 sets acquired!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. After the result notification period elapses, when the start lever 24 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, each reel 12 rotates normally.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the black and white seven-rotor effect. As will be described in detail later, in each game in which the sub state is the AT state, when the second counter is added under a specific condition (stop display of special replay) and the second counter exceeds a predetermined threshold, Revolving effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the black and white seven-turn effect includes a black seven-aligned pattern and a white seven-aligned pattern. When the black and white seven-turn effect is started, a black seven-match pattern or a white seven-match pattern is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 23, when the black seven-aligned pattern is determined, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1a) in FIG. 23), and then all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, a combination of symbols “black seven-black seven-black seven” (hereinafter referred to as “black seven uniform”) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 23 (2a)). FIG. 23 shows an example in which the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed on the upper line, but the black seven-alignment is displayed on the line corresponding to the result of the lottery using the monochrome seven lottery table described later and the order of the pseudo stop operation. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, after the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the extra notification period starts. The sub CPU 412 determines an additional number to be added to the remaining number counter when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed. The remaining number counter is subtracted according to the number of medals paid out. As will be described in detail later, the AT state ends when the remaining sheet counter is subtracted to the end value (0 sheets).

  The extra announcement period is, for example, a period of 5 seconds. Further, in the extra notification period, for example, the number of extras is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. When the start lever 24 is operated or the specified time (20 seconds) elapses after the addition notification period ends, each reel 12 starts a steady rotation.

  On the other hand, in the white seven-aligned pattern, all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped after each reel rotates ((1b) in FIG. 23) or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses. Then, the symbol combination of “white seven-white seven-white seven” (hereinafter referred to as “white seven uniform”) is stopped and displayed ((2b) in FIG. 23). FIG. 23 shows an example in which the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed on the middle line. However, the lottery using the black and white seven lottery table described later is performed in the same manner as the line in which the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the black seven-alignment pattern A white seven uniform is displayed on the line according to the result and the order of the pseudo stop operation.

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the combo entry notification period starts. The combo rush notification period is a period in which it is notified that the combo spinning effect (see FIG. 15) is executed along with the display of the number of extras. For example, 5 seconds is set as the time length of the combo entry period. When the start lever 24 is operated or the specified time (20 seconds) elapses after the combo entry notification period ends, the combo drum effect is executed.

  As understood from the above description, in the black and white seven-rotation effect, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, the rotation effect is finished and each reel 12 rotates normally. On the other hand, if the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, then a combo spinning effect is executed. That is, in the black-and-white seven-turn effect, when the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, the combo-turn effect is executed, and when the black seven-match is displayed and stopped, the combo-turn effect is not executed.

  Part (a) of FIG. 24 is a conceptual diagram of a black and white seven lottery table used in a black and white seven-rotor effect. The black and white seven lottery table is configured to include each lottery value of each control pattern. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2, and a control pattern in which the subtraction result is a negative number is determined. Each control pattern includes a black seven-aligned pattern X, a black seven-aligned pattern Y, a white seven pattern X, a white seven pattern Y, and a white seven pattern Z. The black seven-aligned pattern X and the black seven-aligned pattern Y are different in the line where the black seven-aligned stop display is performed even if the order of the pseudo stop operations of the stop buttons 25 is the same. Also, the white seven-aligned pattern X, the white seven-aligned pattern Y, and the white seven-aligned pattern Z are different in the line in which the white seven-aligned stop display is performed even if the order of the pseudo-stop operation of each stop button 25 is the same. .

  Part (b) of FIG. 24 is a conceptual diagram of a black and white seven stop pattern table. The black-and-white seven stop pattern table defines a line in which black seven alignment or white seven alignment is stopped and displayed in each control pattern. Specifically, the black and white seven stop pattern table is displayed when a pseudo stop operation is performed in each order (“left middle right”, “left / right middle”, “middle left / right”, “middle right left”, “right left middle”, “right middle left”). The symbols located at the lower stage of each reel 12 are defined. For example, when the black seven pattern X is determined and the pseudo stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the symbol at the symbol position “6” stops at the lower stage of the reel 12L, and the symbol at the lower stage of the reel 12C. The symbol at position “6” stops, and the symbol at symbol position “4” stops at the lower stage of the reel 12R. In the above case, the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed on the middle line.

  In addition, when the black seven pattern Y is determined and the pseudo stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the symbol at the symbol position “5” stops at the lower stage of the reel 12L, and the lower stage of the reel 12C. The symbol at symbol position “5” stops, and the symbol at symbol position “3” stops at the bottom of the reel 12R. In the above case, the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed on the lower line. That is, when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, in the black seven pattern X, the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed on the middle line, and in the black seven pattern Y, the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed on the lower line.

  As described above, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-turn effect, the combo-turn effect is executed following the black and white seven-turn effect. The combo drum effect of this embodiment is configured to include a first stage, a second stage, and a third stage. When the combo drum effect is started, the first stage starts, and when a specific condition (stop display of black sevens) is satisfied in the first stage, the process proceeds to the second stage. Similarly, when a specific condition is satisfied in the second stage, the process proceeds to the third stage. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied in the third stage, the process shifts to a rush spinning effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the first stage of the combo drum effect. As shown in FIG. 25, when the first stage is started, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation. After that, when all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped or when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, either of the black seven-equipped or the black seven-equipped “Black Seven” symbols. A combination of symbols shifted by one (hereinafter referred to as “black seven off”) is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the spinning effect, each reel 12 rotates in accordance with the operation of the start lever 24, and each reel 12 stops in accordance with the operation (pseudo stop operation) of each stop button 25. Various combinations of symbols are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the above series of games in the period of the spinning effect is referred to as “pseudo game”. In addition, the game from the start operation for determining the winning combination until the combination of symbols as a result of the game (for example, the combination of the winning winning combination from which medals are paid out) is stopped and displayed is the pseudo game and the division There are cases where it is called “normal game”. In addition, when the main CPU 301 receives each operation of the pseudo game, the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating that the operation is received to the sub control board (sub CPU 412) 400. For example, the main CPU 301 transmits a pseudo game start command indicating that a pseudo game start operation has been performed.

  It is determined by the black seven lottery process whether or not the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed as a result of the pseudo game of the combo drum effect. Specifically, in each pseudo game, the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed with a probability of about 1/2, and the black seven off is stopped and displayed with a probability of about 1/2. As shown in FIG. 25, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the process shifts from the first stage to the second stage (the first stage ends). On the other hand, as a result of the pseudo game, when the black seven off is stopped and displayed, the notification period starts. In the notification period, for example, it is informed that the black seven uniform has not been stopped and displayed in this pseudo game. In the notification period, the remaining number of pseudo games that can be executed in the first stage may be notified. When the start lever 24 is operated or the specified time (20 seconds) elapses after the notification period elapses, the next pseudo game is started.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when black seven off is stopped and displayed three times in the combo drum effect, the result notification period starts, and then each reel 12 rotates normally. That is, in the three-time pseudo game of the first stage, when the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed, the combo cylinder effect ends without shifting from the first stage to the second stage. In the result notification period of the first stage, for example, the total value of the number of extra games acquired by the black and white seven-rotor effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

  Part (a) of FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the second stage of the combo spinning effect. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 26, when the second stage is started, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation. Thereafter, when all the stop buttons 25 are subjected to a pseudo stop operation or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, the black seven uniform or the black seven off is stopped and displayed as in the first stage.

  As shown in the part (a) of FIG. 26, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds from the second stage to the third stage. On the other hand, as a result of the pseudo game, when the black seven off is stopped and displayed, the notification period starts. In the notification period, for example, it is informed that the black seven uniform has not been stopped and displayed in this pseudo game. In the notification period, the remaining number of pseudo games that can be executed in the second stage may be notified. When the start lever 24 is operated or the specified time (20 seconds) elapses after the notification period has elapsed, the next pseudo game is started.

  As shown in part (a) of FIG. 26, when the black seven-off is stopped and displayed twice in the combo spinning effect, the result notification period starts, and then each reel 12 rotates normally. That is, in the two-stage pseudo game of the second stage, when the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed, the combo drum effect ends without shifting from the second stage to the third stage. In the result notification period of the second stage, for example, the total value of the number of added games acquired in the first stage and the number of added games acquired in the black and white seven-rotor effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

  Part (b) of FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the third stage of the combo spinning effect. As shown in part (b) of FIG. 26, when the third stage is started, each reel 12 rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation. Thereafter, when all the stop buttons 25 are pseudo-stopped or when a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) elapses, the black seven-equalization or black-seven removal is stopped as in the first stage and the second stage. Is displayed. In the third stage pseudo game, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the rush spinning effect.

  On the other hand, when the black seven off is stopped and displayed, the result notification period is started, and thereafter, the spinning effect is finished and the routine shifts to the steady rotation. That is, in the one-time pseudo game of the third stage, when the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed, the spinning effect is finished without executing the rush spinning effect. In the result notification period of the third stage, for example, the total value of the number of extra games acquired in the first stage and the second stage and the extra number of games acquired in the black and white seven-rotor effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. .

  As understood from the above description, the combo drum effect is divided into a plurality of stages (from the first stage to the third stage). In addition, the first stage can be a maximum of 3 games, the second stage can be a maximum of 2 games, and the third stage can be a pseudo game of 1 game. In addition, whether or not to stop the display of the black seven match is drawn with a probability of about 1/2 in each pseudo game at any stage. Therefore, in the first stage where three games are continued at the maximum, the probability of displaying the black seven match is higher than in the second stage and the third stage. In addition, in the second stage in which two games are continued at the maximum, the probability that the black seven match is displayed is higher than in the third stage. Specifically, the probability (hereinafter referred to as “probability P1”) that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in any pseudo game in the first stage is about 7/8. The probability (hereinafter referred to as “probability P2”) that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in any pseudo game in the second stage is about 3/4 (<probability P1). The probability (hereinafter referred to as “probability P3”) that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the third stage of the pseudo game is about ½ (<probability P2).

  The part (a) of FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram of a black seven availability lottery table used in the combo drum effect. The black seven availability lottery table of FIG. 27 is configured to include lottery values of the respective control patterns, similarly to the black and white seven lottery table (see part (a) of FIG. 24) referred to in the black and white seven-rotor effect. . Each lottery value in the black seven availability lottery table is assigned to each stage. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2 in the combo drum effect process, and the lottery value control pattern in which the subtraction result is a negative number is determined.

  As understood from the part (a) of FIG. 27, in the black seven availability lottery process, a black seven uniform pattern (X, Y) or a black seven off pattern is determined among the control patterns. The black seven-off pattern is a control pattern in which black seven-off is stopped and displayed by a pseudo stop operation.

  Part (b) of FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram of the black seven stop pattern table. The black seven stop pattern table defines a line in which black seven alignment or black seven off is stopped and displayed in each control pattern. Specifically, in the black seven stop pattern table, similar to the black and white seven stop pattern table shown in part (b) of FIG. 24, the symbols that stop at the lower stage of each reel 12 in each control pattern are displayed as pseudo stop operations. It is specified for each order.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the rush spinning effect. FIG. 28 shows a black seven-alignment stopped and displayed in the third stage of the combo spinning effect ((0) in FIG. 28). When the start lever 24 is operated and the rush spinning effect is started, each reel 12 reversely rotates at a speed lower than the steady rotation for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) ((1 in FIG. 28). )). Thereafter, each reel 12 switches the rotation direction, rotates at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((2) in FIG. 28), and automatically stops at the rush start position ((3) in FIG. 28).

  The rush start position is a position where a white seven alignment or a black seven alignment (hereinafter simply referred to as “seven alignment”) is displayed, and is determined in a rush start position lottery process described later. After each reel 12 is stopped at the rush start position, each reel 12 undergoes rush fluctuation.

  In the rush fluctuation, the 7-set is continuously stopped and displayed automatically. Specifically, in the rush fluctuation, the fluctuation at the time of the white seven stop and the fluctuation at the time of the black seven stop are repeatedly executed, and the display of the 7-set is stopped a plurality of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 28, a case is assumed in which the rush start positions are aligned with white sevens. In the above case, the change at the time of white seven stop is executed, and then any one of the seven sets is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 28, the white seven stop change is executed from the rush start position, and the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the rush fluctuation, the black seven-stop fluctuation is executed, and then any of the seven uniforms is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the white seven stop variation of the rush variation. As shown in FIG. 29, the white seven stop change includes a white seven stop change A, a white seven stop change B, and a white seven stop change C. The type of fluctuation at the time of white seven stop is determined in the rush fluctuation lottery process described later.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the white seven stop change A changes in the order of the reel 12L, the reel 12C, and the reel 12R (in order of left middle right), and the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the variation A at the time of white seven stop is started, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol “black seven” (symbol position “5”) is moved to the upper stage of the reel 12L ((1a) in FIG. 29). ). That is, the reel 12L is moved by three frames in the reverse rotation direction and stopped. Thereafter, the reel 12C is moved one frame in the reverse rotation direction ((2a) in FIG. 29), the symbol “black seven” (the symbol position “5”) is stopped at the middle stage of the reel 12C, and the reel 12R is rotated in the forward rotation direction. 3 frames are moved (in the direction of steady rotation) (FIG. 29 (3a)), and the symbol “black seven” (symbol position “3”) is stopped at the lower stage of the reel 12R.

  As described above, when the variation A at the time of white seven stop is executed, the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed instead of the white seven alignment. In the white seven stop change A of the present embodiment, an example in which the reels are changed in the order of left middle right has been described. However, the order in which the reels 12 are changed is not limited to the above example. For example, it may be changed in the order of right middle left. Further, the reels 12 may be changed substantially simultaneously. That is, the changes from (1a) to (3a) in FIG. 29 may be executed substantially simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the white seven stop time fluctuation B, each reel 12 rotates in the forward rotation direction at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1b) in FIG. 29), and the white seven alignment is stopped and displayed again. The Specifically, in the variation B at the time of white seven stop, each reel 12 makes one rotation, and each reel 12 is stopped at the same position (white seven alignment) as before the change.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the white seven stop change C, each reel 12 moves to the original position in the order of left middle right after each reel 12 reversely rotates three frames, and the white seven alignment is stopped and displayed again. Is done. Specifically, when the white seven stop-time fluctuation C starts, each reel 12 moves three frames in the reverse rotation direction substantially simultaneously ((1c) in FIG. 29). When each reel 12 moves three frames in the reverse rotation direction, the symbol “white seven” and the symbol “black seven” move to the outside of the display window 11. Thereafter, the reel 12L moves to the original position ((2c) in FIG. 29), the symbol “white seven” is stopped at the lower stage of the reel 12L, and the reel 12C moves to the original position (( 3c)), the symbol “white seven” is stopped in the middle stage of the reel 12C, the reel 12R is moved to the original position ((4c) in FIG. 29), and the symbol “white seven” is stopped in the upper stage of the reel 12R. The

  As described above, when the change C at the time of white seven stop is executed, the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed again. In the white seven stop change C of the present embodiment, an example in which the reels are changed in the order of left middle right has been described. However, the order in which the reels 12 are changed is not limited to the above example. Further, the reels 12 may be changed substantially simultaneously. That is, the changes from (2c) to (4c) in FIG. 29 may be executed substantially simultaneously.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a variation mode of each reel 12 in the rush variation when the black seven is stopped. The black seven stop change includes a black seven stop change A, a black seven stop change B, and a black seven stop change C. The type of variation at the time of black seven stop is determined in the rush variation lottery process described later, similarly to the type of variation at the time of black seven stop.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the black seven stop change A, the reels 12 change in the order of middle left and right, and the white seven alignment is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the black seven stop time variation A starts, as shown in FIG. 30, the symbol “white seven” (symbol position “4”) is moved to the lower stage of the reel 12L ((1a) in FIG. 30). ). That is, the reel 12L is moved by three frames in the forward rotation direction and stopped. Thereafter, the reel 12C is moved one frame in the forward rotation direction ((2a) in FIG. 30), the symbol “white seven” (symbol position “4”) is stopped in the middle stage of the reel 12C, and the reel 12R is rotated in the reverse rotation direction. 3 frames (FIG. 29 (3a)), the symbol “white seven” (symbol position “4”) is stopped at the upper stage of the reel 12R.

  As described above, when the black seven stop change A is executed, the white seven alignment is stopped and displayed instead of the black seven alignment. In the black seven stop change A of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the reels are changed in the order of left middle, right, and right. However, the order in which the reels 12 are changed is not limited to the above example. Further, the reels 12 may be changed substantially simultaneously. That is, the changes from (1a) to (3a) in FIG. 30 may be executed substantially simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the black seven stop time fluctuation B, each reel 12 rotates in the forward rotation direction at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((1b) in FIG. 30), and the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed again. The Specifically, in the black B stop-time fluctuation B, each reel 12 rotates once, and the reels 12 are stopped at the same position (black seven alignment) as before the fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the black seven stop change C, each reel 12 moves to the original position in the order of left, middle, and right after each reel 12 rotates backward by three frames, and the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed again. Is done. Specifically, when the black seven stop-time fluctuation C starts, each reel 12 moves three frames in the reverse rotation direction substantially simultaneously ((1c) in FIG. 30). When each reel 12 moves three frames in the reverse rotation direction, the symbol “white seven” and the symbol “black seven” move to the outside of the display window 11. Thereafter, the reel 12L moves to the original position ((2c) in FIG. 30), the symbol “Black Seven” stops on the upper stage of the reel 12L, and the reel 12C moves to the original position (((c) in FIG. 30). 3c)), the symbol “black seven” stops in the middle stage of the reel 12C, the reel 12R moves to the original position ((4c) in FIG. 30), and the symbol “black seven” stops in the lower stage of the reel 12R. .

  As described above, when the black seven stop-time fluctuation C is executed, the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed again. In the black seven stop change C of the present embodiment, an example in which the reels are changed in the order of left middle, right, and right has been described. However, the order in which the reels 12 are changed is not limited to the above example. Further, the reels 12 may be changed substantially simultaneously. That is, the changes from (2c) to (4c) in FIG. 30 may be executed substantially simultaneously.

  As described above, in the rush spinning effect (rush), the variation at the time of stopping the white seven or the variation at the time of stopping the black seven is repeatedly executed, and the seven-alignment is stopped and displayed every time each variation is executed. Further, in the variation at the time of the white seven stop or the variation at the time of the black seven stop, each reel 12 fluctuates in the forward rotation direction and the reverse rotation direction. Rich in change.

  Returning to FIG. When the rush fluctuation ends, each reel 12 stops as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the start lever 24 is operated, each reel 12 starts rotating at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation ((4) in FIG. 28). Thereafter, when each reel 12 is subjected to a pseudo stop operation or a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, the white seven alignment or the white seven off is stopped and displayed. When the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed ((5) in FIG. 28), the rush spinning effect is repeated (returning to (1) in FIG. 28). Specifically, in the rush crotch production, when the pseudo stop operation is performed and the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, when the start lever 24 is operated thereafter, the fluctuations (1) to (3) in FIG. Will start again.

  On the other hand, when the white seven off is displayed in a stopped manner ((6) in FIG. 28), after the result notification period (5 seconds) elapses, the rotation shifts to steady rotation. The white seven uniform is stopped and displayed when the win is continuously won in the white seven continuous lottery process described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the 7-line uniform is stopped and displayed in the rush fluctuation, the additional number is added to the remaining number counter. During the result announcement period of the rush crotch effect, the total number of extras added by the rush fluctuation of the rush crotch effect and a series of each of the black and white seven crotch effect, combo crotch effect and rush crotch effect The total number of extra games added in the performance is announced.

  Part (a) of FIG. 31 is a conceptual diagram of the white seven continuation rate lottery table. As described above, when the continuation is won in the white seven continuous lottery process, the rush fluctuation is executed again after the rush fluctuation is completed. The probability of winning continuously in the white seven continuous lottery process (hereinafter referred to as “white seven continuation rate”) is provided with a continuation rate PWL, a continuation rate PWM, and a continuation rate PWH.

  The white seven continuation rate lottery table is used to determine the white seven continuation rate PW in the white seven continuation lottery process, and includes lottery values for each white seven continuation rate (PWL, PWM, PWH). In the white seven continuation rate lottery process, each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2, and the white seven continuation rate PW in which the subtraction result is a negative number is determined. For example, it is assumed that the random value R2 is a numerical value “200”. In the above case, when the lottery value of the continuation rate PWL is subtracted and then the lottery value of the continuation rate PWM is subtracted, the subtraction result becomes a negative number, so the continuation rate PWM (about 50%) is determined. Therefore, after the rush fluctuation is finished, the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed with a probability of about 50%, and the rush fluctuation is executed again.

  The part (b) of FIG. 31 is a conceptual diagram of the rush start position lottery table. The rush start position lottery table includes each lottery value at each start position. The rush start position is either white seven or black seven. In the rush start position lottery process described above, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value from the random value R2, and determines the rush start position where the subtraction result is a negative number.

  Part (c) of FIG. 31 is a conceptual diagram of the initial stock lottery table. The initial stock number determined using the initial stock lottery table is stored in the rush stock counter. The rush stock counter is decremented every time the 7-line is stopped and displayed in the rush fluctuation, and the rush fluctuation continues until the numerical value of the rush stock counter reaches the end value (numerical value “0”). The rush stock counter is stored in the main RAM 303, for example. In the present embodiment, the initial stock number of 5, 7, 10, or 15 is determined. Therefore, in a single rush change, the seven matches are stopped and displayed at least five times.

  As described above, the rush stock counter is decremented when the seven-aligned stop is displayed, but even if the seven-aligned is stopped, the continuation lottery process described below is won for continuation. If not subtracted. That is, a single rush stock can stop and display a plurality of seven matches. In addition, each rush stock may have a different probability of winning a continuation in the stock continuation lottery process (hereinafter referred to as “stock continuation rate”). Specifically, each stock continuation rate of each rush stock is set to one of a continuation rate PRL (about 50%), a continuation rate PRM (about 66%), and a continuation rate PRH (about 75%).

  Part (d) of FIG. 31 is a conceptual diagram of a stock continuation rate lottery table. The stock continuation rate lottery table includes each lottery value of each continuation rate (PRL, PRM, PRH). Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2 in the stock continuation rate lottery process, and the stock continuation rate in which the subtraction result becomes a negative number is determined. For example, when the random value R2 is a numerical value “100”, the result of subtracting the lottery value of the continuation rate PRL from the random value R2 becomes a negative number, and the continuation rate PRL is determined. In the above case, the continuation is won at 50% in the stock continuation lottery, and the rush stock will not disappear as long as the continuation of 50% is won (the rush stock counter is not subtracted). For example, if the 50% continuation lottery is won twice in the stock continuation lottery and the continuation lottery is not won in the third stock continuation lottery, the rush stock counter is not decremented until the seven-match is stopped and displayed three times.

  Parts (e-1) to (e-4) in FIG. 31 are conceptual diagrams of a rush fluctuation lottery table used in the rush fluctuation lottery process. The main CPU 301 determines the type of fluctuation of each reel 12 until the next seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, according to the stopped seven-alignment type and the current value of the rush stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses the first rush fluctuation lottery table to store each reel 12 when the stopped seven-alignment is the black seven-alignment and the rush stock counter is a numerical value “5” or more. Determine the type of variation. On the other hand, the main CPU 301 determines the fluctuation of each reel 12 using the second rush fluctuation lottery table when the stopped seven-equity is black seven-equal and the rush stock counter is a numerical value “4” or less. Determine the type. Further, the main CPU 301 determines the type of variation of each reel 12 using the third rush variation lottery table when the stopped seven-alignment is the white seven-alignment and the rush stock counter is a numerical value “5” or more. When the rush stock counter is equal to or smaller than the numerical value “4”, the type of variation of each reel 12 is determined using the fourth rush variation lottery table.

  As shown in part (e-1) of FIG. 31, the first rush fluctuation lottery table includes a lottery value for black seven stop time fluctuation A, a black seven stop time fluctuation B lottery, and a black seven stop time fluctuation C. And lottery values. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2 in the rush fluctuation lottery process, and the fluctuation in which the subtraction result becomes a negative number is determined. On the other hand, as shown in the part (e-2) of FIG. 31, the second rush fluctuation table is configured to include a lottery value of the black seven stop time fluctuation A and a black seven stop time fluctuation B lottery value. The difference from the first rush fluctuation lottery table is that the black seven stop-time fluctuation C is not included. That is, when the remaining number of rush stocks is 5 or more, the variation C when black seven stops is determined, and when the remaining number of lash stocks is 4 or less, the variation C when black seven stops is not determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there is provided a pattern variation mode in the rush variation that is not determined when the rush stock is smaller than the predetermined numerical value “5”. According to the above configuration, in the rush fluctuation, when each reel 12 fluctuates due to the black seven stop-time fluctuation C, it is possible to make the player recognize that five or more lash stocks remain.

  As described above, when each reel 12 fluctuates due to the black seven stop-time fluctuation A, the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed. In addition, when each reel 12 fluctuates due to black seven stop change B or black seven stop change C, the black seven alignment is stopped and displayed. That is, determining the variation mode of each reel 12 is also referred to as determining the type of the next seven-alignment (black seven-alignment or white seven-alignment). In this embodiment, as understood from the part (e-1) and the part (e-2) in FIG. 31, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed due to the current fluctuation, the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed next time. The variation to be performed is easily determined. Specifically, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the current variation, and the remaining rush stock is 5 or more, the variation in which the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed with a probability of 184/256 is determined. Then, the variation in which the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed with the probability 72/256 is determined. In addition, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the current variation, and the remaining rush stock is 4 or less, the variation in which the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed is determined with probability 192/256, and the probability In 64/256, a change in which the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed is determined.

  As shown in part (e-3) of FIG. 31, the third rush fluctuation lottery table is configured to include lottery values from the white seven stop time fluctuation A to the white seven stop time fluctuation C. Further, as shown in part (e-4) of FIG. 31, the fourth rush fluctuation lottery table is configured to include the lottery values of the white seven stop time fluctuation A and the white seven stop time fluctuation B, and the white seven stop It differs from the third rush fluctuation lottery table in that it does not include the lottery value of the time fluctuation C. That is, the white C7 stop change C is not determined when the remaining number of lash stocks is 4 or less, as is the black seven stop change C. Therefore, when each reel 12 fluctuates due to the white seven stop time fluctuation C, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining number of lash stocks is five or more. Further, as understood from the part (e-3) and the part (e-4) in FIG. 31, when the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed by the current variation, the next time the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed. Easy to be determined.

  For example, a configuration is assumed in which the seven-match in rush fluctuation is determined regardless of the previously stopped seven-match. In the above configuration, the same type of seven assemblages are easily stopped and displayed in comparison with the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a seven match different from the previously stopped seven match is easily determined as the next seven match. In other words, the seven sets are easily displayed alternately. According to the present embodiment, since the seven-sets that are stopped and displayed are likely to change, the effect that the variation mode of the reel in the rush variation is rich in change is particularly remarkable.

    FIG. 32 is a conceptual diagram of each reel lock lottery table (A to D). Each reel lock lottery table includes a reel lock lottery table A, a reel lock lottery table B, a reel lock lottery table C, and a reel lock lottery table D. The reel lock lottery table A is referred to when the winning area “05” (common bell) is won. In the reel lock lottery table B, when the winning area “14” (weak watermelon), the winning area “16” (weak cherry) or the winning area “20” (weak chance) (hereinafter referred to as “weak rare role”) is won. To be referenced. The reel lock lottery table C includes a winning area “15” (strong watermelon), a winning area “18” (middle cherry), a winning area “17” (strong cherry) or a winning area “21” (strong chance) (hereinafter “ It is referred to when “strong rare role” is won. The reel lock lottery table D is referred to when the winning area “19” (strongest cherry), the winning area “22” (strongest), or the winning area “23” (bonus) (hereinafter referred to as “final role”) is won. The

  As shown in FIG. 32, each reel lock lottery table includes each lottery value corresponding to each reel lock (short lock, middle lock, long lock). Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R2 in the reel lock lottery process. In the reel lock lottery process, each lottery value is sequentially subtracted from the random value R2, and the reel lock in which the result of the subtraction is a negative number is determined.

  In this embodiment, a reel lock including a short lock, a middle lock, and a long lock is executed. In the short lock, each reel 12 is maintained in a stopped state for a predetermined time length (for example, about 1000 ms) from the time when the start of the game is instructed (the time when the start lever 24 is operated), and the predetermined time length elapses. After that, each reel 12 is rotated regularly. In the middle lock, each reel 12 is maintained in a stopped state for a predetermined time length (for example, about 2000 ms) from the time when the start of the game is instructed, and each reel 12 is normally rotated after the predetermined time length has elapsed. The length of time during which the reels 12 are stopped is longer in the middle lock than in the short lock. In the long lock, each reel 12 is maintained in a stopped state for a predetermined time length (for example, about 5000 ms) from the time when the start of the game is instructed, and each reel 12 is rotated regularly after the predetermined time length has elapsed. The length of time for which each reel 12 is kept stopped is longer in the long lock than in the middle lock.

  The main RAM 303 stores a display permission bit storage area indicating a combination of symbols permitted to stop on the active line, a display setting value storage area for storing a numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36, and a setting value. Setting value storage area, random number value R1 storage area for storing random number value R1, random number value R2 storage area for storing random number value R2, command storage area for storing commands to be transmitted to sub-control board 400, various lamps A lamp related data storage area for storing data indicating a display mode, a winning area storage area for storing a winning area, an unstopped operation counter indicating the number of stop buttons 25 that are not stopped, and an operation order of each stop button 25. A storage area including a stop order storage area for storage is provided.

  The main RAM 303 has a main state storage area for storing the current main state. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 33, the main state storage area has a numerical value “0” in the main state 0, a numerical value “1” in the main state 1, and a numerical value “2” in the main state 2. Is stored. Further, the main state storage area is updated every time the main state shifts.

  Part (b) of FIG. 33 is a diagram showing transition of the main state. For example, when the AT start spinning effect is executed in the main state 0, the state shifts to the main state 1 and the main state storage area is updated from the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “1”. Further, when the SP confirmed replay (winning area “04”) is won in the main state 0 or the main state 1, the main state storage area is changed from the numerical value “0” or “1” to the numerical value “0”. 2 ”. Further, when the SP start spinning effect is executed in the main state 0, the state shifts to the main state 2 and the main state storage area is updated from the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “2”. Further, when 20 games are played in the main state 2, the state shifts to the main state 1 and the main state storage area is updated from the numerical value “2” to the numerical value “1”. When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation order in the main state 1 (see FIG. 16), the main state storage area is updated from the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “0”.

<Each data used by sub CPU>
Hereinafter, various data stored in the sub ROM 413 will be described with reference to the drawings. The sub ROM 413 includes a normal lottery table shown in FIG. 36, a first addition table shown in FIG. 37, a scenario state transition table shown in FIG. 39, an addition state determination table shown in FIG. 40, a lottery state determination table shown in FIG. The initial HP table shown in FIG. 45, each table used in the periodic chance state shown in FIG. 45, the special victory determination table shown in FIG. 46, the enemy character determination table shown in FIG. 49, the enemy character display value determination table shown in FIG. Back mode determination table shown in FIG. 53, additional value determination table shown in FIG. 53, effect lottery table shown in FIG. 54, tables used in the special chance state shown in FIG. 56, background change table shown in FIG. 58, AT level determination shown in FIG. Table, second addition table shown in FIG. 63, addition state determination table during AT shown in FIG. 64, upper shown in FIG. Various types including the number-of-placement determination table, the special addition effect determination table shown in FIG. 67, the special AT determination table shown in FIG. 70, each table referred to in the return determination processing shown in FIG. 71, and the stock number determination table shown in FIG. Store the data.

  The sub CPU 412 executes various processes according to the sub state. The current sub state is stored in the sub RAM 414. As shown in FIG. 34, each sub-state includes a normal state, a precursor state, a periodic chance state, a special chance state, a start preparation state, an AT state, an end preparation state, an SP state, an add-on standby state, and a special AT state. Yes. Each sub-state shifts when each condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific lottery is won). FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating transition of each sub-state.

  FIG. 36 is a conceptual diagram of the normal lottery table. As will be described in detail later, the sub CPU 412 executes the normal lottery process using the normal lottery table corresponding to the combination of the lottery mode and the lottery state. The lottery mode is switched every time the periodic chance state ends, and the lottery state is switched when a rare combination is won. FIG. 36 illustrates a normal lottery table used in a game in which the lottery mode is the first lottery mode and the lottery state is the first lottery state.

  The sub CPU 412 executes the normal lottery process using the normal lottery table and the random value R3 (0 to 65535) in each game in the normal state. In the normal lottery process, a transition to any of the AT state (AT levels 0 to 3), the SP state, and the special chance state (modes 1 to 3) is determined.

  The AT state includes AT level 0, AT level 1, AT level 2, AT level 3, and AT level EX. Each AT level has a different level of profit (for example, an expected value in each game of an added value of a second counter described later). The special chance state includes modes 1 to 3 and is a sub state that is more likely to win the AT state than the normal state. As will be described in detail later, in the special chance state, the correct pressing order of the batting order bell is notified a predetermined number of times. The number of times that the correct pressing order of the batting order bell is notified is determined according to the modes (1 to 3). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the transition to the SP state when a winning combination (strongest cherry, strongest eye, bonus) is won in the game in the normal state.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines the AT state in the normal lottery process, the sub CPU 412 adds a numerical value “1” to the AT set number counter. An AT set number counter is provided for each AT level, and an AT set number counter corresponding to the determined AT level is added. The AT set number counter is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the normal lottery table includes a lottery value of “out of” (no transition), lottery values of “AT state” (levels 0 to 3), lottery value of “SP state”, and “special chance state”. "(Modes 1 to 3) including the lottery values. Each lottery value is provided for each combination of the winning area and the type of reel lock (short lock, middle lock, long lock) of the game won by the winning area. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random value R3, and the transition to the sub-state of the lottery value with the subtraction result being a negative number is determined. For example, it is assumed that the random value R3 is a numerical value “50000” in a game where a weak watermelon is won. In the above games, when the type of reel lock is “no lock”, “short” or “middle”, the lottery value “63821” of “out” is subtracted from the random value R3 and the result is negative. The sub-state does not transition. On the other hand, in a game where the winning combination is a weak watermelon and the random number value R3 is “50000” and the reel lock type is “long”, the lottery value “43903” in the AT state (level 0) is the random number value R3. Then, the result of subtracting the lottery value “16384” in the AT state (level 1) becomes a negative number. Therefore, the transition to the AT state of AT level 1 is determined.

  In a normal state, when a weak rare role (weak watermelon, weak cherry, weak chance eyes) or a strong rare role (strong watermelon, strong cherry, middle cherries, strong chance eyes) is won, it shifts to a precursor state (FIG. 35). (A)). The precursor state includes the precursor state and the gasse precursor state. This precursor state shifts when the AT state, the SP state, or the special chance state is won in the normal lottery process. On the other hand, for example, when a weak rare combination or a strong rare combination is won and the AT state, the SP state, and the special chance state are not won in the normal lottery process, the gaze precursor state shifts.

  The precursor state ends with a predetermined number of games. Specifically, the AT state or the SP state is won to shift to the real precursor state, and when the precursor state is completed, the state shifts to the start preparation state ((B) of FIG. 35). Further, when the special chance state is won and the sign state is finished, the state shifts to the special chance state ((C) of FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the precursor sign state is finished, the state shifts to the normal state ((D) in FIG. 35). In the special chance state, when the AT state is won, the start preparation state is entered ((E) in FIG. 35), and when the AT state is not won, the normal state is entered ((FIG. 35 ((E))). F)). Further, when the AT state is not won in 1500 games in the normal state, the state shifts to the precursor state and then shifts to the AT state.

  When the SP state is won, in the start preparation state, the order 2 is notified in the transition operation order, and the SP start spinning effect is executed. When the SP start spinning effect is executed, the state shifts to the SP state ((M) in FIG. 35). If the SP confirmed replay is won, the sub state shifts to the SP state. As described above, in the SP state, at least one red seven-equity stop display is ensured, and the game after the SP state ends is in the AT state ((N) in FIG. 35).

  In each game in the normal state, the first counter addition process is executed in addition to the above-described normal lottery process. The first counter addition process is a process for adding the added value to the first counter. The first counter is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example. When the first counter reaches the predetermined threshold value “256”, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the periodic chance state ((G) in FIG. 35). The periodic chance state is a sub state in which the transition to the AT state is easily determined as compared with the normal state. As will be described in detail later, the periodic chance state includes a first chance state, a second chance state, and a third chance state.

  The first counter is incremented by a numerical value “1” in each game of the normal game. In addition, when the addition value is determined in the first counter addition process, the addition value is added to the first counter. The added value is determined in the game where the replay (batting order replay X, Y) is won. The added value of the first counter is determined according to the value of the replay continuous counter. The replay continuation counter is incremented in the game where the replay is won, and is initialized with the game other than the replay. That is, the replay continuous counter means the number of times replay has been won continuously. The replay continuous counter is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  In each game in the AT state, the second counter addition process is executed in the game where the replay is won, and the second counter is added. The second counter is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example. When the second counter reaches a predetermined threshold value, the state shifts to an additional standby state, and the black and white seven-rotor effect is executed. In each game in the AT state, whether or not to shift to the special AT state is drawn, and when the lottery is won, the state shifts to the special AT state. The special AT state is a sub-state in which the added value of the second counter is easily determined as compared with the AT state, and ends with a predetermined number of games (30 times or 60 times). The number of remaining games in the special AT state is stored in, for example, the sub RAM 414.

  FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram of a first addition table used in the first counter addition process. As will be described in detail later, the sub CPU 412 executes the first counter addition process using the first addition table corresponding to the combination of the addition mode and the addition state. Similar to the lottery mode described above, the addition mode is switched every time the periodic chance state ends. Further, the addition state is switched when the rare combination is won, similarly to the lottery state described above. FIG. 37 illustrates a first addition table used in a game in which the addition mode is the first addition mode and the addition state is the first addition state.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the first addition table includes each lottery value of each addition value. In the first counter addition process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random number value R3, and adds the addition value obtained by subtracting the negative result to the first counter. In addition, each lottery value of each added value is provided for each value of the replay continuous counter, and the expected value of the added value increases as the replay continuous counter increases. Specifically, in a game in which batting order replay X has been won, the expected value of the added value when the number of consecutive replay wins is “1” (that is, when other than replay was won in the previous game) or “2” is It is about 4.5, and is about 9 when the number of consecutive winning replays is “3” or “4”, and about 16 when the number of consecutive winning replays is “5”. When the number of consecutive replay wins is 6 or more, each lottery value when the number of continuous wins for replay is 5 is subtracted from the random value R2.

  In the present embodiment, different first addition tables are used for the game in which the batting order replay X is won and the game in which the batting order replay Y is won. Part (a) of FIG. 37 is a first addition table used in a game won by batting order replay X, and part (b) of FIG. 37 is a first addition table used in a game won by batting order replay Y. is there. As described above, in the game in which the hitting order replay X (1, 2) is won, when the stop button 25L is first stopped (the first stop is left), the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the game where the batting order replay Y (1, 2) is won, when the stop button 25L is first stopped, the special replay is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 13).

  In the normal state, the player performs a first stop operation on the stop button 25L in principle. Therefore, in the normal state, the normal replay is stopped and displayed in the game in which the batting order replay X is won, and the special replay is stopped and displayed in the game in which the batting order replay Y is won. That is, the first addition table in part (a) of FIG. 37 is used in a game in which the normal replay is stopped and displayed, and the first addition table in part (b) in FIG. 37 is a game in which the special replay is stopped and displayed. In other words, it is used in

  As understood from FIG. 37, when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “1”, each lottery value of each added value is equal when the batting order replay X is won and when the batting order replay Y is won. On the other hand, each lottery value when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “2” differs depending on whether or not the batting order replay X is won and the batting order replay Y is won. Specifically, when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “2” in the game where the batting order replay X is won, the expected value of the addition value is about 4.5 as described above, whereas the batting order replay Y is won. In this case, it is about 9. Similarly, when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “3”, each lottery value of each added value is equal when the batting order replay X is won and when the batting order replay Y is won. In addition, regarding the lottery values when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “4” and “5”, the game value won by the batting order replay Y has a higher expected value of the added value than the game won by the batting order replay X. Is set to As understood from the above description, in a game in which special replay is stopped and displayed, a large added value is easily determined as compared to a game in which normal replay is stopped and displayed.

  When the sub state shifts to the periodic chance state and the AT state is won in the periodic chance state, the state shifts to the start preparation state ((H) in FIG. 35). In the start preparation state, when the AT start spinning effect described above is executed, the state shifts to the AT state ((I) in FIG. 35). As described above, the AT state ends when the remaining number counter reaches the end value, and when the AT state ends, the AT state shifts to the end preparation state ((J) in FIG. 35). If the main state shifts to the main state 0 in the end preparation state, then the sub state shifts to the normal state ((K) in FIG. 35).

  When the AT state is not won in the periodic chance state, the state shifts to the normal state ((L) in FIG. 35). In the present embodiment, the period of the game in the normal state from the end of the previous cycle chance state to the transition to the current cycle chance state is referred to as “one cycle”. The number of cycles since the previous AT state ended (the number of failures in the cycle chance state) is stored in the cycle counter of the sub RAM 414. The number of games in one cycle can be different in each cycle depending on the result of the first counter addition process described above. However, in the present embodiment, the first counter is incremented by at least the numerical value “1” in a game in which replay is not won, so one cycle is completed with a maximum of 256 games.

  The normal state is configured to be switchable to a plurality of addition modes in which expected values of addition values determined in each game are different from each other. Specifically, the normal state is switched to the first addition mode and the second addition mode in which the expected value of the addition value determined in each game is larger than that in the first addition mode. The addition mode is switched every time one cycle ends (every time one cycle chance state ends).

  FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining each addition mode scenario. When the period chance state ends, the sub CPU 412 determines an addition mode for the next period using the addition mode scenario table and the value of the period counter. For example, in the addition mode of the first cycle (period counter = 0) after the AT state is ended, the first addition mode is determined with probability 1/2 and the second addition mode is determined with probability 1/2.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of scenario states including normal A, normal B, heaven A, heaven B, and super heaven are provided. Each addition mode scenario is selected according to the scenario state. In this embodiment, when a transition to the 20th cycle chance state (hereinafter referred to as a “ceiling cycle chance state”) is performed in normal A or normal B, regardless of whether or not the AT state is won in the periodic chance state, , Transition to the AT state.

  In heaven A, heaven B, or super heaven, the cycle chance state in the first cycle becomes the ceiling cycle chance state, and then the state shifts to the AT state regardless of whether or not the AT state is won in the cycle chance state. If the next AT state is not won in the period of 1500 games (including the normal state, the periodic chance state, and the special chance state) after the AT state ends, the state shifts to the AT state.

  Part (a) of FIG. 38 illustrates a normal A addition mode scenario, and part (b) of FIG. 38 illustrates a normal B addition mode scenario. As can be understood from FIG. 38, the addition mode in each period may be different in each addition mode scenario. For example, normal mode A and normal mode B have the same addition mode in the fourth cycle as in the first addition mode, but the third cycle addition mode has normal mode A in the second addition mode and normal mode B in the first mode. This is a 1 addition mode and is different.

  According to the above configuration, the expected value of the added value of each game is different in each addition mode (each cycle). Further, the numerical value of the first counter that shifts to the periodic challenge state is common (256) in each period. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the average number of games required until the end of each cycle can be made different in each cycle, and the game in the normal state can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of addition scenario modes, and the period of the second addition mode is different for each addition scenario mode. Therefore, the effect that the game in the normal state can be prevented from becoming monotonous is particularly remarkable.

  FIG. 39 is a conceptual diagram of the scenario state transition table. When the AT state (end preparation state) ends, the sub CPU 412 determines the scenario state (transfer destination scenario) after the end of the AT state according to the scenario state immediately before the AT state (transfer source scenario state). State). For example, if the scenario state of the migration source is normal A, the scenario state of the migration destination becomes normal A again at about 35%. In addition, when the scenario state of the migration source is normal A, the scenario state of the migration destination is normal B at about 50%, heaven A at about 13%, heaven B at about 1.6%, and about 0.4%. Become super heaven.

  The above is the description of the configuration related to the addition mode. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the addition state will be described. FIG. 40 is a conceptual diagram of an addition state determination table that is referred to when the addition state is switched. As described above, the addition mode is changed every time the periodic chance state ends, whereas the addition state is changed according to the winning area of each game. Each addition state includes a first addition state, a second addition state in which an expected value of the added value in each game is greater than that in the first added state, and a third in which an expected value of the added value in each game is greater than in the second added state. Addition state. In the present embodiment, when the addition value is determined in the third addition state, a large addition value is easily determined as compared with the second addition state or the first addition state. Further, when the addition value is determined in the second addition state, a larger addition value is easily determined as compared with the first addition state. Each addition state can be changed to an upper state when a weak rare combination or a strong rare combination is won in the winning area. On the other hand, each addition state can be changed to a lower order state when the batting order bell (A1-4, B1-4) is won.

  Each addition state determination table includes an addition state determination table used in the first addition state shown in part (a) of FIG. 40, and an addition state determination table used in the second addition state shown in part (b) of FIG. , And an addition state determination table used in the third addition state shown in part (c) of FIG. Each addition state determination table includes each lottery value of each addition state. In the addition state determination process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random value R3, and shifts to an addition state in which the subtraction result is a negative number. Each lottery value is provided for each combination of the winning area and the type of reel lock (short lock, middle lock, long lock) of the game won by the winning area.

  As understood from FIG. 40, when the batting order bell is won in the first addition state, the addition state is not changed. On the other hand, when the weak rare combination or the strong rare combination is won, the state is changed to the second addition state or the third addition state with a predetermined probability. When the batting order bell is won in the second addition state, it is changed (falls) to the first addition state with a probability of about 1/18. On the other hand, when a weak rare combination or a strong rare combination is won, the state is changed to the third addition state with a predetermined probability. When the batting order bell is won in the third addition state, it is changed to the second addition state with a probability of about 1/18. On the other hand, when a weak rare combination or a strong rare combination is won, the addition state is not changed. Note that the addition state in the first cycle after the AT state ends is the first addition state with a probability of about 1/4, the second addition state with a probability of about 1/4, and the third addition state with a probability of about 1/2. Addition state.

  In the present embodiment, by using the first addition table (FIG. 37) corresponding to the combination of the addition mode and the addition state, the addition value is determined in each game with the expected value corresponding to the addition mode and the addition state. Is done. For example, a game in which the addition mode is the first addition mode and the addition state is the first addition state has the smallest expected value of the addition value, and a game in which the addition mode is the second addition mode and the addition state is the second addition state The expected value is the largest.

  The sub CPU 412 determines a normal lottery table (FIG. 36) to be referred to when determining the AT state and the special chance state according to the combination of the lottery mode and the lottery state. As will be described in detail below, the lottery mode includes the first lottery mode and the second lottery mode that is easier to win the AT state or the special chance state than the first lottery mode, and is similar to the addition mode described above. In addition, it is changed every time the periodic chance state ends. In addition, the lottery state includes the first lottery state and the second lottery state that is more likely to win the AT state and the special chance state than the first lottery state. It changes according to the winning area of the game.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of each lottery mode scenario. When the periodic chance state ends, the sub CPU 412 determines the lottery mode for the next cycle using the lottery mode scenario and the value of the cycle counter. In addition, the lottery mode scenario is provided for each scenario state including normal A, normal B, heaven A, heaven B, and super heaven, similar to the addition mode scenario described above. Part (a) of FIG. 41 illustrates a normal A lottery mode scenario, and part (b) of FIG. 41 illustrates a normal B lottery mode scenario.

  As understood from FIG. 41, the lottery mode of each cycle is different between the normal A lottery mode scenario and the normal B lottery mode scenario. Specifically, in both normal A and normal B, the first lottery mode is the first lottery mode. On the other hand, in the lottery mode of each cycle after the second cycle, in the case of normal A, the odd-numbered cycle becomes the second lottery mode, and in the case of normal B, the even-numbered cycle becomes the second lottery mode.

  FIG. 42 is a conceptual diagram of a lottery state determination table used when the lottery state is switched. As described above, the lottery mode is changed every time the periodic chance state ends, whereas the lottery state is changed according to the winning area of each game. Each lottery state includes a first lottery state, a second lottery state that is easier to win the AT state and the special chance state than the first lottery state, and a third lottery that is easier to win the AT state and the special chance state than the second lottery state. It is configured to include the state. In addition, each lottery state is changed to a higher state when a weak rare combination or strong rare combination is won in the winning area, similarly to each addition state described above, and the batting order bell (A1-4, B1-4) If is elected, it will be changed to a lower level.

  Each lottery state determination table includes a lottery state determination table referred to in the first lottery state shown in part (a) of FIG. 42 and a lottery referred to in the second lottery state shown in part (b) of FIG. 42 includes a state determination table and a lottery state determination table referred to in the third lottery state shown in part (c) of FIG. Each lottery state determination table includes each lottery value of each lottery state. In the lottery state determination process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random value R3, and shifts to a lottery state where the subtraction result is a negative number. Each lottery value is provided for each combination of the winning area and the type of reel lock (short lock, middle lock, long lock) of the game won by the winning area.

  As understood from FIG. 42, when the batting order bell is won in the first lottery state, the lottery state is not changed. On the other hand, when a weak rare combination or a strong rare combination is won, it is changed to the second lottery state or the third lottery state with a predetermined probability. If the batting order bell wins in the second lottery state, it is changed (falls) to the first lottery state with a probability of about 1/18. On the other hand, when the weak rare combination or the strong rare combination is won, the third lottery state is changed with a predetermined probability. If the batting order bell wins in the third lottery state, it is changed to the second lottery state with a probability of about 1/18. On the other hand, when a weak rare combination or a strong rare combination is won, the lottery state is not changed.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of transition of each mode and each state. FIG. 43 shows each mode and each state from the fourth period to the sixth period. As shown in FIG. 43, the fourth cycle is the normal state of the first addition mode and the first lottery mode, the fifth cycle is the normal state of the first addition mode and the second lottery mode, and the sixth cycle is The normal state of the second addition mode and the first lottery mode is set (see FIGS. 38 and 41). Each mode is not changed in the game during each cycle. On the other hand, the addition state and the lottery state are changed according to the winning area (rare combination or batting order bell) in the game during each cycle.

  FIG. 44 is a conceptual diagram of an initial HP (hit point) table. The initial HP is set for each periodic chance state as the initial value of the enemy HP counter. In each game in the periodic chance state, the enemy HP counter is subtracted according to the winning area. The enemy HP counter is stored in, for example, the sub RAM 414. When the enemy HP is subtracted from the initial HP to the numerical value “0” in the periodic chance state, the transition to the AT state is determined.

  As described above, the periodic chance state includes the first chance state, the second chance state, and the third chance state, and shifts to any periodic chance state every time each cycle ends. The first chance state corresponds to the enemy character A, the second chance state corresponds to the enemy character B, and the third chance state corresponds to the enemy character C.

  As shown in FIG. 44, in the first chance state, a numerical value “300” is set as the initial value of the enemy HP counter. In the second chance state, the numerical value “200” is set as the initial value of the enemy HP counter, and in the third chance state, the numerical value “100” is set as the initial value of the enemy HP counter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the enemy HP counter is different between the first chance state, the second chance state, and the third chance state. That is, each periodic chance state includes a plurality of chance states having different probabilities of determining the transition to the AT state. According to the above configuration, for example, the cyclic chance state is rich in change and gameability is improved as compared with a configuration in which the initial value of the enemy HP counter is the same in each cyclic chance state.

  The periodic chance state ends with a predetermined number of games. In the present embodiment, the periodic chance state ends with 10 games. The number of remaining games in the cyclic chance state is stored in, for example, a game number counter of the sub RAM 414. Also, weapons W (WX, WY, WZ) are assigned to each game in the periodic chance state. The sub CPU 412 determines a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as “damage”) to be subtracted from the enemy HP counter in the game according to the weapon W of each game in the periodic chance state. Each weapon W includes a weapon WX, a weapon WY, and a weapon WZ. The game to which the weapon WX is assigned, the game to which the weapon WY is assigned, and the game to which the weapon WZ is assigned have a determined damage. Different.

  Part (a) of FIG. 45 is a conceptual diagram of a weapon table. The weapon table includes each damage that can be subtracted from the enemy HP counter by each weapon W (WX, WY, WZ) of each game. The damage of each weapon W includes normal hit damage and critical hit damage. Specifically, the normal hit damage of the weapon WX is a numerical value “10”, and the critical hit damage is a numerical value “20”. Further, the damage of the normal hit of the weapon WY is “30”, and the damage of the critical hit is “60”. The damage of the normal hit of the weapon WZ is “50” and the damage of the critical hit is “100”. That is, the critical hit damage is twice the normal hit damage. In each game in the periodic chance state, a normal hit or a critical hit is determined according to the winning area of the game.

  Part (b) of FIG. 45 is a conceptual diagram of the damage type table. The sub CPU 412 determines the type of damage in the current game with reference to the damage type table. Specifically, in a game in which the hitting order replay X (the first left stop indicates that the normal replay is stopped) is won, a normal hit is determined as the type of damage. Therefore, when the batting order replay X is won in the game of the weapon WX, the damage “10” is subtracted from the enemy HP counter. Also, when the batting order replay X is won in the game of the weapon WY, the damage “30” is subtracted from the enemy HP counter, and when the batting order replay X is won in the game of the weapon WZ, the damage “50” is the enemy HP counter. Is subtracted from. In a game in which a rare combination (watermelon, chance, etc.) is won, a normal hit is determined in the same manner as a game in which the batting order replay X is won.

  In the periodic chance state, when hitting order replay Y (special replay is stopped and displayed at the first left stop) is won, a critical hit is determined as the type of damage. Therefore, when the hitting order replay Y is won in the game of the weapon WX, the damage “20” is subtracted from the enemy HP counter. Also, if the hit order replay Y is won in the game of the weapon WY, the damage “60” is subtracted from the enemy HP counter, and if the hit order replay Y is won in the game of the weapon WZ, the damage “100” is the enemy HP counter. Is subtracted from. That is, in a game in which the batting order replay Y is won, a larger damage is likely to be determined than in a game in which the batting order replay X or a rare role is won.

  On the other hand, in a game where the winning area is “batting order bell” or “common bell”, the damage corresponding to the weapon W of the game is not subtracted from the enemy HP counter. The weapon W of each game in the periodic chance state is allocated when the periodic chance state starts, and is switched to the next weapon W even when the damage caused by the current weapon W is not subtracted.

  By the way, in the case of the above configuration, if the bell is continuously selected after the periodic chance state is started, the remaining periodic chance state is digested in a state where the enemy HP counter is not subtracted at all. For example, if the enemy chance counter is “300” in the remaining 2 games in the remaining cyclic chance state, it is impossible to decrement the enemy HP counter to “0” (except when a special win described later is won) ). In the above case, motivation for the remaining games in the periodic chance state is lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the bell is continuously won in the periodic chance state, a privilege is given to the player. Specifically, when the bell is won ten times continuously in the periodic chance state, the transition to the AT state is determined.

  Part (c) of FIG. 45 is a conceptual diagram of a plurality of weapon scenarios. As shown in part (c) of FIG. 45, each weapon scenario is different in the allocation of weapons W in each game (first game to tenth game). For example, when weapon scenario 1 is determined at the start of the periodic chance state, as shown in part (c) of FIG. 45, weapon WX is assigned to the odd game, and the weapon is assigned to the even game except the tenth game. WY is assigned, and weapon WZ is assigned to the tenth game. When weapon scenario 2 is determined, weapon WX is assigned to odd games except for the third game, weapon WY is assigned to even games except for the tenth game, and weapons are assigned to the third and tenth games. WZ is assigned.

  FIG. 46 is a conceptual diagram of the special victory determination table. In each game in the periodic chance state, the damage to be subtracted from the above-described enemy HP counter is determined according to the winning area, and whether or not a special victory is determined using the special victory determination table. Special wins include one-shot wins and resurrection wins.

  In the event that the first win is won, the damage “300” is subtracted from the enemy HP counter in the game in which the first win is won. Since the maximum value of the initial HP of the enemy character is “300” of the enemy character C (see FIG. 44), the enemy HP counter is subtracted to a value of “0” or less when winning with a single blow is won. On the other hand, in the case of winning the resurrection victory, the damage “300” is subtracted from the enemy HP counter when the current periodic chance state ends (when 10 games have been consumed). Therefore, when the resurrection victory is won, the enemy HP counter is subtracted to a numerical value “0” or less when the current periodic chance state ends. As described above, when a special victory is won, the enemy HP is subtracted to a value “0” or less, and the transition to the AT state is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the special victory determination table includes a lottery value for a lost game, a lottery value for a one-shot victory, and a lottery value for a resurrection victory. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random number value R3, and when the subtraction result of the one-shot victory lotion value becomes a negative number, the one-shot victory is determined, and when the subtraction result of the resurrection victory lottery value becomes a negative number, If a resurrection victory is decided and the result of subtraction of the lost lottery value becomes a negative number, neither a single-stroke victory nor a resurrection victory will be won. In addition, each lottery value is distributed for each winning area. As understood from FIG. 46, the probability of winning the blow is higher in the order of replay, weak rare role, and strong rare role, and if the winning area is a bell, it is not won. The probability of winning the resurrection win is the same when the winning area is replay and bell, and the weak rare role is higher than the replay and bell, and the strong rare role is higher than the weak rare role.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of an image MA displayed by the liquid crystal display device 30 in the periodic chance state. The image MA includes a plurality of (seven) weapon graphic images GW (GWX, GWY, GWZ), an enemy character display unit GE, an enemy HP graphic image GP, a remaining game number graphic image GL, and a display area FE.

  The remaining game number icon GL displays the number of remaining games in the periodic chance state. Specifically, immediately after the periodic chance state starts, the numerical value “10” is displayed, the numerical value displayed for each game is subtracted, and the numerical value “0” is displayed in the final game in the periodic chance state.

  The weapon graphic image GW includes a weapon graphic image GWX corresponding to the weapon WX, a weapon graphic image GWY corresponding to the weapon WY, and a weapon graphic image GWZ corresponding to the weapon WZ. Each weapon icon GW displays the normal damage of the weapon W corresponding to the weapon icon image GW. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, the weapon graphic image GWX displays a numerical value “10”, the weapon graphic image GWY displays a numerical value “30”, and the weapon graphic image GWZ displays a numerical value “50”.

  In the example of FIG. 47, seven weapon icon images GW are arranged in the order corresponding to the weapon scenario. Specifically, the weapon graphic image GW for the current game and the weapon graphic images GW for the next six games are arranged. As shown in FIG. 47, the weapon graphic image GW of the current game is displayed larger than the other weapon graphic images GW. Further, the weapon graphic image GW of the next game is displayed larger than the weapon graphic image GW of the game after the next game.

  For example, when the weapon graphic image GWX is displayed as the weapon graphic image GW of this game, when the batting order replay X is won, the numerical value “10” displayed by the weapon graphic image GWX is subtracted from the enemy HP counter. On the other hand, when winning order replay Y is won, a numerical value “20” that is twice the numerical value “10” displayed by the weapon graphic image GWX is subtracted from the enemy HP counter. Similarly, when the weapon graphic image GWY is displayed as the weapon graphic image GW of the current game, when the batting order replay X is won, the numerical value “30” displayed by the weapon graphic image GWY is subtracted from the enemy HP counter, and the batting order replay is performed. When Y is won, a numerical value “60” that is twice the numerical value “30” displayed by the weapon graphic image GWY is subtracted from the enemy HP counter. In addition, when the weapon image GWZ is displayed as the weapon image GW of the current game, when the batting order replay X is won, the numerical value “50” displayed by the weapon image GWZ is subtracted from the enemy HP counter, and the batting order replay Y is displayed. When winning, a numerical value “100” that is twice the numerical value “50” displayed by the weapon graphic image GWZ is subtracted from the enemy HP counter.

  The enemy character display unit GE displays one of the enemy characters (A, B, C). Specifically, the enemy character A is displayed on the enemy character display unit GE in the first chance state, the enemy character B is displayed on the enemy character display unit GE in the second chance state, and the enemy character B is displayed in the third chance state. The enemy character C is displayed on the character display section GE. The player can grasp the type of the current periodic chance state by the enemy character displayed by the enemy character display unit GE. As will be described in detail later, the type (enemy character) of the periodic chance state may be notified in the normal state before shifting to the periodic chance state.

  The enemy HP icon image GP displays the value of the enemy HP counter. Specifically, the current value of the enemy HP counter (hereinafter referred to as “remaining enemy HP”) and the initial value are displayed. In the example of FIG. 47, the initial value “300” and the current value “290” of the enemy HP counter of the enemy character A are displayed. The player can grasp the damage required until the AT state is determined by the remaining enemy HP displayed by the enemy HP icon image GP.

  In the display area FE, enemy objects (not shown) corresponding to the enemy characters are displayed. For example, when damage is determined, the enemy object is displayed to be attacked. Further, the display mode of the display area FE differs depending on the remaining enemy HP. For example, when the enemy HP is not subtracted, an intact enemy object is displayed. On the other hand, when the remaining enemy HP is small, an injured enemy object is displayed.

  As described above, in the periodic chance state, the enemy character's damage changes according to the combination of the weapon W and the winning area of each game. Therefore, for example, in each game, compared with the configuration in which the damage of the enemy character is determined only in accordance with the winning area, the determined damage is rich in change and the gameability is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the type of weapon W for each game after the next time in the periodic chance state is notified in advance. Assume a configuration in which the weapon W of each game after the next time is not notified. In the above configuration, depending on the player, for example, when there are many remaining HPs at the end of the periodic chance state, the player may give up clearing the periodic chance state. However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player in advance that a game (game of weapons WZ) in which large damage is easily determined is reserved later. Therefore, the willingness to clear the periodic chance state can be maintained.

  FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram of an image MB that the liquid crystal display device 30 displays in a normal state. In the normal state, various information related to the periodic chance state is notified. As shown in FIG. 48, the image MB is configured to include the first display portion PA, the second display portion PB, and a plurality of (five) lip consecutive number graphic images GR. The second display part PB includes a first meter icon GM1, a period display part GC, and an enemy character display part GE. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the first meter graphic image GM1 includes an end MT.

  Each lip consecutive number image GR of FIG. 48 displays the current value of the replay continuous counter (see FIG. 37). As shown in FIG. 48, five lip consecutive number graphic images GR are arranged. Each of the lip consecutive number graphic images GR is displayed in the first color or the second color. For example, when the replay has not been won continuously, all the rep consecutive images GR are displayed in the second color. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive replay wins is 1, one lip consecutive number graphic image GR is displayed in the first color, and four lip consecutive number graphic images GR are displayed in the second color. Similarly, when the number of consecutive replay wins is two, two lip consecutive number graphic images GR are displayed in the first color, and three lip consecutive number graphic images GR are displayed in the second color. When the number of consecutive replay wins is three, three lip consecutive number graphic images GR are displayed in the first color, and two lip consecutive number graphic images GR are displayed in the second color. When the number of consecutive replay wins is four, four lip consecutive number graphic images GR are displayed in the first color, and one lip consecutive number graphic image GR is displayed in the second color. When the number of consecutive replay wins is 5 or more, all the lip consecutive number images GR are displayed in the first color. The player can grasp the number of consecutive replays won by the lip consecutive number graphic GR.

  The display state of the first meter image GM changes stepwise in accordance with the value of the first counter. Specifically, the position of the end MT in the first meter image GM1 is moved stepwise in accordance with the value of the first counter. For example, each time the first counter is added, the end MT moves to the right in front view, and when the first counter reaches the threshold value “256”, the end MT is the right end of the first meter image GM1. Move to the side (MAX position). According to the above configuration, the current value of the first counter is notified by the first meter icon GM1. Therefore, the player can estimate the period (the number of games) until the first counter reaches the above-described threshold value based on the display mode (the position of the end portion MT) of the first meter icon GM1. In other words, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is also possible to estimate the period until the periodic chance state.

  When the current cyclic chance state ends, the sub CPU 412 determines an enemy character in the next cyclic chance state by enemy character determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 refers to the enemy character determination table corresponding to the scenario state (see FIG. 39) including normal A, normal B, heaven A, heaven B, and super heaven, and sets the next cycle chance state. The enemy character, that is, whether the next periodic chance state is the first chance state or the third chance state is determined.

  FIG. 49 is a conceptual diagram of an enemy character determination table that is normally referred to as “A”. The enemy character determination table defines the probability that each enemy character will be selected in each cycle. For example, in the first cycle, the enemy character A (first chance state) is selected with a probability of about 59%, the enemy character B (second chance state) is selected with a probability of about 25%, and the enemy character C (third Chance state) is selected with a probability of about 16%. As shown in FIG. 49, the enemy character in the 20th cycle (that is, the enemy character in the ceiling cycle chance state) is determined by lottery from the enemy characters A to C, but is selected only in the ceiling cycle chance state. The character D may be determined without fail.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the probability that each enemy character is selected differs for each cycle. Specifically, the probability that the enemy character C is determined is higher in the seventh period than in other periods. The probability that the enemy character C is determined is higher in the third period after the seventh period. Further, the probability that the enemy character B is determined is higher in the third period than in the other periods, and is higher in the seventh period after the third period. As described above, the initial HP of the enemy character C is “100”, the initial HP of the enemy character B is “200”, and the initial HP of the enemy character A is “300”. Are more likely to be determined to shift to the AT state than the first chance state and the second chance state (the enemy HP is easily subtracted to the numerical value “0”). In the second chance state, the transition to the AT state is more easily determined than the first chance state.

  As understood from the above description, in the period chance states in the third and seventh periods, the transition to the AT state is more easily determined as compared with other periods. According to the above configuration, for example, the game is rich in change compared to a configuration in which the ease of transition to the AT state is equal in all cycles. Note that the period at which the transition to the AT state is easily determined is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, instead of the third cycle and the seventh cycle, the even chance cycle state may be compared with other cycles to make it easier to shift to the AT state. Further, the period at which the AT state is easily shifted may be changed according to the scenario state. For example, when the scenario state is normal A, the 3rd and 7th cycles are likely to shift to the AT state, and when the scenario state is normal B, the 4th and 8th cycles are shifted to the AT state. It may be easier.

  Returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, the enemy character display unit GE in the image MB displays any one of the enemy character A to the enemy character C in the same manner as the enemy character display unit GE of the image MA in the periodic chance state. The enemy character display portion GE in the image MB is an enemy character in the next periodic chance state. That is, the enemy character in the next cycle chance state is notified before the current cycle ends.

  According to the above configuration, for example, when the enemy character display unit GE displays the enemy character C, the next periodic chance state is a third chance state that is more likely to shift to the AT state than other periodic chance states. The player can recognize that. Therefore, the willingness to play until the next periodic chance state can be improved.

  However, in the configuration in which the enemy character display unit GE displays the enemy character in the next periodic chance state, for example, when the enemy character A is displayed in the normal state immediately after the end of the current periodic chance state, the next time In some cases, the willingness to play until the periodic chance state is reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which no enemy character is displayed on the enemy character display unit GE for a predetermined period after the end of the current cyclic chance state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the first counter becomes equal to or greater than the enemy character display value, the enemy character is displayed on the enemy character display unit GE.

  Part (a) of FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram of the second display part PB when the first counter is smaller than the enemy character display value, and part (b) of FIG. 50 is that the first counter is equal to or greater than the enemy character display value. It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd display part PB in the case of. As understood from part (a) of FIG. 50, when the first counter is smaller than the enemy character display value, the enemy character display unit GE does not display any enemy character. In the above case, for example, the enemy character display unit GE displays a character “?” Or the like. On the other hand, as understood from part (b) of FIG. 50, when the first counter is equal to or greater than the enemy character display value, the enemy character display unit GE displays the enemy character determined in the enemy character determination process.

  FIG. 51 is a conceptual diagram of an enemy character display value determination table. In the enemy character display value determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines the enemy character display value with the probability specified by the enemy character display value determination table. For example, the enemy character display value of the enemy character A is a numerical value “0” with a probability of about 1%, a numerical value “32” with a probability of about 10%, a numerical value “64” with a probability of about 1%, and a numerical value “96” with a probability of about 5%. ”, A numerical value“ 128 ”with a probability of 10%, a numerical value“ 160 ”with a probability of about 15%, a numerical value“ 192 ”with a probability of about 8%, a numerical value“ 224 ”with a probability of about 8%, a numerical value“ 256 ”with a probability of about 42% Is determined. When the enemy character display value is “0”, the enemy character is displayed immediately after the start of the current cycle (immediately after the end of the previous cycle chance state). When the enemy character display value is “256”, the enemy character is displayed simultaneously with the end of the current cycle (at the same time as the next cycle chance state starts).

  As understood from FIG. 51, the tendency of the time displayed on the enemy character display unit GE differs depending on the enemy character. For example, the enemy character A is displayed with a probability of about 27% (1% + 10% + 1% + 5% + 10%) in a period in which the first counter is incremented from a numerical value “0” to a numerical value “128”. On the other hand, the enemy character B is displayed with a probability of about 40% (2% + 10% + 2% + 7% + 19%) during the period in which the first counter is incremented from the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “128”. The enemy character C is displayed with a probability of about 70% (4% + 10% + 8% + 8% + 40%) during the period in which the first counter is incremented from the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “128”.

  Further, the probability that the enemy character is not displayed until the next periodic chance state is started (the probability of selecting the enemy character display value “256”) is about 42% for the enemy character A, about 32% for the enemy character B, and the enemy character. C is about 10%. That is, before the next periodic chance state is started, the enemy character A is displayed with a probability of about 58%, the enemy character B is displayed with about 68%, and the enemy character C is displayed with about 90%. In other words. As understood from the above description, the enemy character A tends to be displayed at a later time than the enemy character B and the enemy character C. Further, the enemy character C tends to be displayed earlier than the enemy character A and the enemy character B.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first counter is smaller than the enemy character display value, the enemy character is not displayed on the enemy character display unit GE. Therefore, the enemy character A that is harder to defeat than other enemy characters is displayed immediately after the start of the current cycle, and a situation in which the willingness of the game until the next cycle chance state is reduced can be suppressed. Moreover, in this embodiment, the tendency of the time displayed is different according to enemy characters. Specifically, the enemy character A has a tendency to be displayed later than other enemy characters. According to the above configuration, the enemy character A is less likely to be displayed immediately after the start of the current cycle, as compared to other enemy characters. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the decrease in the willingness to play until the next periodic chance state is particularly remarkable.

  However, depending on the player, before the transition to the next periodic chance state, the player may give up destroying the enemy character and end the game regardless of the time when the enemy character is displayed. For example, some players may think that the enemy character A cannot be destroyed. Even if the player has played until the end of the current cycle, if the enemy character A is displayed, the player may end the game at that time. Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, each enemy character is provided with a “front mode” and a “back mode”. In the back mode, the initial HP of the enemy character is smaller than the initial HP in the front mode.

  Specifically, the initial HP of each enemy character in the front mode is “300” for the enemy character A, “200” for the enemy character B, and “200” for the enemy character C as shown in the initial HP table (see FIG. 44). 100 ". On the other hand, when the reverse mode is selected, the initial HP of each enemy character is ½ of the initial HP of the front mode of the enemy character. That is, the initial HP of the enemy character A in the reverse mode is “150”, the initial HP of the enemy character B in the reverse mode is “100”, and the initial HP of the enemy character C in the reverse mode is “50”.

  FIG. 52 is a conceptual diagram of the back mode determination table. In the back mode determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to set the enemy character in the current cycle to the back mode. As understood from FIG. 52, the probability that the reverse mode is determined differs depending on the enemy character. Specifically, when the current cycle is the enemy character A, the front mode is determined with a probability of about 75%, and the reverse mode is determined with a probability of about 25%. When the current cycle is the enemy character B, the front mode is determined with a probability of about 89%, and the reverse mode is determined with a probability of about 11%. When the current cycle is the enemy character C, the front mode is determined with a probability of about 96%, and the reverse mode is determined with a probability of about 4%.

  According to the above configuration, even if an enemy character is displayed in this cycle, the mode of the enemy character may be the back mode. In the case of the back mode, the initial HP is smaller than that in the case of the front mode, so that it is easy to shift to the AT state. Therefore, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the enemy character's back mode is not provided, a situation in which the player ends the game due to the enemy character being displayed can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, as understood from FIG. 52, the probability that the reverse mode is determined is higher in the enemy character A than in the enemy character B and the enemy character C. Further, the probability that the back mode of the enemy character B is determined is higher than the probability that the back mode of the enemy character C is determined. That is, the enemy character having a larger initial HP in the front mode is configured such that the back mode is more easily determined. Therefore, the effect that the situation where the player ends the game due to the display of the enemy character can be suppressed is particularly remarkable.

  The description returns to FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, the period display part GC is displayed in a manner corresponding to the period counter. Specifically, in each cycle in which the value of the cycle counter is updated from “0” to “19”, the cycle display unit GC displays the character string “1st cycle” to “20th cycle”. For example, when the period counter is a numerical value “0”, the period display unit GC displays a character string “first period”.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value (1-6) of the gaming machine 1 is changed, the first counter is initialized. Therefore, the second display portion PB (including the first meter icon image GM1, the cycle display portion GC, and the enemy character display portion GE) is initialized when the set value is changed. Specifically, when the set value is changed, the first meter icon image GM1 is displayed in a mode immediately after the end of the cycle chance state (a mode in which the first counter is a numerical value “0”), and the cycle display unit The character string “first period” is displayed on the GC. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, the display mode of the second display unit PB is initialized even when the set value is not changed. However, when the power is shut off and the set value is not changed, the first counter is retained.

  In the above configuration, when the power is turned off while the first counter larger than the numerical value “0” is held, the first counter value and the second display stored internally when the power is restored. The display mode of the part PB (first meter graphic image GM1) does not correspond. That is, the first counter stored internally is larger than the numerical value “0”, whereas the first meter graphic GM1 is a display mode when the first counter is the numerical value “0”.

Assume a configuration in which the display mode of the first meter graphic image GM1 is updated only in accordance with only the value of the first counter acquired after the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as “proportional”). In the above comparison, the value of the first counter held when the power is shut off (before the power is restored) is not reflected in the display mode of the first meter image GM1. For example, if the first counter at power-off is a numerical value “100” and the numerical value “156” is added to the first counter after the power is restored, the internal first counter reaches the threshold value “256”. A periodic chance state is started. However, at the time when the periodic chance state is started, the first meter image GM1 is displayed in a mode in which the first counter is a numerical value “156”. That is, in contrast, when the end portion MT of the first meter image GM1 does not reach the MAX position, a situation may occur in which the state shifts to the periodic chance state. In the above case, the player can recognize that the first counter has not been initialized, that is, that the set value has not been changed.

However, some players may play a game in the hope that the set value has been changed. Therefore, in contrast, since it can be recognized that the set value has not been changed, there arises a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  In view of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the first meter graphic image GM1 is changed according to the value of the first counter held at the time of power-off and the value of the first counter obtained after the power-off. Update. According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the first counter held at the time of power-off can be reflected in the display mode of the first meter image GM1. For example, the display mode of the first meter icon GM1 can be made to correspond to the internal numerical value of the first counter (the total value of the first counter before and after the power interruption). Therefore, a situation in which the end MT of the first meter image GM1 does not reach the MAX position is prevented from shifting to the periodic chance state, and it is difficult to specify whether the set value has been changed.

  The configuration of the present embodiment described above will be described in detail below. The sub CPU 412 stores the numerical value of the first counter in the holding counter when the power is turned off. The holding counter is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example. In addition, when the addition value is determined in the first counter addition process (when replay is won, see FIG. 37), and the holding counter is a numerical value “0” or more, an additional value is added to the addition value. Is added to the first counter.

  FIG. 53 is a conceptual diagram of the additional value determination table. When the replay (X, Y) is won and the holding counter is greater than or equal to the numerical value “0”, the sub CPU 412 executes an additional value determination process in addition to the first counter addition process described above. The sub CPU 412 determines the additional value using the additional value determination table in the additional value determination process. That is, when the replay is won and the holding counter is greater than or equal to “0”, the added value and the additional value are added to the first counter. Further, the sub CPU 412 subtracts the determined additional value from the holding counter. As a specific example, it is assumed that the addition value “5pt” is determined in the first counter addition process and the additional value “10 pt” is determined in the additional value determination process. In the above case, “15 pt” (5 pt + 10 pt) is added to the first counter, and “10 pt” is subtracted from the holding counter.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the additional value determination table includes each lottery value of each additional value. When “all” of the additional values shown in FIG. 53 is determined, the current value of the holding counter is determined as the additional value. For example, when the numerical value “1” is held in the holding counter, “all” is determined, and the additional value is “1 pt”.

  Each lottery value in the additional value determination table is subtracted from the random value R3 in the additional value determination process, and an additional value having a negative subtraction result is determined. Each lottery value is provided for each current value range of the holding counter. Therefore, the probability that each additional value is determined differs depending on the current value of the holding counter.

  Specifically, when the holding counter is a numerical value “11 to 20”, the additional value “all” or “10 pt” is determined. In the above case, the probability that the additional value “all” is determined is about 7/8, and the probability that the additional value “10pt” is determined is about 1/8. When the holding counter is a numerical value “21 to 30”, the additional value “all”, “10 pt”, or “20 pt” is determined. In the above case, the probability that the additional value “all” is determined is about 7/8, and the probability that the additional value “10 pt” is determined and the probability that the additional value “20 pt” is determined are both about 1 /. 16. When the holding counter is a numerical value “31 to 50”, one of the additional values “all”, “10 pt”, “20 pt”, “30 pt”, and “40 pt” is determined. In the above case, the probability that the additional value “all” is determined is about 7/8, the probability that the additional value “10 pt” is determined, the probability that the additional value “20 pt” is determined, and the additional value “30 pt” are The probability of being determined and the probability of determining the additional value “40 pt” are both about 1/32. When the holding counter is a numerical value “51 or more”, one of the additional values “all” or “10pt”, “20pt”, “30pt”, “40pt”, and “50pt” is determined. In the above case, the probability that the additional value “all” is determined is about 7/8, the probability that the additional value “10 pt” is determined, the probability that the additional value “20 pt” is determined, and the additional value “30 pt” are The probability of determining the additional value “40 pt” and the probability of determining the additional value “50 pt” are all about 1/40. When the holding counter is a numerical value “10 or less”, the additional value “all” is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the first meter graphic image GM1 is updated according to the numerical value of the holding counter. Therefore, the numerical value of the first counter held at the time of power interruption can be reflected in the update of the display mode of the first meter image GM1 after the power interruption is restored. According to the above configuration, the first meter image GM1 is initialized at the time of power failure recovery, and then the total value of the first counter value held at the time of power failure and the first counter value obtained after power failure recovery is obtained. The first meter image GM1 can be displayed in the manner shown. Therefore, a situation in which the end MT of the first meter icon GM1 does not reach the MAX position is prevented from shifting to the periodic chance state, and it is difficult to specify a change in the set value.

  Further, for example, a comparison is assumed in which the additional value is added to the first counter regardless of the winning combination. In the above comparison, if the additional value is held, that is, if the set value is not changed, even if the replay is not won, the first counter is a numerical value greater than “1”. May be added. On the other hand, if the set value has been changed, the additional value is not retained. Therefore, if the replay is not won, a value greater than “1” may not be added to the first counter. Therefore, in the proportionality in which the additional value is added regardless of the winning combination, it is specified that the set value is not changed when a value larger than “1” is added to the first counter when the replay is won. Will be.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the game where the replay is won, the additional value is added to the first counter together with the added value. That is, the additional value is added to the first counter when the added value is added. When the addition value is added, a numerical value greater than “1” is added to the first counter both when the setting value is changed and when the setting value is not changed. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the effect that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the additional value has been added and that the presence or absence of the change in the setting value is suppressed is particularly remarkable.

  In addition, a configuration in which all of the held additional values are added to the first counter in one game is assumed as a proportional. In the above comparison, for example, when the holding counter is the numerical value “200”, the numerical value “200” is added to the first counter in one game. However, as described above, the maximum value of the added value is “100 pt”. Therefore, when a number greater than “100” is added to the first counter in one game, the player recognizes that the additional value has been added, that is, the set value has not been changed. Can do. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the first counter held in the holding counter when the power is turned off is added to the first counter as an additional value in a plurality of times. Therefore, the effect that the recognition that the set value is not changed is suppressed is particularly remarkable.

  This completes the description of the display on the second display portion PB. 48 is a display unit that executes various effects according to a winning area or the like. Specifically, the first display unit PA performs an effect according to the lottery state (the lottery state in the AT state and the special chance state, see FIG. 36) and the winning area.

  FIG. 54 is a conceptual diagram of an effect lottery table. The sub CPU 412 selects an effect lottery table according to the sub state and the like, and determines an effect to be executed in each game. FIG. 54 illustrates each effect lottery table referenced in each game in the normal state or the precursor state in which the winning area “losing” is determined. The effects determined using the respective effect lottery tables are executed on the first display unit PA, for example. As shown in FIG. 54, each effect lottery table includes an effect number and each lottery value of each effect number. Each lottery value is subtracted from the random number R3 in the order of the production number, and the production number in which the result of the subtraction is a negative number is determined. The effect number determined in the effect lottery process is stored in the effect number storage area of the sub RAM 414.

  In the normal state and the precursor state, any one of effects A1 to effect An (n is an integer of 2 or more) is determined. As can be understood from FIG. 54, in the first lottery state to the third lottery state, the gasse sign state and the main sign state, each effect including the effect A1 can be selected in common. Therefore, in principle, the player cannot specify the current sub-state in each of the above-described sub-state games. However, since the probability of selecting “no effect” is different in each state (first lottery state> second lottery state> third lottery state> gase precursor state> main precursor state), the player will produce from the effect A1. The current sub-state can be estimated from the probability that any of up to An has been executed. Further, for example, the effect An shown in FIG. 54 is not determined except in the precursor state. Therefore, when the production An is determined, the player can specify that the current sub state is the precursor state.

  Various effects executed on the image MB (first display part PA, second display part PB) are executed, for example, for each game operation. For example, each effect is executed when the start lever 24 is operated (game start operation) and when each stop button 25 is operated. Specifically, various effects including a special lip suggestion effect, a meter-up effect, and a meter MAX effect, which will be described later, are executed on the image MB.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the effects in the first display section PA and the effects in the second display section PB. In FIG. 55, for the sake of explanation, the first display portion PA and the second display portion PB are extracted from the elements constituting the image MB shown in FIG. In FIG. 55, each display unit is arranged in a different manner from the positional relationship in the image MB.

  Part (a) of FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a special lip suggestion effect. In the game in which the special lip suggestion effect is executed, it is suggested that the special replay is stopped and displayed in the game before all the reels 12 are stopped. For example, as shown in part (a) of FIG. 55, when the start lever 24 is operated, the special Lip suggesting icon image GFA is displayed on the second display portion PB. The special lip suggestion image GFA suggests that the special replay is stopped and displayed in this game. However, the special replay may not be stopped and displayed even if the special lip suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in part (a) of FIG. 55, the first display portion PA is displayed in the effect mode A during the period in which the special-lip suggestion image GFA is displayed on the second display portion PB. The production mode A may indicate that the special replay is stopped and displayed, or may not indicate the special replay. Further, the execution of the effect mode A may be determined depending on whether or not the special replay is stopped and displayed, or the execution may be determined regardless of whether or not the special replay is stopped and displayed. For example, the production mode A is determined according to the result of the normal lottery process, and the presence / absence of winning in the AT state and the presence / absence of winning in the special chance state are notified.

  When the special lip suggestion effect is executed, a meter-up effect (or meter МAX effect) described later may be executed in accordance with each subsequent operation. That is, a special lip suggestion effect and a meter-up effect may be executed in one game.

  Part (b) of FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a meter-up effect. The meter-up effect is executed when the special replay is stopped and displayed. That is, the meter-up effect is executed when the first counter is added. For example, as shown in part (b) of FIG. 55, when all the reels 12 are stopped, the end portion MT of the first meter graphic image GM1 moves to the right by a distance D in front view. In part (b) of FIG. 55, an end MT immediately before the meter-up effect is executed is indicated by a broken line. The distance D corresponds to the added value of the first counter in the current game. Specifically, the distance D increases as the added value increases. According to the above configuration, the player can recognize the magnitude of the added value determined in the current game based on the length of the distance D. In the meter-up effect, as shown in the part (b) of FIG. 55, the meter-up notification graphic image GFB is displayed on the second display portion PB. The meter-up notification graphic image GFB notifies that the added value is added to the first counter in the current game.

  As shown in part (b) of FIG. 55, the first display unit PA is displayed in the production mode B during the period in which the second display unit PB executes the meter-up production. The production mode B may suggest that the special replay is stopped and displayed, as in the production mode A, or may not. Further, the execution may be determined depending on whether or not the special replay is stopped and displayed, or the execution may be determined regardless of whether or not the special replay is stopped and displayed.

  Part (c) of FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a meter MAX effect. The meter MAX effect is executed when the special replay is stopped and displayed, and when the first counter reaches the threshold value. Further, the meter MAX effect is executed when all reels 12 are stopped and displayed. For example, as shown in part (c) of FIG. 55, the cycle end notification graphic image GFC is displayed on the second display unit PB. The cycle end notification graphic image GFC notifies that the first counter has reached the threshold value in the current game. That is, the cycle end notification graphic image GFC notifies that the current cycle has ended. Further, in the meter MAX effect, the end MT is located at the MAX position shown in the part (c) of FIG.

  As shown in part (c) of FIG. 55, in the meter MAX effect, the first display portion PA is displayed in the effect mode C. The production mode C notifies that the first counter has reached the threshold in the current game. The periodic chance state is started from the next game in which the meter MAX effect is executed.

  As described above, in a game in which special replay is stopped and displayed (game in which Replay Y is won), a special lip suggestion effect is executed before the special replay is stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game in which the special lip suggestion effect is executed, if the special replay is stopped and displayed, the meter-up effect or the meter МAX effect is executed, and if the meter МAX effect is executed, then the cycle chance state is entered. Transition. According to the above configuration, the special lip suggestion effect is executed, so that a sense of expectation that the special replay is stopped and displayed can be obtained. Further, when the special replay is stopped and displayed, it can be noted which of the meter-up effect and the meter МAX effect is executed.

  Part (a) of FIG. 56 is a conceptual diagram of a special chance set number table. When the special chance state is won in the normal lottery process, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of sets in the special chance state with reference to the special chance set number table.

  As described above, the special chance state includes the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, and the special chance state of any mode is won in the normal lottery process (see FIG. 36). The number of sets in the special chance state is determined according to each mode of the special chance state determined in the normal lottery process. Specifically, when the special chance state in the first mode is won, one set is determined with a probability of about 97%, and two sets are determined with a probability of about 3%. Similarly, when the special chance state in the second mode is won, one set is determined with a probability of about 87.5%, and two sets are determined with a probability of about 12.5%. When the special chance state in the third mode is won, one set is determined with a probability of about 50%, and two sets are determined with a probability of about 50%.

  When the special chance state is determined to be one set, the sub CPU 412 adds a numerical value “1” to the special chance set number counter. When the special chance state is determined to be two sets, the sub CPU 412 adds a numerical value “2” to the special chance set number counter. Further, when the state shifts to the special chance state through the precursor state (see FIG. 35), the numerical value “1” is subtracted from the special chance set number counter, and the numerical value “6” is set to the bell navigation counter. The bell navigation counter is decremented every time the correct pressing order of the hitting bell is notified. When the Bell Navi counter is subtracted to a predetermined end value (numerical value “0”), one set of special chance states ends. The special chance set number counter and the bell navigator counter are provided in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  Part (b) of FIG. 56 is a conceptual diagram of the extra navigation determination table. In each game in the special chance state, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of extra navigations according to the winning area. The number of extra navigations is a numerical value added to the bell navigation counter. Therefore, when the number of extra navigations (one or more) is determined, the period of the special chance state tends to be longer than when the extra navigations are not determined.

  As shown in part (b) of FIG. 56, the extra navigation determination table includes each lottery value of each winning area. In addition, each lottery value in each winning area is allocated every additional navigation (0 to 5, 10, and 20 times). Each lottery value is subtracted from the random number R3 in order from the number of extra navigation times 0, and the number of extra navigation times in which the subtraction result is a negative number is determined.

  Part (c) of FIG. 56 is a conceptual diagram of the special chance clear determination table. The sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the special chance state is cleared in each game in the special chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the special chance state is cleared when the replay (X, Y) is won in the special chance state. When the special chance state is cleared, the transition to the AT state (start preparation state) is determined. For example, when Replay X is won, the AT state is won with a probability of about 3%. In addition, when Replay Y is won, the AT state is won with a probability of about 10%. That is, the game in which the special replay is stopped and displayed is more likely to win the AT state than the game in which the normal replay is stopped and displayed. Further, the sub CPU 412 adds a replay counter when the replay is won in the special chance state. The replay counter stores the number of winning replays in the special chance state, and is used for selecting a background change table described later. The replay counter is stored in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  In the present embodiment, when the main CPU 301 determines the long lock among the reel locks, clearing of the special chance state is determined. When the transition to the AT state is determined in the special chance state, the winning state flag is set to the ON state. The winning status flag is stored in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of an image MC in a special chance state displayed by the liquid crystal display device 30. As shown in FIG. 57, the image MC is configured to include a push order instruction image GS, a remaining navigation frequency image GN, and a background image GH.

  As described above, in the special chance state, when any of the hitting bells (A1 to 4, B1 to 4) wins, the correct pressing order of the hitting bells is notified. Specifically, the correct pressing order of the batting order bell is displayed on the pressing order instruction image GS. The player can stop and display the correct answer bell by operating each stop button 25 in accordance with the display of the push order instruction image GS.

  The remaining navigation frequency icon GN displays the current value of the bell navigation counter. Specifically, immediately after the start of the special chance state, the initial value “6” of the bell navigation counter is displayed, and a numerical value is subtracted and displayed every time the hitting bell is won. When the number of extra navigations is determined, a numerical value to which the number of extra navigations is added is displayed. In the present embodiment, the bell navigation counter is not subtracted when the common bell is won in the winning area, but the bell navigation counter may be subtracted when the common bell is won.

  The background icon image GH is displayed behind each icon image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the background icon GH is an annular icon displayed in a specific color. The outer peripheral edge of the background image GH is located on the inner periphery of the screen MC, and the inner peripheral edge of the background image GH is displayed in a waveform. The background image GH is displayed by switching to a plurality of display modes (colors). Specifically, the color of the background image GH is switched to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow. The sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to change the color of the background icon image GH in the background change process.

  FIG. 58 is a conceptual diagram of a plurality of background change tables used in the background change process. In the special chance state, the sub CPU 412 determines the background according to the winning state flag (whether or not the AT state is won), the special chance set number counter (the number of remaining sets) and the replay counter (replay winning number). Select a change table. Specifically, each background change table belongs to any one of the first group to the fourth group, and the sub CPU 412 selects any group according to the winning state flag, the special chance set number counter, and the replay counter. Then, any background change table of the selected group is determined.

  The background change table of the first group is selected when the winning state flag is in the OFF state (AT non-winning) and the winning state replay counter is equal to or smaller than “10”. The background change table of the second group is selected when the winning state flag is OFF and the winning state replay counter is larger than the numerical value “10”. In the present embodiment, when the background change table of the second group is selected, the background is easily changed compared to the case where the background change table of the first group is selected. In other words, the display of the background icon image GH is more likely to be changed as the number of winning replays is increased.

  The background change table of the third group is selected when the winning state flag is ON (AT has already been won) and the special chance set number counter is not a numerical value “0”. The background change table of the fourth group is selected when the winning state flag is ON and the special chance set number counter is a numerical value “0”. As will be described in detail later, depending on the background change table of the fourth group, the color of the background image GH can be changed to “rainbow”. On the other hand, depending on the background change table of the third group, the color of the background image GH is not changed to “rainbow”.

  Part (a) of FIG. 58 is a conceptual diagram of the background change table of the first group. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 58, when the background change table of the first group is used (winning state flag = OFF, replay counter ≦ 10), when the color of the background image GH is white, the probability is about 94. % Keeps the color white, changes to blue with a probability of about 5%, and changes to green with a probability of about 1%. Similarly, when the color of the background image GH is blue, the color is maintained blue with a probability of about 94%, changed to green with a probability of about 5%, and changed to red with a probability of about 1%. Further, when the color of the background image GH is green, the color is maintained green with a probability of about 95%, and is changed to red with a probability of about 5%. When the color of the background image GH is red, the color is maintained red with a probability of 100%. That is, when the background change table of the first group is selected, the color of the background image GH is not changed to the rainbow color.

  Part (b) of FIG. 58 is a conceptual diagram of the background change table of the second group. As shown in part (b) of FIG. 58, when the background change table of the second group is used (winning state flag = OFF, replay counter> 10), when the color of the background image GH is white, the probability is about 89. The color is kept white at%, changed to blue with a probability of about 10%, and changed to green with a probability of about 1%. Similarly, when the color of the background image GH is blue, the color is maintained blue with a probability of about 89%, changed to green with a probability of about 10%, and changed to red with a probability of about 1%. Further, when the color of the background image GH is green, the color is maintained green with a probability of about 90% and is changed to red with a probability of about 10%. When the color of the background image GH is red, the color is maintained red with a probability of 100%. That is, when the background change table of the second group is selected, the color of the background image GH is not changed to the rainbow color as in the case where the background change table of the first group is selected.

  Part (c) of FIG. 58 is a conceptual diagram of the background change table belonging to the fourth group. As shown in part (c) of FIG. 58, when the background change table of the fourth group is used (winning state flag = ON, special chance set number counter = 0), when the color of the background image GH is white, The color is maintained white with a probability of about 89%, changed to blue with a probability of about 10%, and changed to green with a probability of about 1%. Similarly, when the color of the background image GH is blue, the color is maintained blue with a probability of about 89%, changed to green with a probability of about 10%, and changed to red with a probability of about 1%. When the color of the background image GH is green, the color is maintained green with a probability of about 89%, changed to red with a probability of about 10%, and changed to a rainbow color with a probability of about 1%. When the color of the background image GH is red, the color is maintained red with a probability of about 90%, and is changed to a rainbow color with a probability of about 10%.

  Part (d) of FIG. 58 is a conceptual diagram of the background change table belonging to the third group. When the background change table of the third group is used (winning state flag = ON, special chance set number counter ≠ 0), when the color of the background image GH is white, the color is kept white with a probability of about 89%, It is changed to blue with a probability of about 10% and green with a probability of about 1%. Similarly, when the color of the background image GH is blue, the color is maintained blue with a probability of about 89%, changed to green with a probability of about 10%, and changed to red with a probability of about 1%. Further, when the color of the background image GH is green, the color is maintained green with a probability of about 90% and is changed to red with a probability of about 10%. When the color of the background image GH is red, the color is maintained red with a probability of 100%.

  As understood from the above description, since the background change table is selected depending on whether or not the AT state is won, it may indicate that the AT state is won by the color of the background image GH. it can. Further, the color of the background image GH is changed to a rainbow color when the AT state is won, while it is not changed to the rainbow color when the AT state is not won. Therefore, the fact that the AT state is won is notified by changing the color of the background image GH to the rainbow color.

  Further, as understood from the above description, when the AT state is won and there is no remaining set number of special chance states, the AT state winning is notified (the background image GH becomes rainbow color). Is displayed). On the other hand, even if the AT state is won, if there is a remaining set number of special chance states, the AT state winning is not notified. In the present embodiment, a period in which the AT state is won and there is no remaining set number in the special chance state is referred to as a “definite notification possible period”. Further, a period in which the AT state is won and there is a remaining set number in the special chance state is referred to as a “definite notification prohibition period”.

  FIG. 59 is a time chart of the game when the special chance state is won. In FIG. 59, the special chance set number counter is represented as “CS”. Further, the bell navigation counter is represented as “CN”, and the winning state flag is represented as “FT”. The numerical value “N” in FIG. 59 is a natural number greater than 1.

  Part (a) of FIG. 59 is a time chart of the game when one set of special chance states is won (see part (a) of FIG. 56). In the above case, the numerical value “1” is added to the special chance set number counter. Thereafter, when the precursor state ends, the numerical value “1” is subtracted from the special chance set number counter, the bell navigation counter is set to the initial value “6”, and the state shifts to the special chance state (A-1 in FIG. 59A). ). In the special chance state, when the correct answer pressing order of the batting order bell is notified, the numerical value “1” is subtracted from the bell navigation counter (A-2 in FIG. 59A).

  When the AT state is won in the special chance state, the winning state flag is set to the ON state (numerical value “1”) (A-3 in FIG. 59A). When the AT state is won, the sub CPU 412 switches the background change table to be referred to. Specifically, the background change table in which the rainbow color is selected as the color of the background image GH is switched to the background change table in which the rainbow color is selected. That is, when the special chance set number counter is in the state of numerical value “0” and the AT state is won, the fixed notification possible period starts. When the bell navigation counter is decremented to a numerical value “0” (A-4 in FIG. 58 (a)), the special chance state ends and the process proceeds to the start preparation state.

  Part (b) of FIG. 59 is a time chart of a game when two sets of special chance states are won. In the above case, the numerical value “2” is added to the special chance set number counter. Thereafter, when the precursor state ends, the numerical value “1” is subtracted from the special chance set number counter, the bell navigation counter is set to the initial value “6”, and the state shifts to the special chance state (first set) (FIG. 59B). B-1).

  When the AT state is won in the special chance state, the winning state flag is set to the ON state (B-2 in FIG. 59B), and the sub CPU 412 switches the background change table to be referred to. When the special chance set counter is other than “0”, the fixed notification prohibition period starts after winning the AT state, and in the background change table referred to in the fixed notification prohibition period, a rainbow is used as the color of the background image GH. Color is not selected. That is, when two sets of special chance states are won, even if the AT state is won in the first set, the color of the background image GH is not changed to a rainbow color in the subsequent first set of special chance states. .

  As shown in part (b) of FIG. 59, when two sets of special chance states have been won, when the Bell Navi counter is subtracted to a numerical value “0”, the first set of special chance states ends, The second set of special chance states starts (B-3 in FIG. 59 (b)). When the special chance state of the second set is started, the special chance set number counter is decremented by the numerical value “1”, and the initial value “6” is stored in the bell navigator counter, similarly to the case where the first set is started. The As shown in part (b) of FIG. 59, the special chance state of the second set is a fixed notification possible period.

  The part (c) of FIG. 59 is a time chart of the comparative game. In contrast, this embodiment differs from the present embodiment in that no fixed notification prohibition period is provided. Assume that two sets of special chance states are won in comparison and the AT state is won in the first set of special chance states. In the above case, in the special chance state of the first set, the color of the background image GH can be changed to a rainbow color. That is, before the second set is started, the player is notified that the AT state has been won.

  By the way, depending on the player, when the winning of the AT state is notified, the remaining navigation frequency displayed in the remaining navigation frequency image GN is subtracted to the numerical value “0” and then the AT state (start preparation state). May expect to migrate. However, in the comparative configuration, after the remaining navigation number of the hitting bell is subtracted to the numerical value “0”, it is changed to the numerical value “6” again, and the special chance state continues. In the above configuration, the special chance state of the second set may be bothersome for a player who was expecting to shift to the AT state after the first set is completed.

  As a configuration for solving the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which a game that has been won in the AT state is notified of that, and immediately after the notification is executed, the special chance state is terminated and the state is shifted to the AT state. According to the above configuration, the special chance state does not continue even though the winning of the AT state is notified. However, in the above configuration, the special chance state may end before the correct pressing order of the batting order bell is notified six times. In addition, some players may wish to shift to the AT state after digesting the remaining number of times of navigation even if the AT state is won. Therefore, in the configuration in which the special chance state is terminated immediately after the AT state winning notification is made, the above-mentioned player's wish cannot be met.

  In consideration of the above circumstances, in the special chance state of the present embodiment, after all the remaining navigation times have been digested, the state transitions to the AT state, and when continuing to the second set, the background image GH is the first set. It does not change to rainbow color. According to the above configuration, the player who wishes to shift to the AT state when the set in which the winning of the AT state is informed ends, and the transition to the AT state after digesting all remaining navigation times. You can meet the wishes of both players.

  Next, various effects in the precursor state will be described. As described above, when a rare combination is won in the normal state, a normal lottery process is executed (see FIG. 36). If the AT state or the SP state is won, the state shifts to the previous sign state. Migrate to In the present embodiment, when the precursor state ends, a continuous effect may be executed over a plurality of games (for example, three games). In addition, in the final game of the continuous production (final game in the precursor state), whether or not the AT state or the SP state is won is notified. Furthermore, in a game before the continuous performance is started, there is a case where the state changes to a special precursor state (the present precursor state or the gasse precursor state). In the special sign state, the image MD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 instead of the image MB (see FIG. 48) displayed in the normal state.

  Whether or not to shift to the precursor state is determined by lottery at the time of rare role winning. When the transition to the precursor state is determined, the number of games in the precursor state is determined to be any one of “0” to “32” games. Also, whether or not to execute a continuous effect is determined according to the number of games in the precursor state. Specifically, when “3” games or more are determined as the number of precursor games, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the continuous performance. In addition, when executing a continuous effect, the number of games of the continuous effect is determined.

  Whether or not to shift to the special sign state is determined according to the number of games in the sign state and the number of games of continuous effects. Specifically, when the result of subtracting the number of games of continuous effects from the number of games in the precursor state is “10” or more games, whether or not to shift to the special precursor state is determined by lottery. On the other hand, when the subtraction result is smaller than “10” game, the state does not shift to the special precursor state.

  FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram of an image MD displayed in a special precursor state. The image MD includes a first area FA and a second area FB. One of the plurality of teammate characters GK (GKA, GKB, GKC) is displayed in the first area FA. Specifically, in each game in the special sign state, any one of the teammate character GKA, teammate character GKB, or teammate character GKC is displayed in the first area FA with a predetermined probability. The teammate character GK displayed in the first area FA is determined by lottery in each game. On the other hand, the teammate character GKD is displayed in the second area FB. The teammate character GKD is continuously displayed in the second area FB in the special sign state. Further, in the first area FA and the second area FB, each effect is executed according to the sub-state (whether or not this is a pre-sign), the winning area, and the number of remaining games in the special pre-sign state.

  Part (a) of FIG. 61 is a time chart for explaining the special sign state and the continuous effect. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 61, the special precursor state is divided into a first period and a second period. The first period is a period in which the number of remaining games in the special precursor state is 6 games or more, and the second period is a period in which the number of remaining games in the special precursor state is 5 games or less. In the first period, the teammate character GK in the first area FA is switched with the first probability. On the other hand, in the second period, the teammate character GK in the first area FA is switched with a second probability higher than the first probability. However, the teammate character GK displayed in the first area FA in the final game in the second period (the final game in the special sign state) is a lottery other than the final game (a lottery based on the first probability or the second probability). Are drawn with different probabilities.

  Specifically, in the first period, when the teammate character GKA is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKA is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/2 in the current game. The teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/4, and the teammate character GKBC is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. Similarly, when the teammate character GKB is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKB is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/2 in the current game, with a probability of about 1/4. The teammate character GKA is displayed, and the teammate character GKC is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. If the teammate character GKC is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKC is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/2 in this game, and the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. The teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/4.

  On the other hand, in the second period, when the teammate character GKA is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKA is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/5 in the current game. The teammate character GKB is displayed at about 2/5, and the teammate character GKBC is displayed at a probability of about 2/5. Similarly, when the teammate character GKB is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKB is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/5 and the probability is about 2/5. The teammate character GKA is displayed, and the teammate character GKC is displayed with a probability of about 2/5. When the teammate character GKC is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKC is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/5 and the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 2/5. The teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 2/5.

  In the final game in the special precursor state, the teammate character GK in the first area FA is switched with a different probability between the main precursor state and the gasse precursor state. Specifically, in the last game in the special precursor state of the present precursor state, when the teammate character GKA is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate has a probability of about 1/4 in the current game. The character GKA is continuously displayed, the teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/4, and the teammate character GKC is displayed with a probability of about 1/2. Similarly, when the teammate character GKB is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKB is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/4 in the current game, with a probability of about 1/4. The teammate character GKA is displayed, and the teammate character GKC is displayed with a probability of about 1/2. If the teammate character GKC is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKC is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/2 in this game, and the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. The teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. In other words, in the case of the previous sign state, the teammate character GKC is easily displayed in the special sign last game.

  On the other hand, in the last sign game in the special sign state, in the last game, if the teammate character GKA is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKA continues with a probability of about 1/2. The teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/4, and the teammate character GKBC is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. Similarly, when the teammate character GKB is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKB is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/4, and the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 1/2. The teammate character GKC is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. Further, when the teammate character GKC is displayed in the first area FA in the previous game, the teammate character GKC is continuously displayed with a probability of about 1/4, and the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 1/2. The friend character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/4. In other words, in the case of a predicate sign state, it is easy to display other than the ally character GKC in the special sign last game.

  In the above configuration, when the special sign state ends in the game of the teammate character GKC (development into a continuous performance), the player is more likely to win the AT state than the other teammate character GK. In a game in which the character GKC is displayed, it is expected that the special sign state will end in the game. On the other hand, in a game in which a character other than the teammate character GKC is displayed, it is expected that the special precursor state will continue. When the special sign state ends, the continuous effect is executed, and it is notified whether or not the AT state is won in the last game of the continuous effect (the last game in the sign state).

  The part (b) of FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a mode of switching the teammate character GK in the first area FA in the comparative example. In the comparison, the display is switched stepwise in the order of the teammate character GKA, teammate character GKB, and teammate character GKBC. In the game after “” is displayed, the teammate character GKA and the teammate character GKB are not displayed, which is different from the present embodiment.

  In contrast, when the special sign state is ended in the game in which the teammate character GKC is displayed, the AT state is won in comparison with the case in which the special sign state is ended in the game in which the other characters GKC are displayed. Expectation is high. Therefore, when the teammate character GKC is not displayed in the special sign state, the player plays the game while wishing to switch to the teammate character GKC. However, since the teammate character GKC in the first area FA is not switched after the teammate character GKC is displayed, some players may lose interest in the first area FA.

  In the present embodiment, the teammate character GKA, teammate character GKB, and teammate character GKK are switched and displayed. That is, even if the teammate character GKC is displayed, there is a possibility that the teammate character GKC may be switched thereafter. Therefore, in the game after the teammate character GKC is displayed, the player's interest can be attracted to the teammate character GK displayed in the first area FA.

  In the present embodiment, the teammate character displayed in the first area FA is compared with the first period (the early stage of the special precursor state) in the second period of the special precursor state (the end stage of the special precursor state). GK switches frequently. Therefore, the effect of being able to attract the player's interest to the teammate character GK displayed in the first area FA is particularly remarkable.

  FIG. 62 is a conceptual diagram of an AT level determination table. The AT level determination table is used when the above-described AT start spinning effect (see FIG. 17) is executed, that is, when the sub state shifts to the AT state. In the present embodiment, the AT level determined using the AT level determination table may be referred to as “final AT level”. Further, as described above, the sub CPU 412 determines any AT state from AT level 0 to AT level 3 in the normal lottery process (see FIG. 36). In the present embodiment, the AT level determined in the normal lottery process may be referred to as “predetermined AT level”. Note that the pre-determined AT level may be suggested by an effect in the precursor state, for example.

  The final AT level is determined in accordance with the predetermined AT level and the line where the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed in the AT start spinning effect (middle, lower, upper, upper right, and lower right lines, see FIG. 18). The As described above, when the game is played 1500 times in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state. In the above case, the predetermined AT level is AT level 2 or AT level 3.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the AT level determination table is provided for each predetermined AT level. Part (a) of FIG. 62 is an AT level determination table that is referred to in the case of the predetermined AT level 0, and part (b) of FIG. 62 is an AT level determination that is referred to in the case of the predetermined AT level 1. 62 is an AT level determination table that is referred to in the case of the predetermined AT level 2, and the part (d) in FIG. 62 is referred to in the case of the predetermined AT level 3. This is an AT level determination table.

  The AT level determination table includes lottery values for each final AT level, and each lottery value is provided for each stop line of red sevens in the AT start spinning effect. For example, as shown in part (a) of FIG. 62, when the predetermined AT level is 0 and the stop line with the red sevens is in the middle, the lottery value other than the final AT level is “0”. . Accordingly, when the predetermined AT level is 0 and the stop line with the red sevens is in the middle stage, the final AT level is determined. On the other hand, when the red seven match is stopped and displayed on the lower line, a lottery value of “0” or more is assigned to each of the final AT level 1 to the final AT level 3. Therefore, when the predetermined AT level is 0 and the stop line aligned with the red seven is the lower line, one of the final AT level 1 to the final AT level 3 is determined. Similarly, when the red seven match is stopped and displayed on the upper line or the upper right line, the final AT level 2 or the final AT level 3 is determined. When the red-seven-equipped stop line is a downward-sloping line, the lottery value other than AT level 3 is “0”, and AT level 3 is determined.

  As described above, the AT level is promoted from the predetermined AT level in accordance with the red-seven-equipped stop line in the AT start spinning effect. Specifically, if the stop line with the red seven line is the lower line, it is promoted to AT level 1 or higher. In addition, when the stop line aligned with the red seven is an upper line or an upper right line, the line is promoted to AT level 2 or higher. In addition, when the stop line aligned with the red seven is a right-down line, it is promoted to AT level 3.

  As can be understood from part (b) and part (c) of FIG. 62, in the case of the pre-determined AT level 1 and pre-determined AT level 2, as in the case of the pre-determined AT level 0, the red seven-alignment is in the middle stage. If the display is stopped other than the line, the AT level may be promoted. In the case of the pre-determined AT level 3, as understood from the part (d) of FIG.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the final AT level that is higher than the predetermined AT level can be determined according to the stop line of the red sevens. Therefore, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for an AT state with a higher AT level in accordance with the stop line having the same red seven.

  FIG. 63 is a conceptual diagram of the second addition table. The sub CPU 412 determines the addition value of the second counter using the second addition table according to the AT level and the addition state during AT (low probability state, high probability state, and ultra-high probability state) described later. The AT level includes the AT level 0 to the AT level 3 and the AT level EX described above. The AT level EX is determined when a transition is made from the normal state to the AT state via the SP state. In the present embodiment, by using the second addition table corresponding to the combination of the AT level and the addition state during AT, the expected value of the addition value in each game depends on the AT level and the addition state during AT. It becomes size. For example, as compared with a game in which the AT addition state during AT is a low probability state at AT level 0, a game in which the AT addition state during AT is an extremely high probability state in AT level EX has an expected value of the addition value determined in each game. large.

  In the AT state, the sub CPU 412 determines the added value in the game in which the special replay is stopped and displayed. Further, in the AT state, the stop operation order in which the special replay is stopped and displayed is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the second addition table includes each lottery value of each addition value. In the second counter addition process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random number value R3, and adds the addition value obtained by subtracting the negative value to the second counter. Specifically, when the special replay is stopped and displayed, one of “1pt”, “3pt”, “5pt”, “10pt”, “20pt”, and “50pt” is determined. In addition, each lottery value of each added value is provided for each value of the replay continuous counter, and the expected value of the added value increases as the replay continuous counter increases.

  FIG. 64 is a conceptual diagram of an during-AT addition state determination table that is referred to when the addition state during AT is switched. The addition state during AT is changed according to the winning area of each game, similarly to the addition state in the normal state (see FIG. 40). The addition state during AT includes a low probability state, a high probability state in which the expected value of the added value in each game is larger than that in the low probability state, and a super high probability state in which the expected value of the added value in each game is greater than in the high probability state. It is comprised including. In the present embodiment, the ultra-high probability state is more likely to be notified of the correct replay order of the special replay than the high probability state and the low probability state. Also, the high probability state is more likely to be notified of the correct push order of the special replay than the low probability state. Further, when the special replay is stopped and displayed in the ultra-high probability state, a large added value is easily determined as compared with the high-probability state and the low-probability state. In addition, when the special replay is stopped and displayed in the high probability state, a large added value is easily determined as compared with the low probability state. The addition state during AT is changed to a higher level when a weak rare role or a strong rare role is won in the winning area, and is changed to a lower state when a batting order bell (A1-4, B1-4) is won. Is done.

  Each AT addition state determination table includes an addition state determination table referred to in the low probability state shown in part (a) of FIG. 64 and an addition state determination referred to in the high probability state shown in part (b) of FIG. 64, and an addition state determination table referred to in the extremely high probability state shown in part (c) of FIG. Each AT addition state determination table includes each lottery value of each AT addition state. In the during-AT addition state determination process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random number value R3, and shifts to an addition state during AT in which the subtraction result is a negative number. Each lottery value is provided for each combination of the winning area and the type of reel lock (short lock, middle lock, long lock) of the game won by the winning area.

  FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram of an image ME displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the AT state. As shown in FIG. 65, the image ME is configured to include a display area FM, a third display unit PC, and a push order instruction image GS. In the display area FM, for example, various effects including an effect corresponding to the winning area, an effect suggesting an AT level and an addition state during AT, and an effect suggesting winning in a special AT state described later are executed. In the AT state (including the special AT state), the push order instruction image GS notifies the correct push order of the batting order bell and the stop operation order for displaying the special replay in a stopped manner.

  The third display unit PC is configured to include a second meter graphic image GM2. The second meter image GM2 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the second counter. Specifically, the second meter graphic image GM2 includes the end portion MT. The end MT moves clockwise in the vicinity of the inner periphery of the third display unit PC every time the second counter is added, and when the second counter reaches a predetermined threshold value “100”, the end MT is shown in FIG. Move to position MTmax. In addition, a character string indicating the current value of the second counter is displayed on the third display portion PC. For example, when the current value of the second counter is “20”, a character string “20 points” is displayed on the third display unit PC.

  In the image ME, information for notifying the current value of the remaining number counter (character string “LAST150” in FIG. 65), the number of games in the AT state (character string “TOTAL100 game” in FIG. 65), and the AT state The number of medals acquired at (character string “GET270” in FIG. 65) is displayed. The remaining number counter is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example. Further, the number of games in the AT state and the number of acquired medals are stored in, for example, the sub RAM 414. In the present embodiment, when the AT state is started, “150” or “300” is stored as the initial value of the remaining number counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value of the remaining number counter is determined to be “150” with a probability of about 15/16 and “300” with a probability of about 1/16.

  When the second counter reaches the threshold value “100”, the sub state is added to the standby state. In the add-on standby state, a stop operation order (order 1 shown in FIG. 16) in which the above-described black and white seven-turn effect (see FIG. 23) can be executed is notified. In addition, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black-and-white seven-rotation effect, the combo-rotation effect and the rush-rotation effect are executed. In each turning effect, the number of extras is determined each time the white seven uniform or the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 66 is a conceptual diagram of each additional number determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, the additional number determination table includes each lottery value for each additional number. The sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random number value R3, and determines the number of additions in which the subtraction result is a negative number. The determined additional number is added to the remaining number counter. For example, the liquid crystal display device 30 notifies the additional number determined when the seven-match is stopped and displayed when the seven-match is stopped and displayed.

  Part (a) of FIG. 66 is a conceptual diagram of an additional number determination table used for determining the additional number in the monochrome seven-rotor effect. Each lottery value in the extra number determination table is provided for each of the seven uniform types (white seven uniform, black seven uniform) that are stopped and displayed in each round effect. As understood from the part (a) of FIG. 66, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-rotor effect, the added number “30” “50” “100” “200” “300” One of “sheet”, “400”, and “500” is determined. On the other hand, when the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, the additional number “50” or “100” is determined. That is, when the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, the additional number of “200 sheets” or more is not determined, unlike when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed. However, as described above, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-winding effect, the game proceeds to the special gaming state (the combo-winding effect and the rush-winding effect), and the number of extras in the special gaming state. Can be determined. On the other hand, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-winding effect, after that, the turning effect is terminated and the special game state is not entered.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the black and white seven-turn effect, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, only the first privilege of the additional number is given, and when the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, In addition to the additional number (first privilege), a second privilege called transition to the special gaming state is given. That is, when the second counter reaches a predetermined threshold value and a privilege is granted, there are cases where the second privilege is granted or not given. According to the above configuration, as compared with the configuration in which the privilege given by the specific condition (the second counter exceeds the threshold) does not change. The benefits given according to the value of the 2 counter are diversified, and the game is improved.

  Part (b) of FIG. 66 is a conceptual diagram of an additional number determination table used for determining the additional number in the combo drum effect. As shown in part (b) of FIG. 66, the extra number determination table used for the combo spinning effect includes the lottery values for the stages of the combo spinning effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26). As understood from the part (b) of FIG. 66, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the combo drum effect, the additional number “30” is determined. Further, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the second stage, the additional number “50” is determined. In the third stage, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the additional number “100” is determined. However, as described above, the probability that the black seven-match is stopped and displayed in each pseudo game of the combo drum effect is about ½, and each stage ends with a predetermined number of pseudo games. To do. Therefore, the number of extras is not always determined in each stage of the combo drum effect. The first stage may be configured such that the additional number “50” or the additional number “100” can be determined. Further, in the second stage, it may be configured such that the additional number “30” or the additional number “100” can be determined. In the third stage, the additional number “30” or the additional number “50” is determined. It is good also as a structure which can be made.

  Further, as described above, each stage of the combo drum effect has a different number of executable pseudo games. Specifically, the pseudo game can be executed three times for the first stage, twice for the second stage, and once for the third stage. Therefore, the probability that the number of additional sheets is determined in each stage (the probability that the black seven-equal stop display is successful) is different in each stage. Specifically, in the first stage, the number of additional sheets is determined with a probability of about 7/8, the number of additional sheets is determined with a probability of about 3/4 in the second stage, and about 1/2 in the third stage. The number of additional sheets is determined by the probability. That is, it can be said that the special game state in which the combo spinning effect is executed (the section in which a plurality of pseudo games are executed) is classified into an added state in which the ease of determining the additional number is different from each other in each game. . In the present embodiment, in the special game state, the first stage section of the combo spinning effect is referred to as the first added state (a state in which up to three pseudo games are executed), and similarly, the second stage section. Are referred to as a second added state (a gaming state in which a maximum of two pseudo games are executed), and a section of the third stage is referred to as a third added state (a gaming state in which one pseudo game is executed).

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first added state (when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed), the state shifts to the second added state. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied in the second added state, the state shifts to the third added state. Therefore, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the added state does not change, the gaming state is rich in change, and the gameability is improved.

  In the rush spinning effect, the number of extras is determined each time the white seven-equal or black seven-align is stopped and displayed in the rush fluctuation (see FIG. 28). Part (c) of FIG. 66 is a conceptual diagram of an addition determination table used for determining the number of additions in the rush spinning effect. The addition determination table includes lottery values of “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, and “50”. In addition, each lottery value is provided for each of the seven matches. As understood from part (c) of FIG. 66, when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the rush fluctuation, the added number “10”, “20”, “30”, “40” or “50” Is determined. On the other hand, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the rush fluctuation, the additional number “20” or “30” is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the additional number is not determined in the AT state. Therefore, it can be said that the number of additional games in each pseudo game in the special game state is easily determined as compared with each game in the AT state. In each game in the AT state, a configuration in which the additional number is determined may be adopted. For example, when the rare combination is won in the AT state, the additional number may be determined.

  As described above, when the special replay is stopped and displayed (a part when the replay is won), the second counter is added. In the present embodiment, in addition to the above case, when a rare role (weak watermelon or the like) is won, execution of the special addition effect is determined by lottery, and the second counter is added by the special addition effect. In addition, it is good also as a structure performed immediately after a special addition effect is determined, and it is good also as a structure performed via a precursor state after a special addition effect is determined.

  Part (a) of FIG. 67 is a conceptual diagram of a special addition effect determination table. When the sub CPU 412 wins the rare role in the AT state, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to execute the special addition effect with reference to the special addition effect determination table. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 67, the special addition effect determination table is configured to include each lottery value for each effect level (1 to 3). In the special addition effect determination process, when “effect level 1”, “effect level 2”, or “effect level 3” is determined, the special addition effect is executed. In the special addition effect at the effect level 2, the added value added to the second counter tends to be larger than the special addition effect at the effect level 1. In addition, the special addition effect at the effect level 3 is likely to have a larger value added to the second counter than the special addition effect at the effect level 2. On the other hand, when “non-winning” is determined, the special addition effect is not executed.

  In addition, each lottery value in the special addition effect determination table is provided for each combination of the winning area and the type of reel lock (short lock, middle lock, long lock) of the game won by the winning area. In the special addition effect determination process, the sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random value R3, and determines an effect level at which the subtraction result is a negative number.

  As understood from part (a) of FIG. 67, the special addition effect is more easily determined when the weak cherry or the strong cherry is won in comparison with the case where the weak or strong watermelon is won in the winning area. On the other hand, when weak cherry or strong cherry is won, production level 1 can be determined, but when weak watermelon or strong watermelon is won, special addition production is decided, production level 2 and production level 3 Is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probabilities of determining each effect level differ according to the winning area, and the effect levels that can be determined differ. Therefore, the probability that the special addition effect is determined in the special addition effect determination process and the effect level that can be determined are rich in change, and the game performance is improved.

  Part (b) of FIG. 67 is a conceptual diagram of a second addition table used when a special addition effect is determined. Similar to the second addition table (see FIG. 63) that is referred to when the special replay is stopped and displayed, the second addition table includes each lottery value of each added value. As described above, the addition value determined when the special replay is stopped and displayed is any one of “1pt”, “3pt”, “5pt”, “10pt”, “20pt”, and “50pt”. On the other hand, as understood from the part (b) of FIG. 67, in the special addition effect, any one of “50 pt”, “100 pt”, “150 pt”, “200 pt”, “250 pt”, and “300 pt” is determined. Is done. That is, the addition value that can be determined when the special replay is stopped and displayed is different from the addition value that can be determined in the special addition effect. Specifically, each addition value that can be determined when the special replay is stopped and displayed is smaller than the threshold value “100” of the second counter, whereas each addition value that can be determined in the special addition effect is the second counter. May be larger than the threshold value.

  The added value of the special addition effect is stored in the addition effect counter. For example, the counter for addition effect is provided in the sub RAM 414.

  FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram of each image MF displayed by the liquid crystal display device 30 in the special addition effect. The liquid crystal display device 30 sequentially displays images including the images MF from the portion (a) to the portion (e) in FIG. 68 according to the progress of the special addition effect. FIG. 68 illustrates a case where “50 pt” is determined as the addition value of the second counter. That is, the case where the addition value smaller than the threshold value of the second counter is determined is illustrated. In addition, each image MF when the addition value larger than the threshold value of the second counter is determined is illustrated in FIG. 69 described later.

  Part (a) in FIG. 68 is an image MF immediately after the start of the special addition effect. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 68, when the special addition effect is started, the fourth display unit PD is displayed in the vicinity of the third display unit PC. The fourth display unit PD displays the added value of the second counter. However, the numerical value displayed by the fourth display unit PD is displayed as a numerical value “0” immediately after the start of the special addition effect, and is updated (added) every time the player presses the effect button 26. In the special addition effect, the third display unit PC displays the value of the second counter immediately before the special addition effect is started. Further, as shown in the part (a) of FIG. 68, a message instructing to press the effect button 26 is displayed in the image MF.

  In the present embodiment, an operation for updating the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD in the special addition effect is referred to as “update operation”. The period during which the update operation in the special addition effect is valid is referred to as “update operation valid period”. Further, a period during which the update operation is invalid is referred to as an “update operation invalid period”.

  Each time an update operation is performed during the update operation valid period, a numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is added to a specific numerical value (hereinafter referred to as “partial addition value”). The partial addition value is smaller than the current value of the addition effect counter, and is determined for each update operation. Specifically, when an update operation is performed, any one of numerical values “1”, “5”, “10”, “30”, and “100” is randomly determined as a partial addition value. The partial addition value determined according to the update operation is subtracted from the current value of the addition effect counter.

  Part (b) of FIG. 68 is an image MF of the update operation valid period. When an update operation is performed during the update operation valid period, the partial addition value described above is determined, and a partial addition value image GD that displays the partial addition value appears. The partially added value image GD is displayed in the vicinity of the fourth display unit PD as shown in the part (b) of FIG. The partial added value image GD is displayed during a predetermined display period (for example, about 1 second) and is not displayed when the display period has elapsed. Therefore, for example, when a subsequent update operation is performed before 1 second has elapsed since the current update operation, a plurality of partial addition value images GD are displayed on the same screen (part (b) in FIG. 68). 3 in the example).

  By the way, as described above, when the sum of the numerical value displayed on the third display unit PC and the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit PD is equal to or greater than the threshold value “100” of the second counter, the right to acquire an additional number is obtained. (That is, the right to execute the above-described black-and-white seven-turn effect. Hereinafter referred to as “additional right”). Therefore, the player may want to check the value of the third display unit PC (the value of the second counter before the addition value is added) even during the period in which the value of the fourth display unit PD is updated. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, as shown in part (b) of FIG. 68, both the third display unit PC and the fourth display unit PD are displayed on the image MF during the update operation effective period. The configuration is as follows. Therefore, the numerical value of the third display unit PC can be confirmed even during the period in which the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is updated.

  As shown in the part (c) of FIG. 68, when the sum of the partial addition values reaches the addition value “50”, the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is added to the numerical value of the third display unit PC to display the fourth display. The part PD is hidden. Further, after adding the numerical value of the fourth display part PD to the numerical value of the third display part PC, as shown in part (e) of FIG. 68, the added value added in the current special addition effect is displayed.

  FIG. 69 shows each image MF of the special addition effect when “150 pt” is determined as the addition value of the second counter. That is, FIG. 69 illustrates each image MF of the special addition effect in which an addition value larger than the threshold value of the second counter is determined. The special addition effect in which an addition value larger than the threshold value of the second counter is added is different from the special addition effect in which an addition value smaller than the threshold value of the second counter is added in that an update operation invalid period is provided.

  Part (a) of FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of an image MF immediately after the start of the special addition effect. As shown in part (a) of FIG. 69, when the special addition effect starts, the fourth display unit PD is displayed in the vicinity of the third display unit PC, and the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is updated by the update operation. . The part (b) in FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of the image MF during the update operation valid period.

  Part (c) of FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of the image MF at the time when the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD becomes larger than the threshold value of the second counter in the update operation effective period. For example, when the numerical value of the fourth display part PD is “93” and the partial addition value “10” is determined, the numerical value of the fourth display part PD is changed as shown in part (c) of FIG. It is updated to “103”. When the fourth display unit PD exceeds the threshold value of the second counter, an update operation invalid period in which the update operation is invalid is started.

  The part (d) of FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of the image MF in the update operation invalid period. In the update operation invalid period, a predetermined effect is executed. For example, during the update operation invalid period, it is notified that the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD has exceeded the threshold value of the second counter. In addition, during the update operation invalid period, it is notified that the additional right has been granted. The update operation invalid period ends, for example, when a time (for example, 5 seconds) required until the above-described effect ends.

  The part (e) in FIG. 69 is an image MF immediately after the update operation invalid period ends. The fourth display unit PD subtracts the threshold value of the second counter from the numerical value immediately before the update operation invalid period (the numerical value “103” in the part (c) of FIG. 69) (the numerical value “ 3 ”) is displayed immediately after the end of the update operation invalid period. Also, as shown in part (e) of FIG. 69, the number of additional rights granted in the current special addition effect is displayed.

  As shown in part (f) of FIG. 69, when the update operation invalid period ends and the addition effect counter is not a numerical value “0”, the update operation valid period is resumed. When the addition effect counter is subtracted to the numerical value “0” after the updating operation valid period is restarted, the updating of the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is stopped. For example, when the addition value “150 pt” has been determined, the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is added to “50” in the resumed update operation valid period.

  When the addition effect counter is subtracted from the numerical value “0”, the numerical value of the fourth display portion PD is added to the numerical value of the third display portion PC as shown in the part (g) of FIG. Hide PD. Further, after adding the numerical value of the fourth display part PD to the numerical value of the third display part PC, as shown in the part (h) of FIG. 69, the sum of the added values added in the current special addition effect is displayed. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special addition effect in which the effect button 26 is repeatedly operated, the update operation is invalidated when the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is updated to be equal to or greater than the threshold value of the second counter. With invalid period. In addition, a predetermined effect is executed in the update operation invalid period. Therefore, the player temporarily stops the operation of the effect button 26 during a period in which the predetermined effect is executed. According to the above configuration, information notified by a predetermined effect can be reliably transmitted to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when an extra right is given in the special addition effect, after the special addition effect is finished, the state shifts to an additional standby state. In addition, when a plurality of additional rights are granted, immediately after the black and white seven-rotation effect or the special game state (combo-rotation effect) is completed, the state again shifts to the addition standby state.

  For example, a configuration is assumed in which, despite the notification that a plurality of additional rights have been granted, after the completion of one special gaming state, the state shifts to the additional standby state via the AT state. In the above configuration, depending on the player, the AT state interposed between the special game states may be bothersome. In the present embodiment, immediately after the special gaming state is ended, the state is again added to the standby state, so that there is no trouble described above.

  When the rare combination is won in the AT state, whether or not to execute the special addition effect described above is determined by lottery in addition to whether or not to shift to the special AT state. In addition, when the confirmed combination is won in the AT state, the transition to the special AT state is confirmed. The special AT state is a sub state in which the stop operation order in which the special replay is stopped and displayed is more easily notified than the AT state. In other words, in the special AT state, the added value of the second counter is easily determined as compared with the AT state. The special AT state includes a first special AT state and a second special AT state. The first special AT state ends with 30 games, and the second special AT state ends with 60 games.

  FIG. 70 is a conceptual diagram of the special AT determination table. As shown in FIG. 70, the special AT determination table includes lottery values of “lost”, “first special AT”, and “second special AT”. Each lottery value is provided for each winning area. When the result of subtracting the lottery value in the first special AT state from the random number value R3 becomes a negative number, the sub CPU 412 determines the transition to the first special AT state. In addition, when the result of subtracting the lottery value in the second special AT state from the random number value R3 becomes a negative number, the transition to the second special AT state is determined. When the transition to the special AT state is determined, for example, the transition to the special AT state is made after the precursor state of a predetermined number of games is completed.

  In the above configuration, in a game in which a rare role is won, the special AT state and the special addition effect may be won in duplicate, or only one of them may be won. In addition, in a configuration in which the special AT state and the special addition effect are won, the special addition effect may be executed after the special AT state ends, or the special AT state is executed after the special addition effect ends. May be. Further, a special addition effect may be executed in any game in the special AT state. Further, in each game in the special AT state, it may be determined whether or not to execute the special addition effect.

  The sub CPU 412 executes a return determination process when the AT state ends. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 executes the return determination process according to the value of the second counter when the AT state ends and the payout rate when the AT state ends. The payout rate is calculated from the total number of medals paid out in each game and the total number of betting medals. For example, when the total number of payout medals is equal to the total number of betting medals, the payout rate is 100%. In this embodiment, the payout rate is calculated from the total number of betting medals and the total number of payout medals from when the power is turned on until the AT state ends. In the return determination process, when the return to the AT state is determined, the initial value is set in the remaining number counter again after the end of the current AT state, and the next AT state is started.

  Part (a) of FIG. 71 is a conceptual diagram of the return mode determination table. The sub CPU 412 determines the return mode based on the value of the second counter when the AT state ends. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the return mode as mode A when the second counter when the AT state ends is in the range of the numerical value “0” to the numerical value “25”. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the return mode as mode B when the second counter when the AT state ends is in the range of the numerical value “26” to the numerical value “75”, and the second counter starts from the numerical value “76”. When it is in the range of the numerical value “99”, the mode C is determined.

  Part (b) (b-1 to b-3) in FIG. 71 is a conceptual diagram of the return determination table. The return table defines the probability of returning to the AT state (hereinafter referred to as “recovery probability”). The return determination table includes a return determination table (part (b-1) in FIG. 71) that defines a return probability when the payout rate when the AT state ends is 75% or less, and the AT state ends. The return decision table (part (b-2) in FIG. 71) that defines the return probability when the payout rate is in the range of 76% to 124%, and the payout rate when the AT state ends is 125. And a return determination table (part (b-3) in FIG. 71) that defines the return probability in the case of% or more. The sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to return to the AT state with a return probability corresponding to the payout rate when the AT state ends.

  As shown in part (b-1) of FIG. 71, in the case of the return mode A when the AT state ends, the return rate is 75% or less, and the return probability is about 6%. In the return mode B, the return probability is about 12%, and in the return mode C, the return probability is about 50%. That is, the return probability increases as the value of the second counter increases when the AT state ends. In addition, when the AT rate is in the range of 75% to 124% when the AT state ends, the return probability is about 3% in the return mode A as shown in the part (b-2) of FIG. In the case of the return mode B, the return probability is about 6%. In the case of the return mode C, the return probability is about 25%. The higher the value of the second counter when the AT state ends, the higher the return probability. Becomes higher. When the AT rate is 125% or more when the AT state ends, as shown in part (b-3) of FIG. 71, in the return mode A, the return probability is about 2%. In the case of B, the return probability is about 3%. In the return mode C, the return probability is about 13%. The return probability increases as the numerical value of the second counter when the AT state ends is larger.

  A configuration is assumed in which a privilege corresponding to the second counter at the time when the AT state ends is not given. In the above configuration, the acquired added value is wasted, which may reduce the player's willingness to play the game. In view of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured such that the return probability increases as the second counter when the AT state ends is larger. Therefore, a privilege according to the second counter when the AT state ends is given, and the situation where the acquired added value is wasted is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, as can be understood from the part (b) of FIG. 71, the lower the payout rate, the higher the return probability. For example, the return probability of return mode A is approximately 6% when the payout rate is 75% or less, approximately 3% when the payout rate is in the range of 75% to 124%, and the payout rate is 125% or more. Is about 2%. That is, the lower the payout rate, the higher the return probability of the return mode A. Also in the return mode B and the return mode C, as in the return mode A, the lower the payout rate, the higher the return probability. According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the payout rate while suppressing an excessive decrease in the payout rate.

  Part (a) of FIG. 72 is a conceptual diagram of a stock number determination table referred to in the SP state. As described above, the main CPU 301 executes the red seven-turn effect in the SP state (main state 2). The sub CPU 412 determines the number of stocks by referring to the stock number determination table when the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the red seven-rotor effect.

  As shown in part (a) of FIG. 72, the stock number determination table includes each lottery value of each stock number. The sub CPU 412 subtracts each lottery value from the random value R3, and the number of sets in which the subtraction result is a negative number is determined. In addition, each lottery value is provided for each line in which the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed in the red seven-rotation effect. Specifically, when the line where the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed is “middle line”, “lower line”, “upper line”, and “upper right line”, the lottery value of the stock number “1” is “64225” The lottery values for the stock numbers “2” and “3” are “655”. On the other hand, when the line on which the red seven match is stopped is “Right Down Line”, the lottery value for the stock number “1” is “0” and the lottery value for the stock number “2” is “64880”. The lottery value for the stock number “3” is “655”. In other words, when the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed on the “right downward line”, the stock number “2” or more is determined.

  According to the above configuration, the probability that each stock number is determined and the type of the stock number that can be determined differ depending on the line on which the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the number of stocks when the red seven match is stopped and displayed is rich and the gameability is improved.

  When the stock number is determined in the SP state, the sub CPU 412 adds the stock number to the AT set number counter (AT levels 0 to 3, EX). The AT set number counter to be added in the SP state is determined according to the sub state in which the SP state is won. Specifically, when the SP state is won in the AT state of AT level 0, an AT set number counter of AT level 0 is added. Similarly, when the SP state is won in the AT state of AT level 1, the AT set number counter of AT level 1 is added, and when the SP state is won in the AT state of AT level 2, the number of AT sets in AT level 2 When the counter is added and the SP state is elected in the AT state of the AT level 3, the AT set number counter of the AT level 3 is incremented, and when the SP state is elected in the AT state of the AT level EX, the AT of the AT level EX Add set number counter.

  As understood from the above description, when the SP state is won in the AT state, the same set number of AT levels as the AT state is stocked. On the other hand, when the SP state is won in the normal state, the stock number determined in the SP state is added to the AT set number counter of the AT level EX.

  According to the above configuration, as shown in part (b) of FIG. 72, when the SP state is won in the AT state, the AT level does not change. On the other hand, when the SP state is won in the normal state, as described above, the AT state of the AT level EX is stocked, and the AT state after the completion of the SP state becomes the AT level EX. That is, in this embodiment, it is also said that the privilege (right to shift to the AT state of the AT level EX) granted when winning the SP state in the normal state is not granted when winning the SP state in the AT state. Is done.

  By the way, the AT state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state because the correct pushing order of the batting order bell is notified. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the benefits granted when winning in the SP state in the normal state are also granted in the same way when winning in the SP state in the AT state, there may be a disadvantage that excessive profits are acquired. . In the present embodiment, when the SP state is won in the AT state, the AT state after the SP state is not set to the AT level EX. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive profit from being acquired in the AT state.

  As described above, the sub CPU 412 notifies the stop operation order in which a specific winning combination (correct bell, special replay) is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, the sub CPU 412 notifies the stop operation order for shifting the main state (see FIG. 16).

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a stop operation sequence notified in accordance with the combination of the sub state and the main state. As shown in FIG. 73, the stop operation order is not notified in the normal state, the precursor state, and the periodic chance state. In the present embodiment, in a gaming state in which the stop operation order is not notified, when a stop operation other than the stop button 25L is first performed among the stop buttons 25, a warning is issued to the player. For example, the sub CPU 412 displays a message “please press from the left reel” on the liquid crystal display device 30 to give a warning. Therefore, in principle, the player performs a stop operation on the stop button 25L first in a gaming state in which the stop operation order is not notified. In addition, in the game state where the stop operation order is not notified, when a button other than the stop button 25L is first operated, a game penalty may be given to the player in addition to the above-described warning. For example, a configuration in which the normal lottery process is not performed until a predetermined period (for example, a period of 5 games) elapses after a stop operation other than the stop button 25L is performed can be employed.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the special chance state, the correct answer push order (stop operation order) in which the correct answer bell stops at the active line is notified. Therefore, in a game in which the hitting bell is won among the games in the special chance state, the player performs a stop operation in the correct pressing order of the winning hitting bell. On the other hand, in the game in which the hitting order replay (X, Y) is won among the games in the special chance state, since the stop operation order is not notified, the player operates in the order of the first left stop. As described above, in the game in which the hitting order replay is won, the game moves to the main state 0 when operated in the order of the first left stop. Therefore, the special chance state becomes the main state 0 in principle.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the start preparation state, the order 1 to the order 2 are notified. Specifically, when the AT state is won in the normal state, the periodic chance state, or the special chance state and the start preparation state is entered, the order 1 is notified. In the main state 0, when the game in which the batting order replay is won is stopped in the order 1, and the immediately following batting order replay is stopped in the order 1 in the winning game, the AT start spinning effect is executed. In addition, when staying in the main state 1 or the main state 2 before the AT start spinning effect is executed, the stop operation order is not notified, the state is shifted to the main state 0, and then the order 1 is notified. The

  On the other hand, when the SP state is won in the normal state or the AT state and the start preparation state is entered, the order 2 is notified. In the main state 0 (normal state) or the main state 1 (AT state), when the batting order replay is stopped in the order 2 in the winning game and the immediately following batting order replay is stopped in the order 2 again in the winning game , SP start spinning effect is executed. In addition, when staying in the main state 2 before the AT start spinning effect is executed, the stop operation order is not notified, the state shifts to the main state 0, and then the order 2 is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the AT state, the correct answer order of the correct bell and special replay is notified. However, the correct push order of the special replay is notified in some games among the games won by the batting order replay. That is, in the AT state, depending on the operation order, the correct replay order of special replay may not be notified even in a game in which special replay can be stopped and displayed. In the AT state of the present embodiment, the correct push order of the special replay is notified with the probability X (X> 0) of the game won by the batting order replay. In the above configuration, for example, in the AT state, the probability that the correct replay correct pressing order is notified under specific conditions may be variable. For example, when a rare combination is won, the above-described probability X may be changed to a probability Y (Y> X).

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the special AT state, the correct answer push order of the correct answer bell and special replay is notified. Specifically, in the special AT state, the correct push order of the special replay is notified at a probability of about 100% of the games won by the batting order replay. Therefore, in the special AT state, the special replay is more easily stopped and displayed as compared with the AT state. Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in the SP state, the correct answer push order of the correct bells is notified.

  In the add-on standby state, order 1 is notified. In the main state 1, when the stop order replay is performed in the order 1 in the game in which the hit order replay is won, and the stop order operation in the order 1 is again executed in the game in which the hit order replay is selected, the black and white rendition effect is executed. The main state in the AT state is in principle the main state 1. Therefore, the additional standby state that shifts from the AT state also becomes the main state 1.

  However, when the player performs a stop operation in a different order from the notified order, the main state may be 0 even if the sub-state is in the added standby state. In the above case, it is necessary to shift to the main state 1 in which the black and white seven-rotor effect can be executed. For example, a configuration in which the order 1 is notified in the standby state in which the main state 0 is added and the state 1 is shifted to the main state 1 can be considered. However, when the stop operation is performed in order 1 and the main state 1 is shifted to, the AT start spinning effect is executed. Therefore, in the above configuration, the AT start spinning effect may be executed in the extra waiting state in which the AT state has already started, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in the order 3 of the transition operation order, the configuration is such that the transition to the main state 1 can be performed without executing the AT start spinning effect. According to the above configuration, when shifting to the main state 1 in order 1, the AT start spinning effect is executed. On the other hand, when the sequence 3 shifts to the main state 1, the AT start spinning effect is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, when the sub state is the add-on standby state and the main state is the main state 0, order 3 is notified. According to the above configuration, when the transition is made from the normal state to the AT state, the AT spinning effect is executed, and in the game after the transition to the AT state, the main state 1 is entered without executing the AT spinning effect. Transition (return) is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the stop operation order is not notified in the end preparation state. Therefore, the player plays the game in the operation order of the first left stop in the completion preparation state. The end preparation state is a sub-state that is shifted to when the AT state ends. Therefore, the main state of the game immediately after the transition to the end preparation state is the main state 1. When an operation order of the first left stop (operation order other than the transition operation order) is made in the game in which the batting order replay in the end preparation state is won, the main state transitions to 0 and the sub state transitions to the normal state.

<Each process executed by the main CPU>
The main CPU 301 executes various processes with reference to the various data described above. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the activation process of the main CPU 301. The main CPU 301 executes start-up processing when a reset signal is input from a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit outputs a reset signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of the power supply voltage to the main control board 300 is started by turning on the power switch 511SW, the activation process is executed.

  When the activation process is started, the main CPU 301 initializes each register and peripheral circuit of the main control board 300 (S1). Note that the main CPU 301 may execute a security check process for determining the validity of a control program stored in the main ROM 302 before initializing each register and peripheral circuit.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting switch is in an ON state (S2). The setting switch is turned on when a setting key (not shown) is inserted into a keyhole provided inside the gaming machine 1 and rotated. When the main CPU 301 determines that the setting switch is in the ON state (S2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a setting change start command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S3), and proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when determining that the setting switch is not in the ON state (S2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether a backup flag is stored in the main RAM 303 (S4). In the present embodiment, when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 falls below a predetermined threshold (when the power is shut off), the main CPU 301 backs up each data stored in the main RAM 303 and A backup flag is stored in the RAM 303. That is, if the backup is normally executed when the power is turned off, the backup flag is stored in the main RAM 303.

  When determining that the backup flag is stored (S4: YES), the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 303 (S5). In the present embodiment, even when the power is turned off, the checksum of the main RAM 303 is calculated and stored, similarly to step S4 of the startup process.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the checksum calculated at step S4 (checksum at power-on) matches the checksum calculated at power-off (S6). If the data in the main RAM 303 is held without change during the period from when the power is turned off to when it is turned on, the checksum when the power is turned on matches the checksum when the power is turned off. On the other hand, if the data in the main RAM 303 changes (deteriorates) during the period from when the power is turned off to when it is turned on, the checksum when the power is turned on does not match the checksum when the power is turned off.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the checksum at power-on and the checksum at power-off coincide with each other (S6: YES), the time when the power is shut down (backup is backed up) based on each data stored in the main RAM 303. Each register is returned to the state at the time of execution (S7). By returning the state of each register, the main control board 300 returns to the state at the time when the power is shut off. When the main CPU 301 restores the state of each register (the state of the main control board 300), the main CPU 301 resumes the processing from the step at the time when the power is shut off. When the main CPU 301 returns the state of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301 transmits various information (for example, an RT type command described later) necessary to return the effect state of the gaming machine 1 to the sub control board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the main CPU 301 determines that the backup flag is not stored (S4: NO), or determines that the checksum at power-on does not match the checksum at power-off. In the case (S6: NO), a main RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the main RAM 303 is set (S8). That is, the main RAM abnormality flag is set when the backup cannot be executed or when the data in the main RAM 303 changes during the period when the power is cut off. During the period when the main RAM abnormality flag is set, the main CPU 301 notifies the abnormality of the main RAM using, for example, the main display ML. The main RAM abnormality flag is cleared, for example, when the set value changing process is normally executed.

  After setting the main RAM abnormality flag, the main CPU 301 proceeds to RAM error processing. In the RAM error processing, the progress of the game is prohibited. In the RAM error processing, the main CPU 301 may transmit a command for notifying the abnormality of the main RAM 303 to the sub control board 400, and the liquid crystal display device 30 may display a warning image, for example.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the setting change process. When the setting change process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the front door 3 is opened (S11). For example, a door sensor that outputs an OFF signal when the front door 3 is closed and outputs an ON signal when the front door 3 is opened is provided, and the front door 3 is opened according to a signal from the door sensor. A configuration in which the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is present can be employed. As described above, since the setting switch (the keyhole of the setting key) is provided inside the gaming machine 1, the setting change process is usually executed during the period when the front door 3 is opened. Therefore, when the setting change process is executed in a state where the front door 3 is closed, it is assumed that an ON signal of the setting switch and the power switch SW is input due to an illegal act. If it is determined that the front door 3 is not opened in consideration of the above circumstances (S11: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the setting switch abnormality flag to the ON state (S12), and proceeds to setting switch error processing. To do. In the setting switch error process, the progress of the game is prohibited. Further, in the setting switch error process, the main CPU 301 may transmit an error command for notifying the abnormality of the setting switch to the sub-control board 400, and the liquid crystal display device 30 may display a warning image, for example. The setting switch abnormality flag is cleared when the starting process is started again and the setting value changing process is normally executed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the front door 3 is opened (S11: YES), the main CPU 301 displays a numerical value corresponding to the set value on the setting display unit 36 (S13). Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays a numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 on the setting display unit 36.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting change button 37 has been operated (S14). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW. If it is determined that the setting change button 37 has been operated (S14: YES), the main CPU 301 increments the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 (S15), and the process proceeds to step S16. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change button 37 has not been operated (S14: NO), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S16 without incrementing the numerical value in the display setting value storage area.

  In step S16, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the start lever 24 has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an ON signal of the start switch 24SW is input. The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S13 to step S15 until it is determined that the start lever 24 has been operated (S16: NO). As understood from the above description, every time the setting change button 37 is operated and the numerical value in the display setting value storage area is added in step S15, the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is added in step S13. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (S16: YES), the main CPU 301 determines the numerical value displayed on the setting display unit 36 as a setting value (S17). Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the numerical value stored in the display setting value storage area in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a set value command indicating the set value in the command storage area (S18). After storing the set value command, the main CPU 301 ends the set value change process and proceeds to the game control process.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the game control process of the main CPU 301. The game control process is executed every time the player plays a game. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 executes an interrupt process (see FIG. 101) at a predetermined time interval (eg, 1.49 ms) during a period in which the game control process is executed. That is, the main CPU 301 alternately executes the game control process and the interrupt process at predetermined time intervals. As will be described in detail later, for example, a command (for example, a start operation command described later) transmitted to the sub control board 400 is set in the game control process and transmitted to the sub control board 400 in the interrupt process. In addition, a timer (for example, a wait timer) set in the game control process is subtracted in the interrupt process.

  When starting the game control process, the main CPU 301 executes an initial setting process (S101). The initial setting process in step S101 is executed every time one game is completed. Of the storage areas of the main RAM 303, the storage area that is initialized for each game is initialized by this processing.

  After the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 shifts the process to the automatic insertion process (S102). As a result of the previous game, when replays are aligned on the active line, the same number of betting medals as the previous game are set by the automatic insertion process.

  The main CPU 301 shifts the processing to the pre-game start processing (S103) after the automatic insertion processing. In the pre-game process, the main CPU 301 detects a medal from the medal insertion unit 8 and detects an operation of the settlement button 23. Further, the main CPU 301 detects an operation of the start lever 24 (that is, a game start operation) in the pre-game start process.

  When the main CPU 301 detects a game start operation in the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 executes a set value check process (S104). In the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 303 are appropriate. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is within the range of the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “6” in the setting value confirmation process. If the main CPU 301 determines that the setting value is not within the range of the numerical value “1” to the numerical value “6”, the main CPU 301 sets a setting value abnormality command indicating an abnormality of the setting value, and proceeds to setting value error processing. For example, when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed due to noise, a setting value error process is executed. In the set value error process, the main CPU 301 stops the game control process (prohibits the progress of the game). When the setting value error process is executed, for example, the power button 511 is turned off and then turned on again, and the main CPU 301 is caused to execute the startup process and the setting change process to set a normal setting value. Then, it returns to the state where the game is possible.

  When the main CPU 301 detects a game start operation, the main CPU 301 acquires a random value R1 and a random value R2 (S105). The random value R1 is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 304 and is used in the internal lottery process. The random number value R2 is a software random number acquired from a register built in the main CPU 301, and is used in a later-described spinning effect control process or the like. The main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number value R1 in the random number value R1 storage area of the main RAM 303. Similarly, the main CPU 301 stores the acquired random number value R2 in the random number value R2 storage area of the main RAM 303.

  The main CPU 301 executes the internal lottery process (S106) after storing the random number value R1 and the random number value R2 in the main RAM 303. In the internal lottery process, the winning area is determined based on the random value R1 generated by the random number generator 304 and the winning area lottery table (FIGS. 9 and 10).

  After executing the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 executes the spinning effect control process (S107). As described above, the main CPU 301 causes each reel 12 to execute the spinning effect. In the spinning effect control process, for example, the presence or absence of reel lock is determined using the random number R2 and the reel lock lottery table (FIG. 32).

  The main CPU 301 executes a wait process (S108) after executing the spinning effect control process. The wait process is a process for setting the time length of each game to a predetermined value or more. In the wait process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait period has elapsed. When determining that the wait period has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 does not shift from the wait process to the pre-stop process described later.

  When the wait period has elapsed, the main CPU 301 executes pre-stop processing (S109). In the pre-stop process, various types of data (priority order described later) are stored in the main RAM 303 according to the winning area determined in the internal lottery process. In the stop control process described later, each reel 12 is stopped according to each data stored in the pre-stop process, whereby the winning combination designated in the winning area is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  After executing the pre-stop process, the main CPU 301 executes the stop control process (S110). In the stop control process, each time each stop button 25 is operated, the reel 12 corresponding to the operated stop button 25 is stopped. Each reel 12 is stopped at a stop position corresponding to each data set in the pre-stop processing described above.

  When all the reels 12 are stopped by the stop control process, the main CPU 301 executes a display determination process (S111). In the display determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Further, the main CPU 301 sets various data according to the type of combination of symbols displayed on the active line. For example, when it is determined that the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 sets the re-game operating flag to the ON state. When the main CPU 301 determines that the winning winning combination is stopped on the active line, the main CPU 301 adds the number of medals according to the type of the winning winning combination to the number of credits.

  After executing the display determination process, the main CPU 301 executes the main state transition process (S112). In the main state transition process, the main CPU 301 transitions to the main state. For example, the main CPU 301 shifts the main state to the main state 1 when the AT start spinning effect is executed. When the main CPU 301 finishes the main state transition process, the process returns to step S101.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the initial setting process at the end of the game. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area for storing information necessary for one game in the storage area of the main RAM 303 (S101-1). For example, the winning area storage area storing the winning area of the previous game is initialized by the initial setting process.

  After initializing the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full (S101-2). That is, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the ON signal from the full sensor 530SE is input. When it is determined that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full (S101-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a full tank error command (S101-3), and proceeds to full tank error processing.

  In the full tank error process, the main CPU 301 notifies the full tank error using the payout number display 16. For example, during the period of executing the full tank error process, the main CPU 301 displays characters “HF” (hopper full) on the payout number display 16. In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports a full tank error with another indicator (for example, the stored number indicator 17). When the main CPU 301 determines that the auxiliary storage unit 530 is not full (S101-2: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the pre-game start process and shifts to an automatic input process.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the automatic loading process. When starting the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not replays are aligned on the active line in the previous game (S102-1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is set in the display determination process (S109) of the previous game control process. When the replay is not aligned on the active line in the previous game (S102-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the automatic insertion process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the replays are aligned on the active line in the previous game (S102-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an automatic medal insertion command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S102-2). . The medal automatic insertion command indicates that one betting medal is automatically inserted.

  After storing the medal automatic insertion command, the main CPU 301 sets an automatic insertion timer (S102-3). The automatic insertion timer is a timer for ensuring a time interval at which the automatic medal insertion command is transmitted to the sub control board 400 to a predetermined time length or more.

  When the automatic charging timer is set, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the automatic charging timer has expired (S102-4). The main CPU 301 repeats step S102-4 until it determines that the automatic charging timer has expired (S102-4: NO).

  When it is determined that the automatic insertion timer has expired (S102-4: YES), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the betting number counter (S102-5). The betting number counter indicates the number of betting medals for the current game. Further, the main CPU 301 generates BET lamp display data indicating the display mode of the BET lamp 14 (14a, 14b, 14c) according to the value of the betting number counter (S102-6). Specifically, when the betting number counter is a numerical value “1”, BET lamp display data for lighting one lamp 14 a out of the BET lamps 14 is generated. Similarly, when the betting number counter is “2”, BET lamp display data for turning on one lamp 14a and two lamps 14b among the BET lamps 14 is generated, and when the betting number counter is “3”. Generates BET lamp display data for lighting one lamp 14a, two lamps 14b, and three lamps 14c among the BET lamps 14. BET lamp display data is stored in a lamp-related data storage area of the main RAM 303.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the bet number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7). The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S102-2 to step S102-6 until it is determined that the value of the betting number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7: NO). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the betting number counter matches the bet medal of the previous game (S102-7: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the automatic insertion process. As understood from the above description, when the replay is aligned on the active line as a result of the previous game, the same bet medal as the bet medal of the previous game is set in the current game.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart of pre-game start processing. When the main CPU 301 starts the pre-game start process, the main CPU 301 sets a prescribed number with reference to the game state flag in the game state storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-1). In the present embodiment, the prescribed number in the bonus gaming state is a numerical value “2”, and the prescribed number other than in the bonus gaming state (RT gaming state) is the numerical value “3”.

  After setting the specified number according to the gaming state, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the inserted medal acceptance process (S103-2). In the inserted medal acceptance process, the main CPU 301 accepts a medal from the medal insertion unit 8. Further, when the main CPU 301 receives a medal from the medal insertion unit 8, the main CPU 301 adds a bet number counter or a credit number.

  After executing the inserted medal acceptance process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the BET operation acceptance process (S103-3). The main CPU 301 receives the player's operation of the 1BET button 21 or the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 in the BET operation reception process.

  After executing the BET operation reception process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the settlement operation reception process (S103-4). The main CPU 301 receives the player's operation of the payment button 23 in the payment operation reception process.

  The main CPU 301 executes a demonstration display command transmission process (S103-5) after executing the settlement operation acceptance process. In the demonstration display command transmission process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a period (non-game period) during which no game operation (insertion of medals or operation of the start lever 24) is accepted is longer than a predetermined time length. If it is determined that the time is longer than the time length, a demonstration display command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400. The demonstration display command is a command for causing the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like to execute a demonstration.

  After executing the demonstration display command transmission process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the betting number counter is the specified number (S103-6). In the above-described automatic insertion process in step S102, inserted medal reception process in step S103-2, or BET operation reception process in step S103-3, when the betting number counter is added up to the specified number, the main CPU 301 displays the betting number counter. Is the prescribed number (S103-6: YES), the process proceeds to step S103-7.

  In step S103-7, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the start lever 24 has been operated by the player. When determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (S103-7: YES), the main CPU 301 stores a start operation command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-8). When the start operation command is stored, the main CPU 301 ends the pre-game process and proceeds to a set value confirmation process (S104).

  On the other hand, if the betting number counter has not reached the specified number (S103-6: NO) or the start lever has not been operated (S103-7: NO), the inserted medal acceptance process (S103-2) is performed. Each process including the BET operation reception process (S103-3) and the settlement operation reception process (S103-4) is repeatedly executed. That is, the main CPU 301 waits until a game start operation is performed in a state where the medal insertion operation from the medal insertion unit 8, the operation of the MAX-BET button 22, and the operation of the 1BET button 21 can be accepted.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart of inserted medal acceptance processing. When the inserted medal acceptance process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion disabled flag is in an ON state (S103-2-1). The insertion impossible flag is set to an ON state in S103-2-8, which will be described later, when the betting number counter is the upper limit value and the credit amount is the upper limit value. When the main CPU 301 determines that the insertion impossible flag is in the ON state (S103-2-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the insertion medal acceptance process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301 determines that the insertion impossible flag is not in the ON state (S103-2-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 (S103-2-2). .

  Specifically, as described above, a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 is detected by a signal from the medal sensor 34SE. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 reads a signal from the medal sensor 34SE in an input port reading process of an interrupt process periodically executed, and detects a medal in the main RAM 303 according to the signal from the medal sensor 34SE. Set the flag to the ON state. In step S103-2-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal detection flag is in an ON state.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that a medal has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 (S103-2-2: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted in the command storage area (S103-2-3). ). Further, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the betting number counter is a prescribed number of three (S103-2-4). When the bet number counter is not the prescribed number (S103-2-4: NO), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the bet number counter (S103-2-5), and ends the inserted medal acceptance process. On the other hand, when the betting number counter is the prescribed number of three (S103-2-4: YES), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the number of credits (S103-2-6).

  After adding the number of credits, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of credits matches the upper limit “50” (S103-2-7). When the number of credits is “50” (S103-2-7: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the medal insertion disabled flag to the ON state (S103-2-8), and ends the inserted medal acceptance process. On the other hand, when the number of credits is not “50” (S103-2-7: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the inserted medal acceptance process without setting the medal insertion disabled flag to the ON state. During the period when the medal insertion disable flag is set to the ON state, the main CPU 301 controls the selector 34 so that the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 is guided to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1 during the period when the medal insertion disable flag is ON.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the BET operation acceptance process. In the BET operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of credits is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-1). When the number of credits is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process.

  When the number of credits is not “0” (S103-3-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the 1BET button 21 has been operated (S103-3-2). When it is determined that the 1BET button 21 has been operated (S103-3-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a numerical value “1” in the insertion request counter (S103-3-3). In step S103-3-3, the main CPU 301 stores a 1BET operation command for notifying the operation of the 1BET button 21 in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. On the other hand, when determining that the 1BET button 21 has not been operated (S103-3-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated (S103-3-4). ). When determining that the MAX-BET button 22 has been operated (S103-3-4: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a numerical value “3” in the insertion request counter (S103-3-5). In step S103-3-5, the main CPU 301 stores a MAX-BET operation command for notifying the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. When determining that the MAX-BET button 22 has not been operated (S103-3-4: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process. In this embodiment, the automatic medal insertion command, medal insertion command, 1 BET operation command, and MAX-BET operation command are collectively referred to as insertion-related commands.

  In step S103-3-3 or step S103-3-5, when a predetermined numerical value is set in the input request counter, the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S103-3-6. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the numerical value set in the input request counter (S103-3-6). When “1” is subtracted from the insertion request counter, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the credit counter (S103-3-7), and adds “1” to the betting number counter (S103-3-8). After adding “1” to the betting number counter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the betting number counter matches the specified number (S103-3-9). When the bet number counter matches the specified number (S103-3-9: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process. On the other hand, when the betting number counter does not match the specified number (S103-3-9: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the insertion request counter is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-10). . When the insertion request counter is a numerical value “0” (S103-3-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process. On the other hand, when the insertion request counter is not the numerical value “0” (S103-3-10: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of credits is “0” (S103-3-11). When the number of credits is “0” (S103-3-11: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the BET operation acceptance process, and when the credit counter is not “0” (S103-3-11: NO). The process returns to step S103-3-6.

  As understood from the above description, the main CPU 301 receives an operation of the 1BET button 21 (S103-3-2: YES), and receives an operation of the MAX-BET button 22 (S103-3-). 4: YES) when the betting number counter reaches the specified number (S103-3-9: YES), when the insertion request counter is decremented to “0” (S103-3-10: YES), or Until the number of credits becomes “0” (S103-3-11: YES), the process of step S103-3-8 is repeatedly executed to increment the bet number counter.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the settlement operation acceptance process. In the settlement operation acceptance process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the settlement button 23 has been operated by the player (S103-4-1). When it is determined that the settlement button 23 has been operated (S103-4-1: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a settlement medal in the payout request counter (S103-4-2). The settlement medal is the sum of the betting number counter and the credit amount at the time when the settlement button 23 is operated. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a settlement operation command indicating the operation of the settlement button 23 in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-4-3), and sets the medal insertion disable flag to an OFF state (S103-4-4). ).

  When it is determined that the settlement button 23 has not been operated (S103-4-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the settlement operation acceptance process. As will be described in detail later, in the hopper driving process, medals of the number of payout request counters are discharged from the hopper 520 to the tray unit 7 through the medal payout opening 9.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the demo display command transmission process. When the demonstration display command transmission process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the betting number counter is greater than or equal to a numerical value “1” (S103-5-1). When determining that the betting number counter is greater than or equal to the numerical value “1” (S103-5-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the demonstration display command transmission process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the betting number counter is not greater than or equal to the numerical value “1” (S103-5-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the non-game time counter has timed up (S103-5). -2). The non-game time counter is timed up when a period during which a player's operation (medal insertion operation, game start operation, etc.) is not accepted becomes longer than a predetermined time length (for example, 1 minute). Specifically, the non-game time counter starts counting when the pre-game start process is started, and is initialized every time the main CPU 301 transmits any command to the sub-control board 400. For example, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 8 and a insertion command is transmitted, the main CPU 301 initializes a non-game time counter.

  When it is determined that the non-game time counter has timed up (S103-5-2: YES), the main CPU 301 stores a demonstration display command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S103-3), and then the demonstration display command. The transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the non-game time counter has not timed up (S103-5-2: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the demo display command transmission process without storing the demo display command. The demonstration display command may be stored at the end of the settlement operation acceptance process.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the internal lottery process. When starting the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 sets a winning area lottery table (FIGS. 9 and 10) according to the RT gaming state (S106-1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a winning area lottery table in accordance with the RT flag indicating the RT gaming state type stored in the RT gaming state storage area of the main RAM 303.

  In the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 acquires the random value R1 stored in the random value R1 storage area (S106-2). In step 105, the random value R1 is stored in the random value R1 storage area. Further, the main CPU 301 sets the winning area offset value to the initial value “00” (S106-3). The winning area offset value designates each winning area. The winning area offset value is updated sequentially, and a different winning area is designated each time it is updated. For example, the winning area offset value is a numerical value “00” and designates a winning area of “batting order replay X1”.

  The main CPU 301 acquires the lottery value of the winning area designated by the winning area offset value (S106-4). For example, when the winning area lottery table in the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 9 is set, if the winning area offset value is “00”, the lottery value “8978” is acquired.

  The main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired in step S106-4 from the random value R1 acquired in step S106-1 (S106-5). Further, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R1 is a negative number (S106-6). For example, in a game in the RT0 gaming state, when a random value R1 smaller than the numerical value “8978” is acquired, the result of subtracting the lottery value “8978” of the winning area “00” from the random value R1 is a negative number. On the other hand, when the random value R1 larger than the numerical value “8978” is acquired, the result of subtracting the lottery value in the winning area “00” from the random value R1 does not become a negative number.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that the subtraction result is not a negative number (S106-6: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all winning areas (winning areas “00” to “23”) are designated by the winning area offset value. (S106-7). When all the winning areas have not been designated (S106-7: NO), the main CPU 301 updates the winning area offset value (adds a numerical value “1”) (S106-8), and the process proceeds to step S106-4. return. In step S106-4, the lottery value of the winning area designated by the updated winning area offset value is acquired, and in step S106-5, the lottery value is subtracted from the previous subtraction result. The processing from step S106-4 to step S106-8 is repeated until it is determined that the calculation result is a negative number (S106-6: YES) or all winning areas are designated (S106-7: YES). .

  When it is determined that the calculation result is a negative number or when all the winning areas are designated, the main CPU 301 executes a data storage process (S106-9). Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the current winning area offset value in the winning area storage area of the main RAM 303. For example, if the winning area offset value with a negative subtraction result is “12”, the numerical value “12” is stored in the winning area storage area. Further, the main CPU 301 stores a winning area command indicating the winning area in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 in the data storing process. In the data storage process, the main CPU 301 stores an RT type command indicating an RT flag stored in the RT gaming state storage area in the command storage area. When the data storage process ends, the main CPU 301 ends the internal lottery process.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the spinning effect control process. When the main CPU 301 starts the spinning effect control process, the main CPU 301 executes a transition operation lottery process (S107-1). The main CPU 301 determines any one of the order 1 to the order 3 in the transfer operation lottery process. Specifically, in the transfer operation lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the batting order replay (X1, X2, Y1, Y2) has been won. When determining that the batting order replay is not won, the main CPU 301 ends the transfer operation lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the batting order replay is won, the main CPU 301 determines any one of the order 1 to the order 3 with reference to the transition operation lottery table (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the type of the batting order replay. . Specifically, when it is determined that the batting order replay X1 or the batting order replay Y1 has been won, the main CPU 301 uses the first transition operation lottery table (part (a) in FIG. 16) to select any one of the order 1 to the order 3. Is determined. When it is determined that the batting order replay X2 or batting order replay Y2 is won, the main CPU 301 determines one of the order 1 to the order 3 using the second transition operation lottery table (part (b) of FIG. 16). The The main CPU 301 stores the determined order in the order storage area. The order storage area is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 301 shifts the main state in the main state transition process (S112) using the order determined in the transition operation lottery process.

  After executing the transition operation lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect counter is a numerical value “1” (S107-2). As described later, the spinning effect counter is set in the main state transition process or the like. When the main CPU 301 determines that the rotation effect counter is a numerical value “1” (S107-2: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to AT start rotation effect processing (S107-3). In the AT start spinning effect process, the main CPU 301 executes the AT start spinning effect. After executing the AT start spinning effect process, the main CPU 301 ends the spinning effect control process.

  When determining that the rotation effect counter is not the numerical value “1” (S107-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect counter is the numerical value “2” (S107-4). When the main CPU 301 determines that the rotation effect counter is a numerical value “2” (S107-4: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the SP start rotation effect process (S107-5). In the SP start spinning effect process, the main CPU 301 executes the SP start spinning effect. After executing the SP start spinning effect process, the main CPU 301 ends the spinning effect control process.

  When determining that the rotation effect counter is not the numerical value “2” (S107-4: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether the rotation effect counter is the numerical value “3” (S107-6). When the main CPU 301 determines that the rotation effect counter is a numerical value “3” (S107-6: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the red seven rotation effect processing (S107-7). In the red seven-rotation effect process, the main CPU 301 executes the red seven-rotation effect or the SP end rotation effect. After executing the red seven-turn effect processing, the main CPU 301 ends the turn effect control processing. In the present embodiment, the red seven-rotor effect and the SP end-rotor effect are executed in the red seven-rotor effect process. You may provide separately the process which performs.

  When determining that the rotation effect counter is not the numerical value “3” (S107-6: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect counter is the numerical value “4” (S107-8). When the main CPU 301 determines that the rotation effect counter is a numerical value “4” (S107-8: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the black and white seven rotation effect processing (S107-9). In the monochrome seven-rotation effect process, the main CPU 301 executes the monochrome seven-rotation effect. After executing the black and white seven-rotor effect process, the main CPU 301 ends the rotate effect control process. Note that the spinning effect counter is initialized to a numerical value “0” after each spinning effect is executed.

  When it is determined that the rotation effect counter is not the numerical value “4” (S107-8: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the main state 2 (S107-10). When the main CPU 301 determines that the current state is the main state 2 (S107-10: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the red seven-rotor effect lottery process (S107-11). In the red seven-rotor effect lottery process, the main CPU 301 uses the random number R2 and the red seven-rotor effect effect lottery table (part (a) in FIG. 21) to determine whether or not the red seven-rotor effect is executed, and red Determines the type of the seven-cylinder production (red seven-matched pattern, red seven-off pattern). When execution of the red seven-rotor effect is determined, the main CPU 301 turns on the red seven-rotor effect reservation flag.

  In addition, when the main CPU 301 determines to execute the red seven-match pattern in the red seven-rotation effect lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines a line on which the red seven-match is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines a line on which the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed using the random number value R2 and the red seven line lottery table (part (b) in FIG. 21).

  When determining that the current state is not the main state 2 (S107-10: NO), the main CPU 301 executes a reel lock lottery process (S107-12). In the reel lock lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines one of the reel locks according to the winning area. Specifically, in the reel lock lottery process, the main CPU 301 first determines whether or not the winning area of the current game is a “common bell”. When determining that the winning area is “common bell”, the main CPU 301 sets the reel lock lottery table A. On the other hand, when determining that it is not the “common bell”, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning area of the current game is a “weak rare role” (such as a weak cherry). When the main CPU 301 determines that the winning area is a “weak rare role”, the main CPU 301 sets the reel lock lottery table B. If it is determined that the winning area of this game is not a “weak rare role”, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is a “strong rare role” (strong cherry, etc.). If it is determined that there is, the reel lock lottery table C is set. If the main CPU 301 determines that the winning area of this game is not a “strong rare role”, the main CPU 301 determines whether the winning area is a “determined role” (the strongest etc.), If it is determined that the reel lock lottery table D is set.

  When the winning area is not any of “common bell”, “weak rare role”, “strong rare role”, and “determined role”, “no lock” is determined as the reel lock of this game. On the other hand, when the winning area is one of “common bell”, “weak rare role”, “strong rare role”, and “determined role”, the main CPU 301 uses the set reel lock lottery table and the random number value R2, The type of reel lock in this game is determined from “no lock”, “short lock”, “middle lock”, and “long lock”. The main CPU 301 stores the determined reel lock type in the rotation effect number storage area of the main RAM 303 and ends the rotation effect control process.

  Part (a) of FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the AT start spinning effect process. When the AT start spinning effect process is started, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game start process (S107-3-1). The main CPU 301 accepts an operation of the start lever 24 for starting the pseudo game at the start of the pseudo game.

  When receiving the pseudo game start operation, the main CPU 301 executes AT start line determination processing (S107-3-2). In the AT start line determination process, the main CPU 301 determines a line on which the red seven match is stopped and displayed in the AT start spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines any of the middle line, the lower line, the upper line, the upper right line, and the lower right line using the AT start line determination table (FIG. 18) and the random value R2. The main CPU 301 stores the determined line in the red seven line storage area of the main RAM 303 (S107-3-3). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 shifts to a pseudo game control process (S107-3-4) for accepting a pseudo stop operation, executes the pseudo game control process, and then ends the AT start spinning effect process.

  Part (b) of FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the pseudo game start process. The pseudo game start process is executed in the AT start spinning effect process, and is also executed in the SP start spinning effect process, the red seven times effect process, and the black and white seven times effect process, as will be described later.

  The main CPU 301 sets a specified time (20 seconds) in the pseudo game start process (Sa1). After that, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the start lever 24 has been operated (Sa2), and when determining that the start lever 24 has been operated (Sa2: YES), stores the pseudo game start command in the command storage area ( Sa4), the pseudo game start process is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the start lever 24 is not operated (Sa2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the specified time set in step Sa1 has elapsed (Sa3). When it is determined that the specified time has not elapsed (Sa3: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats step Sa2 and step Sa3. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specified time has elapsed (Sa3: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the pseudo game start command in the command storage area (Sa4), and ends the pseudo game start process. That is, the pseudo game is started when the start lever 24 is operated or a specified time elapses.

  Part (c) of FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the pseudo game control process. Similar to the pseudo game start process, the pseudo game control process is executed in the AT start roll effect process, and as described later, the SP start roll effect process, the red seven roll effect process, and the black and white seven roll effect It is also executed in processing.

  When starting the pseudo game control process, the main CPU 301 sets a specified time (20 seconds) (Sb1), and rotates each reel 12 at a speed substantially equal to the steady rotation (Sb2). After starting the rotation of each reel 12, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a specified time has elapsed (Sb3). When it is determined that the specified time has elapsed (Sb3: YES), the main CPU 301 stops all the reels 12 that are rotating by the automatic stop process (Sb7). On the other hand, when determining that the specified time has not elapsed (Sb3: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 has been subjected to a pseudo stop operation (Sb4). . When it is determined that the stop button 25 has not been pseudo-stopped (Sb4: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats Step Sb3 and Step Sb4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 has been pseudo-stopped (Sb4: YES), the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the reel 12 (Sb5).

  After stopping the reels 12, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all the reels 12 have been subjected to a pseudo stop operation (Sb6). When determining that all the reels 12 have not been subjected to the pseudo stop operation (Sb6: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step Sb3 to step Sb5.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels 12 have been subjected to a pseudo stop operation (Sb6: YES), the main CPU 301 stores a pseudo game result command indicating a combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the current pseudo game in the command storage area. (Sb8). After storing the pseudo game result command, the main CPU 301 executes notification wait processing (Sb9), and ends the pseudo game control processing. In the period of the notification weight process, the sub CPU 412 notifies, for example, the transition of the sub state or the number of times that the pseudo game is added this time. Specifically, the transition to the AT state is notified during the period of the notice weight process of the AT start spinning effect process. Further, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-rotor effect, the number of extras is notified during the period of the notification weight process. In addition, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, during the period of the notification weight process, the number of extras and the shift to the combo drum effect are informed. Similarly, during the period of the notification weight process of the combo drum effect, the number of additional games of the current pseudo game is notified.

  Part (a) of FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the SP start spinning effect process. In the SP start spinning effect, the main CPU 301 first executes a pseudo game start process (S107-5-1). That is, a pseudo game start operation is accepted. When the pseudo game is started, the main CPU 301 determines an SP uniform pattern by lottery (S107-5-2). Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the SP aligned pattern A with a probability of about ¾, and determines the SP aligned pattern B with a probability of about ¼ (see FIG. 19).

  When the SP uniform pattern is determined, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game control process (S107-5-3) according to the SP uniform pattern. In step S107-5-2, when the SP uniform pattern A is determined, in the pseudo game control process of step S107-5-3, when each stop button 25 is pseudo-stopped, the SP symbol pattern becomes the middle line. Stopped display. On the other hand, in the case where the SP uniform pattern B is determined in step S107-5-2, in the pseudo game control process in step S107-5-3, if each stop button 25 is pseudo-stopped, a red seven-off will occur. Stopped display.

  After the pseudo game control process of step S107-5-3 is executed, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the SP uniform pattern A is determined (S107-5-4), and the SP uniform pattern A is determined. If it is determined (S107-5-4: YES), the SP start spinning effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SP uniform pattern A has not been determined (S107-5-4: NO), the main CPU 301 again performs the pseudo game start process (S107-5-5) and the pseudo game control process (S107-). 5-6) are executed. In the pseudo game control process, when each reel 12 is pseudo-stopped, the SP symbol alignment is stopped and displayed on the middle line. As described above, when the SP uniform pattern B is determined, two pseudo games are executed, and the SP symbol uniform is stopped and displayed on the middle line in the second pseudo game.

  Part (b) of FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the red seven-rotor effect processing that is executed when the red seven-rotor effect is determined in the main state 2 (SP state). Whether or not to execute the red seven-rotor effect is determined in the red seven-rotor effect lottery process. When the red seven-rotor effect process is started, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game start process (S107-7-1). When the main CPU 301 accepts the pseudo game start operation, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the red-seven uniform pattern (see FIG. 20) has been determined in the red-seven-rotation effect lottery process (S107-7-2). When the red seven uniform pattern is determined (S107-7-2: YES), the main CPU 301 executes a red seven line lottery process (S107-7-3).

  In the red seven line lottery process, the main CPU 301 uses the red seven line lottery table (part (b) in FIG. 21) and the random number value R2 to determine the line on which the red seven match is displayed. Further, the main CPU 301 stores the line on which the red seven match is stopped and displayed in the main RAM 303 (S107-7-4), and proceeds to the pseudo game control process (S107-7-5). On the other hand, when the red seven-off pattern is determined (S107-7-2: NO), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the pseudo game control process without executing steps S107-7-3 and S107-7-4. To do.

  In the pseudo game control process of the red seven-rotor effect process, when all reels 12 are pseudo-stopped, in the case of a red seven-match pattern, the red seven-match is stopped at the line determined in step S107-7-3. Is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the red seven-off pattern, the red seven-off is stopped and displayed. After the stop display of red seven uniform or red seven off is performed, the main CPU 301 ends the red seven-rotor effect processing.

  Part (c) of FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the black and white seven-rotor effect processing that is executed when the black and white seven-rotor effect is determined in the main state 1 (in the standby state). When the black and white seven-rotor effect process is started, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game start process (S107-9-1) and accepts a pseudo game start operation. Further, when the pseudo game is started, the main CPU 301 executes a black and white seven stop pattern determination process (S107-9-2). In the black and white seven stop pattern determination process, the main CPU 301 uses the black and white seven lottery table (part (a) in FIG. 24) and the random number value R2 to select a control pattern of either the black seven uniform pattern or the white seven uniform pattern. decide.

  After determining the control pattern, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game control process (S107-9-3). In the pseudo game control process, the black seven according to the control pattern determined in step S107-9-2 and the order of the pseudo stop operation defined by the black and white seven stop pattern table (part (b) of FIG. 24). Stops the alignment or white seven alignment. For example, it is assumed that the black seven-match pattern X is determined as the control pattern. In the above case, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle, right, the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed on the middle line.

  When the pseudo game control process of S107-9-3 is completed, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the present pseudo game (black and white seven-rotor effect) (the white seven uniform pattern is determined as the control pattern). Whether or not) has been determined (S107-9-4). When it is determined that the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed (S107-9-4: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the combo cylinder effect processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the white seven uniform is not stopped and displayed (S107-9-4: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the monochrome seven-rotor effect processing without executing the combo-rotor effect processing.

  Part (a) of FIG. 88 is a flowchart of combo-rotor effect processing. When the combo spinning effect production process is started, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game start process (S113-1). When the main CPU 301 receives a pseudo game start operation, the main CPU 301 executes a black seven availability lottery process (S113-2). In the black seven allowance lottery process, the control pattern of the black seven align pattern X, the black seven align pattern Y, or the black seven outlier pattern using the black seven enable / disable lottery table (part (a) in FIG. 27) and the random value R2. To decide. The probability that the black seven-aligned pattern (X, Y) is determined is about ½.

  After the black and white seven availability lottery process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to a pseudo game control process (S113-3). In the pseudo game control process, each reel 12 is stopped according to the control pattern determined in the black seven availability determination process. Specifically, when the black seven-aligned pattern is determined in the black seven availability lottery process, when all the reels 12 are pseudo-stopped, the black seven-aligned is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the black seven off pattern is determined in the black seven availability lottery process, the black seven off is stopped and displayed.

  When the pseudo game control process of S113-3 is completed, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the current pseudo game (S113-4). When it is determined that the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed (S113-4: NO), the main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the first failure counter (S113-5). The first failure counter stores the number of times of black seven out of display in the first stage (see FIG. 25) of the combo drum effect, and is provided in the main RAM 303, for example.

  After adding the first failure counter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the first failure counter is greater than or equal to a numerical value “3” (S113-6). When it is determined that the first failure counter is smaller than the numerical value “3” (S113-6: NO), the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S113-1, and repeats the pseudo game. On the other hand, when determining that the first failure counter is greater than or equal to the numerical value “3” (S113-6: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the combo spinning effect. That is, in the three pseudo games of the first stage, when the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed, the combo spinning effect ends.

  In step S113-4, when it is determined that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed (S113-4: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the second stage pseudo game start process (S113-7). Also in each process of the second stage, as in the first stage, when a pseudo game start operation is accepted, the black seven allowance lottery process (S113-8) is executed and determined by the black seven allowance lottery process. According to the control pattern, the black seven match or black seven off is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game control process (S113-9). Further, it is determined whether or not the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed as a result of the pseudo game (S113-10).

  In the second stage, when the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed (S113-10: NO), the numerical value “1” is added to the second failure counter (S113-11). Further, after adding the second failure counter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the second failure counter is greater than or equal to a numerical value “2” (S113-12). When determining that the second failure counter is smaller than the numerical value “2” (S113-12: NO), the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S113-7 and repeats the pseudo game. On the other hand, when determining that the second failure counter is greater than or equal to the numerical value “2” (S113-12: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the rush spinning effect. That is, in the second pseudo game of the second stage, when the black seven uniform is not stopped and displayed, the combo spinning effect ends.

  In the second stage, when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the second stage (S113-10: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the third stage pseudo game start process (S113-13). Also in each process of the third stage, as in the first stage and the second stage, the pseudo game start operation is accepted, the black seven possibility lottery process (S113-14) is executed, and determined by the black seven possibility lottery process In accordance with the control pattern thus made, the black game uniform process or the black seven off is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game control process (S113-15). Further, it is determined whether or not the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed as a result of the pseudo game (S113-16).

  In the third stage, when it is determined that the black seven match is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game (S113-16: NO), the combo drum effect ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed (S113-16: YES), the main CPU 301 executes a white seven continuation rate lottery process (S113-17). In the white seven continuation rate lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines the white seven continuation rate using the random number R2 and the white seven continuation rate lottery table (part (a) of FIG. 31). When the white seven continuation rate is determined, the main CPU 301 shifts to a rush spinning effect.

  Part (b) of FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the rush rotator effect process. When the rush crotch effect process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the start lever 24 is operated (S114-1). When it is determined that the start lever 24 is not operated (S114-1: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S114-1.

  When it is determined that the start lever 24 has been operated (S114-1: YES), the main CPU 301 executes an initial stock lottery process (S114-2). In the initial stock lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines the initial value of the rush stock counter using the random number value R2 and the initial stock lottery table (part (c) in FIG. 31). The main CPU 301 stores the determined initial value in the rush stock counter.

  Further, when the start lever 24 is operated, the main CPU 301 executes a stock continuation rate lottery process (S114-3). In the stock continuation rate lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines the stock continuation rate using the random number R2 and the stock continuation rate lottery table (part (d) in FIG. 31).

  After executing the stock continuation rate lottery process, the main CPU 301 executes a rush start position lottery process (S114-4). In the rush start position lottery process, the main CPU 301 uses the random value R2 and the rush start position lottery table (part (b) in FIG. 31) to select the first seven-match type (white seven-match, black 7). Further, the main CPU 301 reversely rotates each reel 12 at a speed slower than the normal rotation, and then switches the rotation direction to rotate each reel 12 at the normal rotation speed and stops at the determined rush start position. .

  After the rush start position lottery process, the main CPU 301 rushes each reel 12 (see FIG. 28). In the rush fluctuation, the main CPU 301 executes the rush fluctuation lottery process (S114-5) every time the seven-match is stopped and displayed. In the rush fluctuation lottery process, the main CPU 301 displays a rush fluctuation lottery table (part (e) in FIG. 31) according to the type of the stopped seven uniform (stop position of each reel 12) and the value of the rush stock counter. refer. Further, the main CPU 301 uses the rush fluctuation lottery table and the random value R2 to determine either the white seven stop change (A to C) or the black seven stop change (A to C). The main CPU 301 fluctuates each reel 12 according to the determined variation pattern, and stops and displays the seven alignment on each reel 12 (S114-6). Note that the main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating the type of seven-equity stopped and displayed in step S <b> 114-6 to the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 determines the additional number according to the command.

  In the rush fluctuation, the main CPU 301 executes a stock continuation lottery process (S114-7). In the stock continuation lottery process, continuation is won at the stock continuation rate PR (PRL = 50%, PRM = 66%, PRH = 75%) determined in step S114-5. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the continuation is won in the stock continuation lottery process (S114-8), and if it is determined that the continuation is won (S114-8: YES), the process returns to step S114-5.

  On the other hand, when the stock continuation lottery process determines that the continuation is not successful (S114-8: NO), the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the rush stock counter (S114-9), and the rush stock counter displays the numerical value. It is determined whether or not it is “0” (S114-10). When the main CPU 301 determines that the rush stock counter is a numerical value “0” (S114-10: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S114-11. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rush stock counter is not the numerical value “0” (S114-10: NO), the process returns to step S114-5.

  As understood from the above description, the main CPU 301 repeats steps S114-5 to S114-10 until the rush stock counter is subtracted to the numerical value “0”. In other words, until the rush stock counter reaches the numerical value “0”, the seven-alignment is repeatedly stopped and displayed (S114-6 is repeated). On the other hand, when the rush stock counter is subtracted to the numerical value “0”, the rush fluctuation ends.

  When the rush change ends, the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game start process (S114-11) and accepts a pseudo game start operation. When the main CPU 301 accepts a pseudo game start operation, the main CPU 301 executes a white seven continuous lottery process (S114-12). In the white seven continuation lottery process, the continuation is won with the white seven continuation rate PW (PWL = 34%, PWM = 50%, PWH = 64%) determined in step S113-17. When the main CPU 301 wins the continuation in the white seven continuous lottery process, when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the subsequent pseudo game control process (S114-13), the main CPU 301 stops and displays the white seven match. On the other hand, in the case of non-winning in the white seven continuous lottery process, in the pseudo game control process, the white seven miss is stopped and displayed.

  After executing the pseudo game control process of S114-13, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the white seven match is stopped (S114-14), and determines that the white seven match is stopped (S114-). 14: YES), the process is returned to step S114-1. That is, in the pseudo game after the rush fluctuation is finished, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, the rush fluctuation is executed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the white seven uniform is not stopped and displayed (S114-14: NO), the rush crotch effect process is terminated.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart of wait processing. The main CPU 301 executes the wait process until the execution period of the spinning effect or the wait period for making the unit game time length equal to or longer than a predetermined length elapses.

  When the wait process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect number in the rotation effect number storage area is “0” (S108-1). That is, it is determined whether or not “no effect” is determined in the reel lock lottery process (S107-10 in FIG. 85). When the rotation effect number is “0” (S108-1: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait timer is a numerical value “0” (S108-2). The wait timer is decremented every time an interrupt process is executed. When determining that the wait timer has not timed up (wait timer ≠ 0), the main CPU 301 repeats step S108-2 (S108-2: NO).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait timer has timed up (S108-2: YES), the main CPU 301 newly sets the wait timer to an initial value (about 4200 ms) (S108-3). Further, the main CPU 301 stores a reel start command indicating that each reel 12 has started in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S108-4), starts rotation of each reel 12, and ends the wait process.

  If the main CPU 301 determines in step S108-1 that the rotation effect number is other than “0”, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect number is “1” indicating a short lock effect (S108-). 5). When it is determined that the rotation effect number is “1” (S108-5: YES), the main CPU 301 sets a short lock period (1000 sm) in the rotation effect timer (S108-6).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation effect number is not “1” (S108-5: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect number is a number “2” indicating the middle lock effect. (S108-7). When determining that the rotation effect number is “2” (S108-7: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the middle lock period (2000 sm) in the rotation effect timer (S108-8).

  When it is determined that the rotation effect number is not “2” (S108-7: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the long lock period (5000 sm) in the rotation effect timer (S108-10).

  When the main CPU 301 sets the rotation effect timer in steps S108-6, S108-8, and S108-9, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the rotation effect timer has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S108-10). . The rotation effect timer is decremented every time the interruption process is executed. When the main CPU 301 repeats step S108-12 until the spinning effect timer expires (that is, until the reel lock is finished) (S108-10: NO), the main CPU 301 determines that the spinning effect timer has expired ( S108-10: YES), the process proceeds to step S108-2.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart of pre-stop processing. When starting the pre-stop process, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value in the acceleration wait timer (S109-1). The initial value of the acceleration weight timer is set to the length of time required for each reel 12 to accelerate to steady rotation after starting. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the acceleration wait timer has expired (S109-2). The main CPU 301 repeats step S109-2 until the acceleration wait timer expires (S109-2: NO). When the acceleration wait timer expires (S109-2: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts the process to step S109-3. To do.

  In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “3” in the non-stop operation counter indicating the number of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R) that have not been stopped. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a display combination storage area setting process (S109-4). As described above, each displayable bit in the display combination storing area corresponds to each winning combination, and is a numerical value “1” when there is a possibility that the corresponding winning combination stops on the active line. Accordingly, in step S109-4 in which all the reels 12 are rotating, since all the winning combinations can be stopped on the active line, all the bits in the display combination storing area are set to the numerical value “1”.

  After the display combination storage area setting process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the priority order storage process (S109-5). FIG. 91 is a conceptual diagram of a plurality of priority storage areas P (PL, PC, PR) set in the priority storage process. As shown in FIG. 91, the priority storage area P includes a left reel priority storage area PL corresponding to the reel 12L, a middle reel priority storage area PC corresponding to the reel 12C, and a right reel priority corresponding to the reel 12R. And a rank storage area PR. Each priority storage area P is divided into a plurality (21) of areas Q. Each area Q corresponds to each symbol position (unit area U) of the reel 12.

  When the priority order storing process is executed, the priority order of the symbols of the area Q is stored in each area Q. For example, the priority “HFF” is stored in the area Q in which a winning combination that has not been won is displayed when the active line is stopped. In addition, the priority “00” is stored in the area Q of the symbol that can be stopped on the active line, and the numerical value “H01” is stored in the area Q of the symbol constituting the winning combination.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the priority order storage process. When starting the priority order storing process, the main CPU 301 stores the non-stop operation counter as the number of searches (S109-5-1). Further, the main CPU 301 determines one reel 12 among the reels 12 that have not been stopped yet as a target reel (S109-5-2).

  The main CPU 301 executes a priority table selection process (S109-5-3). The priority table defines the priority of each winning combination, and one of the plurality of priority tables is selected. For example, a game in which the winning area “batting order bell A1” (the correct pressing order is middle left and right) is assumed. In the above case, when all the reels 12 are not stopped, the main CPU 301 refers to the priority order table of the batting order bell A1 and prioritizes the symbol of “illegal dismissal 1” in the left reel priority order storage area PL. The priority order is stored so that the priority order of the symbol “illegal answer C” is the highest in the right reel priority order storage area PR. Therefore, in the game where the hitting bell A1 is won, the “correct bell” is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the case of the first left stop or the first right stop. On the other hand, in a state where all the reels 12 are not stopped, in the middle reel priority order storage area PC, the priority order of the symbols “illegal answer C” and “correct answer bell” (both “bell”) is the highest. Therefore, in the middle first stop, “illegal answer C” and “correct answer bell” can be stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reel 12C. When the reel 12C is first stopped, the main CPU 301 refers to the priority order table of the batting order bell A1 and sets the left reel priority order storage area PL so that the priority order of the “correct answer bell” symbol becomes the highest. change. Therefore, in the case of the second left stop, the “correct answer bell” can be stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reel 12L. On the other hand, when the reel 12C is first stopped, the right reel priority order storage area PR is changed so that the priority order of the symbol “illegal answer C” becomes the highest. Therefore, in the case of the second stop on the right, “illegal answer C” is stopped and displayed on the active line, and “correct bell” cannot be stopped and displayed. When the reel 12C is operated for the first stop and the reel 12L is operated for the second stop (when the correct answer bell is tempered), the main CPU 301 refers to the priority order table of the batting order bell A1 and sets the “correct answer bell”. The right reel priority storage area PR is changed so that the symbol priority becomes the highest. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the correct answer pressing order, the priority storage area P is changed for each stop operation of the reel 12 so that “correct answer bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line. According to the above configuration, by appropriately selecting the priority order table, the symbols to be stopped on the active line change according to the mode of the stop operation order.

  The main CPU 301 stores the initial value “00” in the area pointer and the initial value “21” in the remaining area number (S109-5-4). The area pointer designates the area Q of the target reel. The remaining area number means the number of areas Q in the target reel where no priority order is stored.

  The main CPU 301 acquires the symbol code (symbol type) of the symbol position designated by the area pointer (S109-5-5). Further, the main CPU 301 determines the priority order according to the symbol code, the winning area (winning role), and the priority order table (S109-5-6). The main CPU 301 stores the determined priority order in the area Q designated by the current area pointer (S109-5-7).

  The main CPU 301 adds a numerical value “1” to the area pointer, and subtracts a numerical value “1” from the remaining area number (S109-5-8). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the remaining area number is a numerical value “0” (S109-5-9). When determining that the remaining area number is not “0” (S109-5-9: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes steps S109-5-5 to S109-5-9. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining area number is “0” (S109-5-9: YES), that is, when generation of the priority order storage area of the target reel is completed, the main CPU 301 determines “ 1 "is subtracted (S109-5-10).

  After subtracting the number of searches, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of searches has ended (S109-5-11). If it is determined that the number of searches has not ended (S109-5-11: NO), the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S109-5-2, changes the target reel, and proceeds from step S109-5-2 to step S109-5-2. Steps S109-5-11 are repeated. On the other hand, when determining that the number of searches has ended (S109-5-11: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the priority order storage process.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the stop control process. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 has been operated (S110-1). The main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S110-1 until the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 is operated (S110-1: NO). On the other hand, when the stop button 25 corresponding to the rotating reel 12 is operated (S110-1: YES), the main CPU 301 sends a stop operation command indicating the type of the stop button 25 that has been stopped to a command in the main RAM 303. Store in the storage area (S110-2).

  When the stop operation command is stored, the main CPU 301 updates the stop order storage area (S110-3). Further, the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the non-stop operation counter (S110-4). The main CPU 301 sets the reel 12 corresponding to the operated stop button 25 as a stop target reel (S110-5).

  The main CPU 301 acquires the current value of the symbol counter (that is, the symbol number located on the middle line) as the stop operation position (S110-6). The main CPU 301 determines the priority order of the area Q of the stop operation position and the area Q for four frames from the next frame of the stop operation position among the areas Q of the priority order storage area of the target reel (that is, for five frames). Is obtained (S110-7). In addition, the main CPU 301 determines the frame with the highest priority among the acquired priorities for the five frames as the planned stop position, and sets the number of frames from the stop operation position to the planned stop position as the number of sliding frames ( S110-8).

  The main CPU 301 updates each bit of the display combination storage area according to the symbol code of the planned stop position (that is, the type of the symbol of the planned stop position) (S110-9). For example, when the reel 12L stops in the stop control process and “bell” stops on the active line, the winning combination (for example, “watermelon”) whose symbol of the left reel is not “bell” may stop on the active line. Therefore, the bit corresponding to the winning combination among the bits of the display combination storing area is a numerical value “0”.

  After updating the display combination storage area, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the non-stop operation counter is “0” (S110-10). That the non-stop operation counter is a numerical value “0” means that the stop operation has been performed for all the reels 12. When it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is “0” (S110-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the stop control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is not “0” (S110-10: NO), the priority order storage process (see FIG. 92) executed in the pre-stop process is executed (S110-11). Also in step S110-11, the priority is stored in the priority storage area P of the rotating reel 12, as in step S109-3 of the pre-stop process. However, even if the symbols constituting the winning combination shown in the winning area of the winning area storage area, the symbol of the winning combination that is no longer displayed on the active line due to the stop of any reel 12 is The priority is not set higher than other symbols.

  After executing the priority order storage process, the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S110-1. The main CPU 301 repeats the processing from step S110-1 to step 110-11 until a stop operation is performed on all the reels 12, that is, until it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is “0”. Run. When it is determined that the non-stop operation counter is “0” (S110-10: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the reel stop control process.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the display determination process (S111). When the display determination process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination stopped on the active line is a winning combination permitted to stop on the active line in the game (S111-1). Specifically, in step S111-1, the main CPU 301 permits the display combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit set to “1” among the displayable bits in the display combination storing area. It is determined whether or not the bit is set to “1”. When the display permission bit is set to “0”, the main CPU 301 determines that an illegal winning has occurred.

  When the main CPU 301 determines that an illegal winning has occurred (S111-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an illegal winning command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S111-2), and shifts to an illegal winning error process to play the game. Prohibit progress. When the illegal winning error process is executed, for example, the power button 511 is turned off and then turned on again, and the main CPU 301 is caused to execute the startup process and the setting change process to set a normal set value. It becomes possible to play.

  When it is determined that the winning combination permitted to stop on the active line is stopped (S111-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the replay is stopped on the active line (S111-3). . When it is determined that the replay is stopped on the active line (S111-3: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the re-game in-operation flag to the ON state (S111-4), and sends the re-game command to the main RAM 303. The data is stored in the command storage area (S111-5), and the display determination process is terminated. The replay command indicates that the replay has stopped at the active line.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the replay is not stopped on the active line (S111-3: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the re-game in-operation flag to the OFF state (S111-6), and the winning winning combination is valid. It is determined whether or not the line is stopped (S111-7). When it is determined that the winning winning combination is stopped on the active line (S111-7: YES), the main CPU 301 stores the winning winning combination command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S111-8). The winning winning combination command indicates the type of winning winning combination aligned with the active line.

  The main CPU 301 adds the number of medals according to the type of the winning combination winning combination stopped on the active line to the credit number (S111-9). After adding the number of credits, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of addition is larger than the numerical value “50” which is the upper limit value of the number of credits (S111-10). When the number of credits is larger than “50” (S111-10: YES), the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, the numerical value “5” when the addition result of step S111-9 is “55”). ") Is set in the medal request counter (S111-11). After setting the number of medals in the medal request counter, the main CPU 301 proceeds to hopper driving processing. On the other hand, when the number of credits is “50” or less (S111-10: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the display determination process.

  If the main CPU 301 determines in step S111-7 that the winning combination has not stopped on the active line (S111-7: NO), the main CPU 301 stores the loss display command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S111-12). ). The lose display command indicates that the winning combination is not stopped on the active line. In the present embodiment, the replay command, the winning winning combination command, and the lose display command are collectively referred to as a display winning combination command.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the hopper driving process. The hopper driving process is executed when the payout request counter is set in the display determination process or the settlement operation acceptance process of the pre-game start process. When the hopper driving process is started, the main CPU 301 stores a payout start command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 (S120). The payout start command indicates the start of the medal discharge in the hopper 520. Further, the main CPU 301 sets an initial value in the payout period monitoring timer (S121). The payout period monitoring timer expires when a predetermined time length (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the hopper driving process.

  The main CPU 301 starts outputting a hopper drive signal (S122). In the period when the hopper driving signal is output, medals are sequentially discharged from the hopper 520. After starting the output of the hopper drive signal, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout period monitoring timer has expired (S123). When the main CPU 301 determines that the payout period monitoring timer has expired (S123: YES), the main CPU 301 stores an error command in the command storage area (S124), and proceeds to hopper empty error processing. If the discharge of the number of medals of the payout request counter is not completed between the start of the hopper driving process and the payout period monitoring timer, the main CPU 301 executes the hopper empty error process and prohibits the progress of the game To do. When the hopper empty process is executed, for example, when the hopper 520 is replenished with medals and the reset button 512 is operated, the progress of the game is permitted.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not a payout signal from the hopper 520 has been detected (S125). As described above, the payout signal is output from the payout sensor 112SE each time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. The main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S125 until it is determined that a payout signal has been detected (S125: NO).

  When determining that the payout signal has been detected (S125: YES), the main CPU 301 decrements “1” in the payout request counter (S126). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout request counter has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S127). If the main CPU 301 determines that the payout request counter has been subtracted to the numerical value “0” (S127: YES), the main CPU 301 stops outputting the hopper drive signal (S128), and stores the payout end command in the command storage area of the main RAM 303. (S129). For example, the sub-control board 400 starts outputting a payout sound effect when receiving a payout start command from the main CPU 301 and stops outputting a payout effect sound when receiving a payout end command. When the main CPU 301 stores the payout end command, the main CPU 301 ends the hopper driving process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout request counter is not “0” (S127: NO), the main CPU 301 repeatedly executes step S123 to step 127.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the main state transition process. In the main state transition process, the main CPU 301 shifts the main state in accordance with the stop operation sequence of the current game. Further, the main CPU 301 changes the value of the rotation effect counter in the main state transition process. When the value of the rotation effect counter is changed, the rotation effect corresponding to the rotation effect counter is executed in the next game (see FIG. 85).

  When the main CPU 301 starts the main state transition process, the main CPU 301 determines whether it is the RT0 gaming state or the bonus gaming state (S112-1). When determining that the main CPU 301 is in the RT0 gaming state or the bonus gaming state (S112-1: YES), the main CPU 301 ends the main state transition process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the RT0 gaming state or the bonus gaming state (S112-1: NO), that is, when it is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the main state 2 (S112). -2). When determining that the current state is the main state 2 (S112-2: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the SP state control process (S112-3). In the SP state control process, the main CPU 301 stores, for example, a numerical value “3” in the spinning effect counter and sets the red seven times effect to be executed in the next game. On the other hand, when determining that it is not the main state 2 (S112-2: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the main state 1 (S112-4).

  When it is determined that the main state is 1 (S112-4: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the AT state control process (S112-5). In the AT state control process, for example, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “4” in the spinning effect counter and sets so that the black and white seven spinning effect is executed in the next game.

  If the main CPU 301 determines that the main state is not 1 (S112-4: NO), that is, if the main state is 0, the main CPU 301 proceeds to a normal state control process (S112-6). In the normal state control process, for example, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “1” in the spinning effect counter and sets the AT start spinning effect to be executed in the next game. Further, in the normal state control process, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “2” in the rotation effect counter and sets the SP start rotation effect to be executed in the next game.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart of normal state control processing (main state 0). The main CPU 301 sets a rotating effect counter in the normal state control process (steps S132-2 and S133-2 described later). Further, the main CPU 301 shifts the main state in the normal state control process (step S130-2, step S132-3, and step S133-3 described later).

  When the normal state control process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the SP confirmed replay is won (S130-1). When it is determined that the SP confirmed replay is won (S130-1: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 2 (S130-2). Further, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “19” in the SP remaining counter (S130-3). The SP remaining counter is the remaining number of games in the main state 2 (SP state), and is subtracted for each game. The SP remaining counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning area is not SP confirmed replay (S130-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning area is batting order replay (S130-4). When it is determined that the winning area is a faction in the batting order replay (S130-4: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the normal state control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning area is the batting order replay (S130-4: YES), the main CPU 301 executes replay processing (A0 to A3) according to the correct answer state (S130-6, S130-8). , S130-10, S130-11). As described above, in the game in which the hitting order replay is won, the order 1 to the order 3 are determined by lottery in the transition operation lottery process (S107-1 in FIG. 85). The main CPU 301 changes the correct answer state according to whether or not the order determined in the transfer operation lottery process matches the stop operation order of the player.

  The correct answer state of the present embodiment includes a correct answer state 0, a correct answer state 1, a correct answer state 2, and a correct answer state 3. The correct state 0 shifts to the case where each stop button 25 is operated in a stop operation order other than the order 1 to the order 3 in the game where the hitting order replay is won. The correct state 1 shifts to the case where the stop operation is performed in the order 1 in the game in which the batting order replay is won. The correct state 2 shifts to the case where the stop operation is performed in the order 2 in the game in which the batting order replay is won. The correct answer state 3 shifts to the case where the stop operation is performed in the order 3 in the game in which the hitting order replay is won.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the correct answer state is 0 (S130-5). If the main CPU 301 determines that the correct answer state is 0 (S130-5: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to a replay time process A0 (S130-6). . On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct answer state is not 0 (S130-5: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the correct answer state 1 (S130-7). If the main CPU 301 determines that it is the correct answer state 1 (S130-7: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to replay processing A1 (S130-8).

  When determining that it is not the correct answer state 1 (S130-7: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the correct answer state 2 (S130-9). When it is determined that the correct answer state 2 is established (S130-9: YES), the process proceeds to replay processing A2 (S130-10). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the correct answer state 2 (S130-9: NO), that is, when it is the correct answer state 3, the process proceeds to replay time processing A3 (S130-11). After executing the replay time process A, the main CPU 301 ends the normal state control process.

  Part (a) of FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the replay-time process A0 executed in the correct state 0. When the replay time process A0 is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the order 1 determined at the start of the game matches the stop operation order in the game (S131-1). When it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 1 (S131-1: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the correct answer state from the correct answer state 0 to the correct answer state 1 (S131-2). After changing the correct answer state, the main CPU 301 ends the replay processing A0.

  When it is determined that the stop operation order is not order 1 (S131-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order of the current game matches order 2 (S131-3). When it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 2 (S131-3: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the correct answer state from the correct answer state 0 to the correct answer state 2 (S131-4). After changing the correct answer state, the main CPU 301 ends the replay processing A0.

  On the other hand, when determining that the stop operation order of the current game is not order 2 (S131-3: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order of the current game matches order 3. S131-5). When it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 3 (S131-5: YES), the main CPU 301 changes the correct answer state from the correct answer state 0 to the correct answer state 3 (S131-6).

  Part (b) of FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the replay-time process A1 executed in the correct answer state 1. When the replay time process A1 is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the order 1 determined at the start of the game matches the stop operation order in the game (S132-1).

  When it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 1 (S132-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “1” in the spinning effect counter (S132-2). When the value “1” is stored in the spinning effect counter in the current game, the AT start spinning effect is executed in the next game. As understood from the above description, in each game in which the hitting order replay is won, when the stop operation is performed twice in succession in the order 1, the AT start spinning effect is executed. After storing the numerical value “1” in the rotation effect counter, the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 1 (S132-3). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 shifts (clears) from the correct state 1 to the correct state 0 (S132-4), and ends the replay-time process A1.

  On the other hand, when determining that the stop operation order is not order 1 (S132-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order matches order 2 (S132-5). When it is determined that the stop operation order is not order 2 (S132-5: NO), the main CPU 301 shifts from the correct answer state 1 to the correct answer state 0 and ends the replay time process A1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 2 (S132-5: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the correct state 2 (S132-6) and ends the replay time process A1.

  Part (c) of FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the replay time process A2. When the replay time process A2 is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the order 2 determined at the start of the game matches the stop operation order in the game (S133-1). As described above, the replay time process A2 is executed when the batting order replay is won in the current game, and when the previous batting order replay is stopped in the order 2 in the winning game. That is, in step S133-1, it is determined whether or not a stop operation has been continuously performed in order 2 in each game in which the hitting order replay is won.

  When it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 2 (S133-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “2” in the spinning effect counter (S133-2). When the value “2” is stored in the rotation effect counter in the current game, the SP start rotation effect is executed in the next game. As understood from the above description, in each game in which the hitting order replay is won, if the stop operation is continuously performed twice in the order 2, the AT start spinning effect is executed. After storing the numerical value “2” in the rotation effect counter, the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 2 (S133-3). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 transitions to the correct state 0 (S133-4), and ends the replay processing A2.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop operation order is not order 2 (S133-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order matches order 1 (S133-5). When it is determined that the stop operation order is not order 1 (S133-5: NO), the main CPU 301 transitions to the correct answer state 0 (S133-4), and ends the replay processing A2. If it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 1 (S133-5: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the correct answer state 1 (S133-6) and ends the replay time process A2.

  Part (d) of FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the replay time process A3. When the replay time process A3 is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the order 3 determined at the start of the game matches the stop operation order in the game (S134-1). As described above, the replay time process A3 is executed when the batting order replay is won in the current game, and when the previous batting order replay is stopped in the order 3 in the winning game. That is, in step S134-1, it is determined whether or not a stop operation has been continuously performed in order 3 in each game won by batting order replay. When it is determined that the stop operation order matches the order 3 (S134-2), the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 1 (S134-2), shifts to the correct state 0 (S134-3), and replays. The process A3 is terminated.

  Part (a) of FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the AT state control process (main state 1). In the AT state control process, the main CPU 301 shifts the main state according to the winning area as in the normal state control process. Specifically, when the winning area “05” (0SP confirmed replay) or the winning areas “00” to “03” (batting order replay) is won, the main state is shifted according to the winning area. When the AT state control process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the SP confirmed replay is won (S140-1). When it is determined that the SP confirmed replay is won (S140-1: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 2 (S140-2). Further, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “19” in the SP remaining counter (S140-3).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning area is not SP confirmed replay (S140-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning area is batting order replay (S140-4).
When determining that the winning area is not the batting order replay (S140-4: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the AT state control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning area is the batting order replay (S140-4: YES), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the correct state is 0 (S140-5), and determines that the correct state is 0. If so (S140-5: YES), the process proceeds to replay processing B0 (S140-6). On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct answer state is not 0 (S140-5: NO), the process proceeds to replay processing B1 (S140-7).

  In the AT state control process, the correct answer state is changed to the correct answer state 0 or the correct answer state 1 in accordance with the stop operation order. As described above, the main CPU 301 executes the replay process B0 (part (b) of FIG. 99) when the game won by the batting order replay is in the correct state 0 in the main state 1 and is in the correct state 1 Then, the replay time process B1 (part (c) of FIG. 99) is executed. After executing the replay process, the main CPU 301 ends the AT state control process.

  Part (b) of FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the replay time process B0. When starting the replay-time process B0, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order of the current game is the order 1 or the order 3 (S141-1). When it is determined that the stop operation order is order 1 or order 3 (S141-1: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the correct answer state 1 (S141-2) and sets the end preparation flag to the OFF state (S141- 3). The completion preparation flag is stored in the main RAM 303, for example.

  On the other hand, when determining that the stop operation order is not order 1 or order 3 (S141-1: NO), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order is order 2 (S141-4). When it is determined that the stop operation order is order 2 (S141-4: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the end preparation flag to the OFF state (S141-3), and ends the replay time process B0.

  If it is determined in step S141-4 that the stop operation order is not order 2, that is, if the stop operation order is not any of order 1 to order 3, main CPU 301 determines whether or not the end preparation flag is ON. Is determined (S141-5). When the end preparation flag is not in the ON state (S141-5: NO), the main CPU 301 sets the end preparation flag in the ON state (S141-6), and ends the replay time process B0. On the other hand, when the end preparation flag is in the ON state (S141-5: YES), the main CPU 301 shifts to the main state 0 (S141-7) and ends the replay time process B0.

  Part (c) of FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the replay time process B1. When starting the replay-time process B1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game stop operation order is the order 1 or the order 3 (S142-1). When it is determined that the stop operation order is not order 1 or order 3 (S142-1: NO), the main CPU 301 shifts to the correct state 0 (S142-3) and ends the replay-time process B1. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop operation order is order 1 or order 3 (S142-1: YES), the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “4” in the rotation effect counter and performs the black and white seven times in the next game. The trunk effect is executed. After storing the numerical value “4” in the rotation effect counter, the main CPU 301 shifts to the correct answer state 0 and ends the replay processing B1.

  Part (a) of FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the SP state control process. When the SP state control process is started, the main CPU 301 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the SP remaining counter (S150-1). After subtracting the SP remaining counter, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the SP remaining counter has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S150-2). When the main CPU 301 determines that the SP remaining counter is not the numerical value “0” (S150-2: NO), the main CPU 301 executes the SP setting process (S150-3).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SP remaining counter is the numerical value “0” (S150-2: YES), the main CPU 301 executes SP termination processing (S150-4). After executing the SP mid-setting process or the SP end process, the main CPU 301 ends the SP state control process.

  Part (b) of FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the SP mid-setting process. When the SP mid-setting process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the red seven-rotor effect reservation flag is ON (S151-1). As described above, when the execution of the red seven-turn effect is determined in the turn effect production control process (red seven-turn effect lottery process), the red seven-rotor effect reservation flag is set to the ON state.

  If it is determined that the red seven-rotor effect reservation flag is not in the ON state (S151-1: NO), the main CPU 301 ends the SP mid-setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the red seven-rotor effect reservation flag is ON (S151-1: YES), the main CPU 301 determines that the red seven-rotor effect determined (reserved) in this game is a red seven-matched pattern. It is determined whether or not (S151-2). That is, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the red seven match is stopped and displayed in the next game.

  When the red seven-off pattern is executed in the next game (S151-2: NO), the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “3” in the rotation effect counter (S151-4), and ends the SP setting process. . On the other hand, when the red seven match pattern is executed in the next game (S151-2: YES), the main CPU 301 sets the red seven match complete flag to the ON state (S151-3), and then the spinning effect. The numerical value “3” is stored in the counter and the SP setting process is terminated. The red seven aligned flag indicates whether the red seven aligned is stopped and displayed in the current SP state, and is provided in the sub RAM 414, for example.

  Part (c) of FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the SP termination process. When starting the SP termination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the red seven aligned flag is in an ON state (S 152-1). That is, when the SP state (main state 2) ends, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the red seven match is stopped and displayed in the SP state.

  If the main CPU 301 determines that the red seven aligned flag is not in the ON state (S152-1: NO), the main CPU 301 overwrites the “red seven aligned pattern” with the result of the red seven round effect drawing lottery process for the current game ( S152-2). Specifically, a case is assumed in which “no effect” or “red seven-off pattern” is determined in the red seven-rotor effect drawing lottery process of this game. Even in the above case, on the condition that the red seven-aligned flag is not in the ON state (the red seven-aligned flag has never been stopped), the result of the red seven-rotor effect lottery process is “red seven It is overwritten with "Aligned pattern". Therefore, the execution of the red-seven uniform pattern is guaranteed in the SP state.

  After changing the result of the red seven times effect drawing lottery process, the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S152-3. On the other hand, if it is determined that the red seven aligned flag is in the ON state (S152-1: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to step S152-3 without changing the result of the red seven cylinder effect lottery process. . In step S152-3, the main CPU 301 stores a numerical value “3” in the rotation effect counter. Thereafter, the main CPU 301 sets the red seven ready flag to the OFF state (S152-4), shifts to the main state 1 (S152-5), and ends the SP termination process.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the interrupt process. As described above, the main CPU 301 executes an interrupt process every 1.49 ms during the period when the game control process is being executed.

  When starting the interrupt process, the main CPU 301 saves data in various registers (S201). Thereafter, the main CPU 301 executes an input port reading process (S202). In the input port reading process, the main CPU 301 reads various signals input to the I / F circuit 305. Specifically, the main CPU 301 reads ON signals from the start switch 24SW, each stop switch 25SW, the medal sensor 34SE, the settlement switch 23SW, and the like in the input port reading process. The main CPU 301 sets the detection flag of the sensor that has read the ON signal to the ON state.

  The main CPU 301 executes a timer measurement process (S203). In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts a predetermined value from various timers. In the timer measurement process, the main CPU 301 subtracts, for example, a payout period monitoring timer set in the hopper drive process, a spinning effect production timer set in the wait process, and a wait timer.

  The main CPU 301 selects a drive target reel from the rotating reels (S204), and executes a drive control process (S205) for the drive target reel. In the drive control process, the main CPU 301 outputs a drive pulse to the stepping motor of the drive target reel. When a drive pulse is input, the excitation pattern of the stepping motor is switched.

  The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the drive control processing for all the reels 12 has been executed (S206). When it is determined that the drive control processing for all the reels 12 has not been executed (S206: NO), the main CPU 301 repeats step S204 and step S205. On the other hand, when it is determined that the drive control process for all the reels 12 has been executed (S206: YES), the main CPU 301 proceeds to the external signal output process (S207).

  The main CPU 301 outputs a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1 in the external signal output process. For example, when the setting change process is started, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating the start of the setting change process to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  The main CPU 301 drives various lamps in the LED display process (S208). For example, the main CPU 301 displays the BET lamp 14 in a manner indicated by the BET lamp display data generated by the game control process. Further, the main CPU 301 lights the re-game display lamp 18 when the re-game operating flag is set to ON in the LED display process. Further, the main CPU 301 displays the number of credits on the stored number display 17 in the LED display process.

  The main CPU 301 proceeds to the control command transmission process (S209) after the LED display process. As described above, various commands are stored in the command storage area of the main RAM 303 in the game control process. The command stored in the command storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 in the control command transmission process.

  After the control command transmission process, the main CPU 301 executes a register restoration process (S210), and restores the data saved in step S210 to the register. When the register return process is executed, the main CPU 301 returns the process to step S of the game control process that was executed when the interrupt process was started.

<Each process executed by the sub CPU>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart of sub activation processing of the sub CPU 412. The sub CPU 412 executes a sub activation process when a reset signal is input from a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit outputs a reset signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the sub-control board 400 exceeds a predetermined threshold. That is, for example, when the supply of power supply voltage to the sub control board 400 is started by operating the power switch SW, the sub activation process is executed.

  When the sub activation process is started, the sub CPU 412 executes an activation initialization process (S301). In the sub activation process, various registers of the sub control board 400 are initialized, and initial values are set in various counters of the sub RAM 414. Specifically, an initial value “0” is set in the first counter. The numerical value of the first counter is stored in the holding counter when the power is shut off.

  In the sub activation process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether there is a backup abnormality in the sub RAM 414. If the backup is abnormal, the sub CPU 412 initializes the backup data. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the data stored in various ROMs including the CGROM 424 is appropriate in the startup initialization process. For example, data stored at a specific address in each ROM is read to determine whether or not the data is appropriate. When an abnormality is found in various ROMs, the sub CPU 412 shifts to predetermined error processing.

  In the sub activation process, the sub CPU 412 activates the lamp control task (S302), activates the acoustic control task (S303), activates the image control board communication task (S304), activates the main control board communication task (S305), and effects. The button input task is activated (S306).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart of each task activated in the sub activation process. The sub CPU 412 controls various lamps including the side lamp 5 and the effect lamp 28 by a lamp control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 controls the speakers (31, 32) by an acoustic control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 transmits a command to the image control board 420 by the image control board communication task, receives a command from the main control board 300 in the main control board communication task, and performs the effect button 26 and the direction in the effect button input task. The operation of the designation button 27 is accepted.

  A timer interrupt signal is input to the sub CPU 412 at predetermined time intervals. When receiving the timer interrupt signal, the sub CPU 412 executes one of the tasks. That is, each peripheral device including various lamps and speakers (31, 32) is controlled in a time division manner.

  Part (a) of FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the lamp control task. When starting the lamp control task, the sub CPU 412 initializes data for controlling various lamps (S302-1). When the sub CPU 412 initializes various data, the sub CPU 412 shifts the processing to the lamp data analysis processing (S302-2). The lamp data is data indicating blinking patterns of various lamps. For example, a time series (300 ms lighting → 300 ms lighting → 300 ms lighting →...) Of data indicating the time for turning on a specific lamp and data indicating the time for turning off a specific lamp is employed as the lamp data.

  In the lamp control process (S302-3), the sub CPU 412 blinks a specific lamp in a manner specified by the lamp data. The lamp data analysis process and the lamp effect execution process are repeatedly executed until a timer interrupt signal is input.

  Part (b) of FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the acoustic control task. When starting the acoustic control task, the sub CPU 412 initializes various data for controlling the speakers (31, 32) (S303-1). When the sub CPU 412 initializes various data, the sub CPU 412 shifts the processing to acoustic analysis processing (S303-2).

  In the sound control process (S303-3), the sub CPU 412 instructs the sound board 430 (the sound source IC 431) according to the result of the sound data analysis process. The sound source IC 431 reads out sound data from the sound source ROM 432 in accordance with an instruction from the sub CPU 412, generates an sound signal from the sound data, and supplies the sound signal to the speakers (31, 32). The acoustic data analysis process and the acoustic control process are repeatedly executed until a timer interrupt signal is input.

  Part (c) of FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the image control board communication process. When the sub CPU 412 starts the image control board communication task, the sub CPU 412 sets an effect command according to the effect number stored in the sub RAM 414 (S304-1). The effect number indicates the type of effect executed in the gaming machine 1, and is stored in the effect number storage area of the sub RAM 414 in the effect lottery process described later. The sub CPU 412 transmits the effect command set in step S304-1 to the image control board 420 (S304-2), and ends the image control board communication task. The image control board communication task may receive a command from the image control board 420.

  Part (d) of FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the main control board communication task. When the main control board communication task is started, the sub CPU 412 executes communication start pre-processing (S305-1) for clearing stored commands and the like. After executing the pre-communication start process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a received command check process (S305-2). In the received command check process, the content of the command received from the main control board 300 is checked.

  The sub CPU 412 determines whether the command checked in the current received command check process is different from the command checked in the previous received command check process (S305-3). That is, in step S305-3, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the command from the main control board 300 has changed. The sub CPU 412 repeatedly executes step S305-3 until the command from the main control board 300 changes (S305-3: NO). When the command from the main control board 300 changes (S305-3: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to command analysis processing (S305-4).

  After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process (S305-5). In the game information update process, the sub CPU 412 updates the game information according to the command received from the main control board 300. The game information is, for example, various types of information including a game counter indicating the number of games in the normal state. In step S305-5, the sub CPU 412 executes one of a plurality of types of game information update processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process corresponding to the type of command received from the main control board 300 among a plurality of types of game information update processes. For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives a start operation command, the sub CPU 412 executes a game information update process for updating a game counter. After updating the game information, the sub CPU 412 returns the process to step S305-2, and repeats the process from step S305-2 to step S305-5 until the next timer interrupt signal is input.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart of command analysis processing. When starting the command analysis process, the sub CPU 412 executes an effect control process (S401). As will be described later, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect to be executed by the gaming machine 1, for example, in the effect control process.

  After executing the effect control process, the sub CPU 412 determines lamp data corresponding to the effect (S402), and stores the determined lamp data in the sub RAM 414 (S403). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines acoustic data according to the effect determined by the effect control process (S404), and stores the determined sound data in the sub RAM 414 (S405). When the acoustic data is stored, the sub CPU 412 ends the command analysis process.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the effect control process. When starting the effect control process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1). If it is determined that the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts the processing to the setting change start / end processing (S401-2). To do.

  Specifically, when it is determined that a setting change start command has been received, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the setting change process is being executed. For example, the sub CPU 412 displays a message “setting is being changed” on the liquid crystal display device 30 and causes each speaker to output the sound of the message. If it is determined that the set value command has been received (that is, when the setting change process has ended), the sub CPU 412 stores the set value indicated by the set value command in the sub RAM 414 and ends the notification of the setting change process. . When the set value command is received, the sub CPU 412 initializes a holding counter. After executing the setting change start / end process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  If it is determined that the command received from the main control board 300 is not a setting change start command or a setting value command (S401-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a demonstration display command has been received (S401-). 3). If it is determined that a demo display command has been received (S401-3: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a process for receiving a demo display command (S401-4). In the demonstration display command reception process, the sub CPU 412 displays a demonstration image on the liquid crystal display device 30 and turns on the demo status flag of the sub RAM 414. After executing the demonstration display command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  If it is determined that the received command is not a demonstration display command (S401-3: NO), the sub CPU 412 receives an insertion-related command (medal automatic insertion command, medal insertion command, 1 BET operation command, MAX-BET operation command). It is determined whether or not (S401-5). When it is determined that the input related command has been received (S401-5: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the processing related to receiving the input related command (S401-6). In the insertion-related command reception process, the sub CPU 412 generates an effect when a medal is inserted, for example. After executing the process related to receiving the insertion-related command, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not an input-related command (S401-5: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a settlement operation command has been received (S401-7). If it is determined that a settlement operation command has been received (S401-7: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a settlement operation command reception process (S401-8). In the settlement operation command reception process, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the medal settlement is being executed. The sub CPU 412 displays, for example, a message “Checkout in progress” on the liquid crystal display device 30 and outputs a predetermined warning sound from the speaker in the process at the time of payment operation command reception. After executing the payment operation command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a settlement operation command (S401-7: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a start operation command has been received (S401-9). If it is determined that the start operation command has been received (S401-9: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a start operation time process (S401-10). In the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 executes various processes including an effect lottery process. After executing the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a start operation command (S401-9: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a reel start command has been received (S401-11). If it is determined that a reel start command has been received (S401-11: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a reel start command reception process (S401-12). In the reel start command reception process, for example, the sub CPU 412 causes the speaker to output a reel rotation sound that is output when the rotation of the reel is started. After executing the reel start command reception process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When determining that the received command is not a reel start command (S401-11: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a stop operation command has been received (S401-13). When it is determined that the stop operation command has been received (S401-13: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a stop operation time process (S401-14). In the stop operation processing, for example, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 30 is switched. After executing the stop operation time process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a stop operation acceptance command (S401-13: NO), whether or not a display winning combination command (replay command, winning winning combination command or lost display command) has been received. Is determined (S401-15). When it is determined that the display winning combination command has been received (S401-15: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a display winning combination command reception process (S401-16). In the display winning combination command reception process, the sub CPU 412 executes various processes including a sub state management process described later.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the received command is not a display winning combination command (S401-15: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a payout start command or a payout end command has been received (S401-17). If it is determined that a payout start command or a payout end command has been received (S401-17: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a payout sound control process (S401-18). For example, when receiving a payout start command, the sub CPU 412 starts outputting a medal payout sound for notifying medal discharge. When the payout end command is received, the sub CPU 412 stops the medal payout sound. After executing the payout sound control process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process.

  When it is determined that the received command is not a payout start command or a payout end command (S401-17: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether a pseudo game start command has been received (S401-19). If it is determined that the pseudo game start command has not been received (S401-19: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the effect control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that a pseudo game start command has been received (S401-19: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a pseudo game start process (S401-20).

  In the pseudo game start process, the sub CPU 412 determines, for example, an effect in the current pseudo game. In addition, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of additional cards in the current pseudo game in the pseudo game start process. For example, it is assumed that a pseudo game start command for a combo rotator effect is received. In the above case, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the current pseudo game is a black seven-match. When the sub CPU 412 determines that the black sevens are aligned, the sub CPU 412 determines the additional number using the random number R3 and the additional determination table (part (b) in FIG. 66). Further, the sub CPU 412 adds the determined additional number to the remaining number counter. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 412 determines that the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in this pseudo game is out of the black seven, the sub CPU 412 does not determine the additional number. Note that the main CPU 301 transmits a pseudo game result command indicating a combination of symbols (seven types) to be stopped and displayed in the pseudo game to the sub CPU 412 at an appropriate time.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the start operation time process. When starting the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 acquires a sub state (S501). Thereafter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub state is the special AT state (S502). When determining that it is in the special AT state (S502: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a special AT state process (S503). In the special AT state process, the sub CPU 412 increments the second counter every time the special replay is stopped and displayed. Further, when the number of remaining games in the special AT state is subtracted for each game and the remaining number of games is subtracted to a numerical value “0”, the sub CPU 412 ends the special AT state and shifts the sub state to the AT state ( Return).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the special AT state (S502: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is in the add-on standby state (S504). If it is determined that it is in the add-on standby state (S504: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the add-on standby state process (S505). In the extra waiting state process, the sub CPU 412 determines the extra number according to the winning area, for example.

  When it is determined that the sub state is not the added standby state (S504: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is in the SP state (S506). When determining that the current state is the SP state (S506: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the SP state process (S507). In the SP state process, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of stocks using the stock number determination table (see part (a) of FIG. 72), for example, every time the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed, and sets the AT set number counter. to add.

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that it is not in the SP state (S506: NO), it determines whether or not it is in the AT state (S508). If it is determined that the state is the AT state (S508: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the AT state process (S509). In the AT state process, the sub CPU 412 adds the second counter with reference to the second addition table (FIG. 63) corresponding to the AT level and the addition state during the AT (low probability state, high probability state, very high probability state). Execute the process. In addition, the sub CPU 412 executes the addition state determination process during AT using the addition state determination table during AT (FIG. 64) in the AT state process.

  The sub CPU 412 executes the special addition effect determination process using the special addition effect determination table (part (a) in FIG. 67) in the AT state process. When the execution of the special addition effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 determines the addition value of the second counter with reference to the second addition table (part (b) of FIG. 67). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to shift to the special AT state using the special AT determination table (see FIG. 70) in the AT state process. When the special AT state is won in the AT state process, the sub CPU 412 stores the number of games (the number of precursor games) until the special AT state is entered in the precursor counter.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the sub state is not the AT state (S508: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is the start preparation state (S510). If it is determined that it is in the start preparation state (S510: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to start preparation state processing (S511). In the start preparation state process, the sub CPU 412 executes, for example, an AT level (predetermined AT level) promotion lottery. When winning the promotion lottery, the predetermined AT level is changed to a higher level. For example, in the start preparation state, the sub CPU 412 executes the promotion lottery when the rare role is won, and when the promotion lottery is won, the sub-CPU 412 sets the predetermined AT level (eg, AT level 0) to a higher level (eg, AT level 0). Promote to AT level 1). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the final AT level using the AT level determination table (FIG. 62) in accordance with the start preparation state process, the predetermined AT level, and the line on which the red seven alignment is stopped.

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the sub state is not the start preparation state (S510: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is the special chance state (S512). If it is determined that the state is the special chance state (S512: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a special chance state process (S513). In the special chance state process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to shift to the AT state using the special chance clear determination table (part (c) in FIG. 56). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the added value of the bell navigation counter using the extra navigation determination table (part (b) of FIG. 56) in the special chance state process. Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to change the display mode (color) of the background icon image GH using the background change table (see FIG. 58) in the special chance state process.

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that the sub state is not the special chance state (S512: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is the periodic chance state (S514). If it is determined that it is in the periodic chance state (S514: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the periodic chance state process (S515). In the periodic chance state process, the sub CPU 412 determines a weapon scenario (part (c) in FIG. 45) in the current periodic chance state. In the periodic chance state process, the sub CPU 412 determines the damage to be given to the enemy character according to the winning area and the weapon W (WX, WY, WZ). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the presence / absence of a special victory using the special victory determination table (see FIG. 46).

  When the sub CPU 412 determines that the sub state is not the periodic chance state (S514: NO), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a normal state process (S516). In the normal state process, the sub CPU 412 executes the normal lottery process using the normal lottery table (see FIG. 36). Further, the sub CPU 412 executes a first counter addition process using the first addition table (see FIG. 37) and adds the first counter. Further, the sub CPU 412 executes the addition state determination process using the addition state determination table (see FIG. 40) and also executes the lottery state determination process using the lottery state determination table (see FIG. 42). Further, in the normal state process, the sub CPU 412 executes the additional value addition process using the additional value determination table (see FIG. 53) when the value of the first counter is held in the holding counter when the power is turned off. The additional value is added to the first counter.

  In the start operation process, the sub CPU 412 executes an effect lottery process (S517) according to the sub state and the winning area. Specifically, when starting the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 acquires a random value R3 and selects an effect lottery table (see FIG. 54) corresponding to the sub state and the winning area. The sub CPU 412 sequentially acquires each lottery value of each effect from the effect lottery table, and subtracts the acquired lottery value to the random value R3. When the subtraction result becomes a negative number, the sub CPU 412 stores the effect number of the effect whose subtraction result is a negative number in the effect number storage area of the sub RAM 414. In addition, when the effect in which the effect button operation instruction is executed is determined, the sub CPU 412 sets the effect button instruction flag to the ON state.

  In a game in which an effect button operation instruction is executed, for example, a message “PUSH!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. When the effect button 26 is operated during the period in which the effect button instruction flag is set to the ON state, the sub CPU 412 executes a predetermined effect. After executing the effect lottery process, the sub CPU 412 ends the start operation process.

  Part (a) of FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the special chance state process. When the special chance state process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the winning area of the current game is a replay (S513-1). When it is determined that replay is performed (S513-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 adds a replay counter (S513-2), and proceeds to clear lottery processing (S513-3). In the clear lottery process, whether or not the AT state is determined is determined, and when the AT state is won, the winning state flag is set to the ON state.

  When it is determined that the winning area of this game is not replay (S513-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a special victory determination process (S513-4). In the special victory determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not a special victory (one-shot victory, resurgence victory) is appropriate. After executing the special victory determination process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to the background change process (S513-5). After executing the background change process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to an extra navigation determination process (S513-6). In the additional navigation determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of additional navigations according to the winning area, and adds the determined number of additional navigations to the bell navigation counter. After executing the extra navigation determination process, the sub CPU 412 ends the special chance state process.

  Part (b) of FIG. 107 is a flowchart of background change processing. When the background change process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the winning state flag is ON (S513-5-1). When determining that the winning state flag is not in the ON state (S513-5-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the replay counter is equal to or smaller than the numerical value “10” (S513-5-2). When it is determined that the replay counter is equal to or smaller than the numerical value “10” (S513-5-2: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether to change the display of the background icon image GH by the background change table of the first group. (S513-5-3). On the other hand, when it is determined that the replay counter is not equal to or smaller than the numerical value “10” (S513-5-2: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display of the background icon image GH by the background change table of the second group ( S513-5-4).

  As described above, when the background change table of the second group is selected, the display of the background image GH is easily changed compared to the case where the background change table of the first group is selected. Therefore, according to the above configuration, when the replay is won 11 times or more in the special chance state, the display of the background image GH is easily changed compared to the case where the number of wins for the replay is 10 times or less.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning state flag is in the ON state (S513-5-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the special chance set number counter is a numerical value “0” (S513-). 5-5). When the special chance set counter is not “0” (S513-5-5: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether to change the display of the background image GH using the background change table of the third group. (S513-5-6). On the other hand, when the special chance set number counter is a numerical value “0” (S513-5-5: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether to change the display of the background image GH using the background change table of the fourth group. Is determined (S513-5-7).

  As described above, the display of the background image GH is not changed when the third group is selected, but is changed when the fourth group is selected. Therefore, according to the above configuration, when the AT state is won and the special chance state continues to the next set, the confirmation notification (rainbow display) is not made and the next set is not continued. In this case, a definite notification is given.

  Part (a) of FIG. 108 is a flowchart of normal state processing. When starting the normal state process, the sub CPU 412 executes a normal lottery process (S516-1). In the normal lottery process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to shift to the AT state, the special chance state, and the SP state with reference to the normal lottery table. After the normal lottery process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a precursor control process (S516-2). In the warning control process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to shift to the warning state. For example, when the rare combination is won, the sub CPU 412 determines to shift to the precursor state. When the transition to the precursor state is determined, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games in the precursor state and stores it in the precursor counter. In addition, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games for the continuous effect and the number of games for the special sign state according to the number of games in the sign state.

  After the warning control process, the sub CPU 412 executes a first counter control process (S516-3). In the first counter control process, the sub CPU 412 executes each process including a first counter addition process and an additional value addition process. After executing the first counter addition process, the sub CPU 412 shifts the addition state by the addition state determination process (S516-4). Further, the sub CPU 412 shifts the lottery state through a lottery state determination process (S516-5).

  Part (b) of FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the first counter control process. When the first counter control process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the winning area is replay (X, Y) (S516-3-1). When it is determined that the winning area is replay (S516-3-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a first counter addition process (S516-3-2). In the first counter addition process, the sub CPU 412 determines an addition value with reference to the first addition table corresponding to the addition mode, the addition state, and the type of replay. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 acquires each lottery value corresponding to the replay continuous counter (the number of consecutive replay wins) from the first addition table, and subtracts each lottery value from the random value R3. Further, the sub CPU 412 adds the addition value obtained by subtracting the negative result to the first counter.

  After the first counter addition process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the holding counter is a numerical value “0” (S516-3-3). When determining that the holding counter is not the numerical value “0” (S516-3-3: NO), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to an additional value addition process (S516-3-4). In the additional value addition process, the sub CPU 412 refers to the additional value determination table, determines an additional value according to the value of the holding counter, and adds it to the first counter. After executing the additional value addition process, the sub CPU 412 proceeds to step S516-3-5.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning area is not replay (S516-3-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to step S516-3-5 without executing the first counter addition process and the additional value addition process. . Even if it is determined that the winning area is replay (S516-3-1: YES), if the holding counter is determined to be a numerical value “0” (S516-3-3: YES), the sub The CPU 412 proceeds to step S516-3-5 without executing the additional value addition process. In step S516-3-5, the sub CPU 412 adds a numerical value “1” to the first counter.

  According to the above configuration, when the holding counter is the numerical value “0” and the replay is won, the added value is added to the first counter in addition to the numerical value “1”. When the holding counter is not the numerical value “0” and the replay is won, the additional value is added to the first counter in addition to the added value and the numerical value “1”. On the other hand, when the replay is not won, that is, when the addition value is not added to the first counter, the additional value is not added even if the holding counter is not the numerical value “0”.

  The description of the start operation time process (normal state process, etc.) is as described above. Hereinafter, a process for receiving a display winning combination command executed when all the reels 12 are stopped will be described. As described above, the display winning combination command reception process includes the sub-status management process. In addition, the sub-state management process is a periodic chance state management process executed in each game in the periodic chance state, an AT state management process executed in each game in the AT state, and a normal execution executed in each game in the normal state State management processing.

  Part (a) of FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the periodic chance state management process. When the periodic chance state management process is started, the sub CPU 412 subtracts the damage determined in the periodic chance state process (S515 in FIG. 106) in the current game from the enemy HP counter (S520). After subtracting the enemy HP counter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the enemy HP counter is equal to or smaller than a numerical value “0” (S521). When it is determined that the enemy HP counter is equal to or smaller than the numerical value “0” (S521: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts the sub state to the start preparation state (S522), and ends the periodic chance state management process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the enemy HP counter is not equal to or smaller than the numerical value “0” (S521: NO), the sub CPU 412 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the game number counter (S523). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the game number counter has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S524). When determining that the game number counter is not the numerical value “0” (S524: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the periodic chance state management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game number counter is the numerical value “0” (S524: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the resurgence victory has been won (S525). If it is determined that the resurrection victory has been won (S525: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts the sub state to the start preparation state, and ends the periodic chance state management process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the resurgence victory has not been won (S525: NO), the sub CPU 412 executes the processing after step S526 and shifts to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines an enemy character in the next periodic chance state by an enemy character determination process (S526). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to set the enemy character in the reverse mode by the reverse mode determination process (S527). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines the enemy character display value in the next cycle (normal state) by the enemy character display value determination process (S528). After executing the enemy character display value determination process, the sub CPU 412 ends the periodic chance state management process.

  Part (b) of FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the AT state management process. When starting the AT state management process, the sub CPU 412 adds the betting medal of the current game to the remaining number counter (S530). In the present embodiment, the prescribed number of RT1 gaming states is 3, and the AT state is not shifted to other than the RT1 gaming state. Accordingly, in step S530, the value added to the remaining medal number counter is “3”. However, if the current game is a re-game, the betting medal is “0”. After adding the betting medal to the remaining number counter, the sub CPU 412 subtracts a value (paid-out number) corresponding to the winning area of the current game from the remaining number counter (S531).

  In the present embodiment, the numerical value subtracted from the remaining number counter in step S531 does not consider whether the winning combination has been missed. For example, in a game in which the winning area “batting order bell” is won, even if “correct answer bell” (8 payouts) is stopped and displayed, “correct answer bell” is not stopped and displayed. The numerical value “8” is subtracted from the remaining number counter. Specifically, in a game where “batting order bell” is won, “correct answer bell” is stopped, “illegal answer” (payout number 1) is stopped, and winning combination is stopped. In any case where the image is not displayed (missed), the numerical value “8” is subtracted from the remaining number counter.

  Assume that the actual payout number is subtracted from the remaining number counter in step S531. In the above case, for example, when the stop operation is performed in a direction other than the correct pressing order of the “batting order bell” and the incorrect answering is stopped, the numerical value “1” is subtracted from the remaining number counter and the incorrect answer is displayed. If a combination is missed, the remaining number counter is not subtracted. In other words, in the configuration in which the actual payout number is subtracted from the remaining number counter, the remaining number counter may not be subtracted when the stop operation is performed in a manner other than the notified correct pressing order of the hitting order bell. Therefore, by ignoring the notified correct answer pressing order and playing the game, it is possible to perform an illegal act intentionally extending the AT state. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the payout number corresponding to the winning area is subtracted from the remaining number counter regardless of the actual payout number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the above-described fraud.

  After subtracting the remaining number counter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the remaining number counter is equal to or smaller than a numerical value “0” (end value) (S532). When it is determined that the remaining number counter is equal to or smaller than the numerical value “0” (S532: NO), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a return determination process (S533). In the return determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to return to the AT state with a probability corresponding to the payout rate at the end of the AT state and the second counter.

  After executing the return determination process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether to return to the AT state (S534). If it is determined to return to the AT state (S534: YES), the sub CPU 412 sets an initial value in the remaining number counter (S535). Specifically, in step S535, the sub CPU 412 determines the initial value (150 or 300) of the remaining number counter by lottery and sets it in the remaining number counter. After resetting the initial value of the remaining number counter, the sub CPU 412 ends the AT state management process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined not to return to the AT state (S534: NO), the sub CPU 412 executes the processing after step S536 and shifts to the normal state. Specifically, in step S536, the sub CPU 412 determines the scenario state after the end of the AT state according to the scenario state immediately before the current AT state. The sub CPU 412 determines an addition mode scenario according to the determined scenario state (S537). Further, the sub CPU 412 determines a lottery mode scenario according to the determined scenario state (S538). After determining the addition mode scenario and the lottery mode scenario, the sub CPU 412 shifts the sub state to the normal state.

  When it is determined that the remaining number counter is not equal to or smaller than the numerical value “0” (S532: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the second counter has reached the threshold value “100” (S540). When determining that the second counter has not reached the threshold value (S540: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the AT state management process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second counter has reached the threshold value (S540: YES), the sub CPU 412 adds the sub state to the standby state (S541), and ends the AT state management process.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart of normal state management processing. When the normal state management process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is a precursor state (S550). If it is determined that the state is a precursor state (S550: YES), the sub CPU 412 subtracts the numerical value “1” from the precursor counter (S551). Thereafter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the precursor counter has been subtracted to a numerical value “0” (S552). When it is determined that the precursor counter is not the numerical value “0” (S552: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the normal state management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor counter is a numerical value “0” (S552: YES), the sub CPU 412 ends the precursor state and shifts to a start preparation state or a special chance state (S553).

  If the sub CPU 412 determines that it is not a precursor state (S550: NO), it adds a numerical value “1” to the game counter (S554). Thereafter, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the game counter has reached a numerical value “1500” (S557). When it is determined that the game counter has reached the numerical value “1500” (S555: YES), the sub CPU 412 shifts to a precursor state (S556) and ends the normal state management process. On the other hand, when determining that the game counter has not reached the numerical value “1500” (S557: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether the first counter has reached the threshold value “256” (S557). If it is determined that the first counter has not reached the threshold (S557: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the normal state management process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first counter has reached the threshold (S557: YES), the sub CPU 412 adds a numerical value “1” to the cycle counter (S558), and after shifting the sub state to the cycle chance state. (S559) The normal state management process is terminated. The above is the description of the sub-state management process.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the effect button input task. When the effect button input task is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the effect button 26 has been operated (S306-1). When determining that the effect button 26 is not operated (S306-1: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the effect button input task. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect button 26 has been operated (S306-1: YES), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the effect button instruction flag is in the ON state (S306-2). When it is determined that the effect button instruction flag is in the ON state (S306-2: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes an effect according to the operation of the effect button 26 (S306-3), and the effect button instruction flag is in the OFF state. In step S306-4, the effect button input task is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S306-2 that the effect button instruction flag is not in the ON state (S306-2: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not a special addition effect is being performed (S306-5). If it is determined that the special addition effect is being performed (S306-5: YES), the sub CPU 412 proceeds to a special addition effect process (S306-6). In the special addition effect process, a partial addition value is determined and an addition effect counter is added.

  If it is determined in step S306-5 that the special addition effect is not being performed (S306-5: NO), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not it is a non-game period (S306-7). When determining that it is not the non-game period (S306-7: NO), the sub CPU 412 ends the effect button input task. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a non-game period (S306-7: YES), the sub CPU 412 executes a menu image control process (S306-8). In the menu image control process, the sub CPU 412 sets a command for controlling the display of the menu image in accordance with the operation of the effect button 26. For example, when the effect button 26 is operated during a period in which the menu image is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30, the sub CPU 412 starts displaying the menu image. After executing the menu image control process, the sub CPU 412 ends the effect button input task.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below. In addition, about the element in which an effect | action and a function are equivalent to 1st Embodiment in each form illustrated below, the code | symbol referred by description of 1st Embodiment is diverted, and each detailed description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In the first embodiment, the main CPU 301 continues the spinning effect (executes the combo spinning effect) when the white seven uniform pattern is determined in the black and white seven spinning effect. In addition, when the main CPU 301 determines the black seven uniform in the combo spinning effect, the main CPU 301 continues the spinning effect. As described above, in the first embodiment, whether or not to continue the spinning effect, that is, whether or not to execute the next pseudo game is automatically determined by the main CPU 301, and the player arbitrarily determines that Can not.

  By the way, as described above, when the right to add is not granted, the transition operation order (order 1) that enables execution of the black and white seven-turn effect is not notified. Therefore, when the extra right is not granted, as a rule, each turning effect (except for the SP turning effect) is not executed. However, due to the carelessness of the player, if the stop operation is performed in an order different from the notified stop operation order, each turning effect may be executed even if no additional right is granted. is there. Further, when the spinning effect is started, the spinning effect continues until the end of the spinning effect is automatically determined. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the spinning effect is started by the player's carelessness, the game cannot proceed until the spinning effect is automatically ended even though the additional number is not determined. Occurs.

  In consideration of the above circumstances, in the second embodiment, when the player performs a specific operation during the period of the spinning effect, the spinning effect can be ended. According to the above configuration, when the turning effect is started by the player's carelessness, the turning effect can be ended by the player's operation. Therefore, since the player can arbitrarily finish the spinning effect in which the number of extras is not determined, the period in which the spinning effect is executed (the next normal game) The period during which it is not possible to shift to) can be shortened.

  FIG. 112 is a time chart for explaining the second embodiment. FIG. 112 shows each game in which the sub state is the AT state (additional standby state) and the main state 1. Specifically, the part (a) in FIG. 112 shows each game after shifting to the additional waiting state. Moreover, the part (b) of FIG. 112 shows each game when the player performs a stop operation in the order 1 even though the order 1 is not notified.

  As shown in the part (a) of FIG. 112, in the normal game in the additional waiting state, the order 1 is notified in the transition operation order. When the stop operation is performed in order 1, a black and white seven-turn effect, a combo-turn effect, and a rush-turn effect can be executed in the next normal game. In part (a) of FIG. 112, an example is shown in which a black and white seven-turn effect and a combo-turn effect are executed among the turn effects. In the black and white seven-cylinder production, one pseudo game is executed. Further, in the combo spinning effect, a maximum of 6 pseudo games (3 times in the first stage, 2 times in the second stage, and 1 time in the third stage) are executed.

  As shown in part (a) of FIG. 112, when the combo rotation effect is executed after the black and white seven rotation effect, the stop operation sequence in which the rotation effect continues in the black and white seven rotation effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuation order”). ") Is notified. In the pseudo game of the black and white seven-rotor effect, when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the continuous order, the main CPU 301 can shift to the pseudo game of the combo-rotor effect. The continuation order is determined by lottery when, for example, a pseudo game start operation is performed.

  Specifically, in the monochrome seven-rotation effect of the second embodiment, a continuation order determination process is executed instead of the monochrome seven stop pattern determination process of the first embodiment. In the continuation order determination process, the main CPU 301 performs six stop operation orders of left middle right, left / right middle, middle left / right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, continuation order, first termination order, and second termination order. Sort so that it does not overlap with any of the above. In addition, it is good also as a structure which distributes a continuation order, a 1st end order, and a 2nd end order in any of the operation order of left 1st stop, middle 1st stop, and right 1st stop.

  In the black and white seven-winding effect, when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the continuation order, the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, and then, the process shifts to the combo winding effect. On the other hand, when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the first end order or the second end order, the main CPU 301 ends the pseudo game, and then performs normal game control by rotating each reel 12 in a steady manner. In the second embodiment, when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the first end order, the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed, and when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the second end order, the black seven off is stopped and displayed.

  In the first embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to execute the combo spinning effect, that is, whether or not the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven spinning effect. In the second embodiment, it is determined by the sub CPU 412 whether or not to execute the combo drum effect. The sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to execute the combo spinning effect by, for example, lottery when the black and white seven spinning effect is started.

  When the sub CPU 412 grants the extra right and decides to execute the combo spinning effect, as shown in the part (a) of FIG. 112, the sub CPU 412 notifies the continuation order in the black and white seven spinning effect. On the other hand, if the right to add is given and it is determined not to execute the combo spinning effect, the sub CPU 412 reports the first end order in the black and white seven spinning effect. As described above, the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the continuation order, and the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the first end order. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the white seven-alignment is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-rotation effect, the combo rotation effect is executed and the black seven-alignment is stopped. If displayed, the combo drum effect is not executed.

  When the stop operation is performed outside the notified order as shown in the part (b) of FIG. 112 and the black and white seven-rotor effect is executed, the second end order is notified. When notifying the second end order, for example, a message “Please end the spinning effect according to the pressing order” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30.

  Note that the combination of symbols displayed to be stopped when the pseudo stop operation is performed in the second end order is not limited to black seven out. For example, each reel 12 may be stopped immediately when a pseudo stop operation is performed. Alternatively, the display may be stopped by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the normal game immediately before the black and white seven-turn effect. Furthermore, when a pseudo stop operation is performed in the second end order, each reel 12 may be configured to rotate normally without stopping.

  According to the configuration of the second embodiment, when the turning effect is started by the player's carelessness, the turning effect can be ended by the player's operation (hereinafter referred to as “end operation”). The end operation is not limited to the second embodiment described above. For example, the spinning effect may be ended by simultaneously pressing the three stop buttons 25 during the spinning effect execution period.

  However, in a configuration in which an operation that does not exist in a normal game (for example, an operation of simultaneously pressing the three stop buttons 25 described above) is an end operation, when the end operation is instructed, the player may instruct It may be difficult to understand the details of the operation. Considering the above circumstances, in the second embodiment, a stop operation in a specific order is adopted as the end operation. The stop operation in a specific order is also notified in a normal game (for example, AT state), and the player performs an operation according to the notification. Therefore, the end operation of the second embodiment has an advantage that it is easy for the player to understand compared to an operation that is not in a normal game.

<Third Embodiment>
Part (a) of FIG. 113 is a conceptual diagram of the winning combination determination table in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, a winning combination “White Seven Replay” and a winning combination “Black Seven Replay” are provided. The winning role “White Seven Replay” is a combination of symbols of “White Seven-White Seven-White Seven” (white seven uniforms). The winning combination “Black Seven Replay” is a combination of “Black Seven-Black Seven-Black Seven” (black seven uniform).

  In the game in which the batting order replay X (1, 2) is won, the normal replay, special replay, or black seven replay is stopped and displayed according to the stop operation order. Specifically, in the game where the batting order replay X1 is won, the normal replay is stopped at the first left stop, the black seven replay is stopped at the middle first stop, and the special replay is stopped at the first right stop. In the game in which the batting order replay X2 is won, the normal replay is stopped at the first left stop, the special replay is stopped at the first middle stop, and the black seven replay is stopped at the first right stop.

  In the game in which the hitting order replay Y (1, 2) is won, the normal replay, special replay, or white seven replay is stopped and displayed according to the stop operation order. Specifically, in the game in which the hitting order replay Y1 is won, the special replay is stopped at the first left stop, the normal replay is stopped at the first middle stop, and the white seven replay is stopped at the first right stop. In the game where winning order replay Y2 is won, special replay is stopped at the first left stop, white seven replay is stopped at the middle first stop, and normal replay is stopped at the first right stop. The probability that each batting order replay wins is the same as in the first embodiment.

  Black Seven Replay and White Seven Replay are stopped on the active line when each winning combination is stopped in the correct pressing order and each symbol of each winning combination is stopped within the pull-in range. In the game where the batting order replay X is won and the stop operation is performed in the correct order of the black seven replay, and each “black seven” symbol of each reel 12 is not stopped within the pull-in range, the winning combination “ “Follow Replay” is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, in the game where the hitting order replay Y is won and the stop operation is performed in the correct order of the white seven replay, and each “white seven” symbol of each reel 12 is not stopped within the pull-in range, it is also won The role “Follow Replay” is stopped on the active line. In the third embodiment, a plurality of types of follow replays are provided, and even if black seven replays or white seven replays are not stopped and displayed, any one of the follow replays is always displayed on the active line.

  In the third embodiment, when the second counter reaches the threshold value in the AT state, as in the first embodiment, the state shifts to an additional standby state. In the additional waiting state of the third embodiment, the correct pressing order of the white seven replay or the black seven replay is notified instead of the transition operation order (order 1), and the additional number is added.

  Part (b) of FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining each game of the third embodiment. As shown in part (b) of FIG. 113, when the correct pressing order of white seven replay is notified in the additional waiting state, the state shifts to the special gaming state. On the other hand, when the correct answer order of Black Seven Replay is notified, the special gaming state is not entered.

  The special game state of the third embodiment includes a first stage, a second stage, and a third stage, similar to the combo drum effect of the first embodiment. In the first stage in the special gaming state, the correct push order of the black seven replay is notified, and when the black seven replay is won, the process proceeds to the second stage. Similarly, in the second stage, the correct pressing order of the black seven replay is notified, and if the black seven replay is won, the process proceeds to the third stage. Similarly, in the third stage, the correct pressing order of the black seven replay is notified. In addition, when Black Seven Replay is won in the third stage, a rush spinning effect can be executed. In addition, each time the black seven replay is won in the special game state, the number of extras is determined.

  Also in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first stage (first addition state) (when the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed), the second stage (second (Additional state). Further, when a specific condition is satisfied in the second added state, the process proceeds to the third stage (third added state). Therefore, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the added state does not change, the gaming state is rich in change, and the gameability is improved.

  By the way, in the special game state (combo spinning effect) of the first embodiment, in each pseudo game, the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed with a probability of about 1/2. On the other hand, in the special game state of the third embodiment, the winning probability of black seven replay in each normal game is lower than the probability 1/2. Therefore, in the third embodiment, as compared with the first embodiment, the probability that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the special gaming state is lowered, and the gameability may be lowered. Therefore, a configuration is considered in which the winning probability of black seven replay in the third embodiment is increased to a probability of about 1/2. However, when the winning probability of the black seven replay is increased to about 1/2, the winning probability of other winning areas including the batting order bell needs to be lowered. For example, when the winning probability of the batting order bell is lowered, the expected value (so-called “base”) of the number of medals that can be obtained in each game in the AT state becomes small, and the gameability may be lowered.

  In the first embodiment described above, since each game in the special game state is a pseudo game, the black seven uniform can be stopped and displayed regardless of the winning area. That is, in the first embodiment, the probability that the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the special gaming state can be set regardless of the winning probability of each winning area. As described above, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the probability that the black seven uniform in the special gaming state is stopped and displayed is increased.

<Modification>
Each of the above forms can be variously modified. Specific modifications are exemplified below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the following examples can be appropriately combined.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the number of games in the periodic chance state may be variable. For example, when a rare role is won in a periodic chance state, a configuration in which the number of remaining games is added can be considered.

  Alternatively, the periodic chance state may be ended when a specific end condition is satisfied after a predetermined number of games (10 games). For example, in the game after the tenth game in the periodic chance state, when winning other than the replay, the periodic chance state may be terminated. According to the above configuration, even after 10 games have been executed, if a replay is won, the periodic chance state continues. That is, as long as the enemy character is successfully damaged, the cycle chance state continues, and when the enemy character fails to damage, the cycle chance state ends. According to the above configuration, there is a possibility of clearing the periodic chance state by continuously winning the replay regardless of the remaining HP of the enemy character. Therefore, it becomes easy to maintain the willingness to clear the periodic chance state at the end of the periodic chance state.

(2) The configuration of each image (MA, MB, MC, MD, ME) is not limited to the above-described forms. For example, one or both of the periodic display part GC and the enemy character display part GE may be omitted from the second display part PB of the image MB. Further, the cycle display part GC and the enemy character display part GE may be arranged separately from the second display part PB.

  Further, in each of the above forms, the first meter icon image GM1 (second display part PB) in which the end ME moves in stages is shown as an example of the display part whose display mode is updated in stages. However, the display unit in which the display mode is updated in stages is not limited to the above example. For example, you may employ | adopt as a 1st meter image GM1 the display part from which a color is updated in steps whenever a 1st counter is added. Specifically, when the first counter is a numerical value “0” to “64”, the first meter graphic GM1 is displayed in white, and when the first counter is a numerical value “65” to “128”, the first counter When the meter image GM1 is displayed in blue and the first counter is a numerical value “129” to “193”, the first meter image GM1 is displayed in green and the first counter is a numerical value “194” to “256”. In this case, the first meter image GM1 may be displayed in green. That is, the first meter icon GM1 only needs to be able to estimate the value of the first counter. Similarly, for the second meter image GM2 (third display part PC), a display part from which the numerical value of the second counter can be estimated can be appropriately adopted.

  Further, the lip consecutive number icon GR is not limited to the above-described forms. For example, the color may be changed according to the value of the replay continuous counter (the number of consecutive replay wins). Specifically, when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “0” or “1”, the lip continuous number graphic image GR is displayed in white, and when the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “2”, the lip continuous number graphic image GR is displayed. When it is displayed in blue and the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “3”, the lip consecutive number graphic image GR is displayed in green. When the replay continuous counter is a numerical value “4”, the rep continuous number graphic image GR is displayed in red. May be.

(3) In each above-mentioned form, when the 2nd counter reaches a threshold (conditions for granting a privilege are established), the first privilege that gives the added number of sheets and the second that executes the combo-rotation effect Each privilege including a privilege is granted. In addition, when granting a privilege, both the first privilege and the second privilege are granted when only the first privilege is given (when the black seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-turn effect). (When the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed in the black and white seven-turn production). However, the type of privilege (privilege combination) that is granted when the privilege granting condition is satisfied is not limited to the above example.

  For example, when the second counter reaches a threshold value, there may be a configuration in which only the first privilege is granted or in which only the second privilege is given. In the above configuration, when only the first privilege is granted, for example, after the second counter reaches the threshold value, the added number of sheets may be added without executing the black and white seven-rotor effect. Further, when only the second privilege is granted, for example, after the second counter reaches a threshold value, it may be configured to execute the combo rotation effect without executing the black and white seven rotation effect.

  Moreover, in addition to the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege, you may provide a 3rd privilege as a privilege provided when a 2nd counter reaches a threshold value. When the third privilege is granted, for example, an AT set number counter may be added. In the above configuration, when the second counter reaches the threshold value, when only the first privilege is granted, when only the second privilege is granted, only the third privilege is granted. If both the first privilege and the second privilege are given, if both the first privilege and the third privilege are given, the second privilege and the third privilege When both are provided, it is good also as a structure where all the 3rd privilege may be provided from a 1st privilege. Also in the above configuration, there are a case where the second privilege is granted and a case where the second privilege is not given, as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the benefits given according to the numerical value of the second counter are diversified, and the gameability is improved.

  In addition, when the second counter reaches the threshold value, a privilege may not be provided. For example, in a black-and-white seven-cylinder production, either white seven or black seven uniform is displayed in a stopped state. It is good also as a structure where a 1st privilege is not provided.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time for displaying the enemy characters (A to C) on the second display unit PB (enemy character display unit GE) may be determined according to the mode of the enemy character. Specifically, the enemy character display value may be determined according to the mode of the enemy character. In the above configuration, when the reverse mode (mode in which the initial HP is ½) is selected, a configuration in which a smaller enemy character display value is more easily determined than when the reverse mode is not selected may be adopted. .

  The time when the enemy character is displayed may be determined according to both the type and mode of the enemy character. For example, when the next cycle chance state is the enemy character A and the reverse mode (initial HP is 150), the first half of the current cycle is compared to the case where the reverse mode is not the reverse mode (initial HP is 300). It is good also as a structure easy to display with. According to the above configuration, when the enemy character A is displayed in the first half of the cycle, the possibility that the reverse mode is selected is higher than in the case where the enemy character A is displayed in the second half. Therefore, even if the enemy character A is displayed in the first half of the cycle, the player can play this cycle with the expectation that the reverse mode has been selected.

  Further, for example, when the next cycle chance state is the enemy character C and the reverse mode (initial HP is 50), the current cycle is compared with the case where the reverse mode is not the reverse mode (initial HP is 100). It is good also as a structure easy to be displayed in the latter half of. According to the above configuration, when the enemy character C is displayed in the second half of the cycle, the possibility that the reverse mode is selected is higher than in the case where the enemy character C is displayed in the first half. Therefore, when the enemy character C is displayed in the second half of the cycle, the player's expectation for the back mode can be felt.

(5) In each form mentioned above, the enemy character of each period was determined by lottery using the enemy character determination table (FIG. 49), but the enemy character of each period may be determined in advance. For example, an enemy character designation data (20 enemy character designation data, hereinafter referred to as “enemy character scenario data”) in the 20th cycle may be provided from the enemy character designation data designating the enemy character in the first cycle. In the above configuration, the enemy character designation data in a specific cycle (for example, the third cycle and the seventh cycle) designates the enemy character C, and the enemy character designation data other than the specific cycle designates the enemy character A or the enemy character B. It is good also as a structure to designate.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides multiple enemy character scenario data. In the above configuration, enemy character scenario data may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, enemy character scenario data may be determined according to the scenario state. For example, a plurality of enemy character scenario data determined when the scenario state is normal A (hereinafter referred to as “normal A scenario group”) and a plurality of enemy character scenario data determined when normal scenario B (hereinafter referred to as “normal B”). A scenario group). In addition, the tendency of the cycle in which the enemy character C is designated differs between each enemy character scenario data of the normal A scenario group and each enemy character scenario data of the normal B scenario group. For example, in the case of the normal A scenario group, the enemy character C is easily specified in an odd-numbered cycle, and in the case of the normal B scenario group, the enemy character C is easily specified in an even-numbered cycle.

(6) In each of the above-described forms, the teammate character GK in the special sign last game is determined according to whether the sign is the present sign state or the gasse sign state, but the special sign state (first period, second period) The switching of the teammate characters GK (GKA, GKB, GKC) in each of the games may be executed depending on whether the current sign state or the gasse sign state. For example, in the case of the pre-sign state, the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 1/6, the teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/3, and the probability is about 1/2. The ally character GKC is displayed. On the other hand, if the game is in the predicament state, the teammate character GKA is displayed with a probability of about 1/2, the teammate character GKB is displayed with a probability of about 1/3, and the probability is about 1/6. To display the ally character GKC.

  According to the above configuration, in the special sign state (including the special sign last game), the teammate character GKC is displayed more than the other teammate character GK when the present sign state is compared to the case where the sign state is the gasse sign state. It becomes easy to be done. Therefore, by displaying the teammate character GKC, the player's expectation for winning the AT state can be given. Also in the above configuration, as in the first embodiment, the probability that the teammate character GK is switched between the first period and the second period in the special gaming state may be different.

(7) In the special precursor state of each form described above, a period during which the switching of the teammate character GK is prohibited (hereinafter referred to as a “switching prohibition period”) may be provided. For example, when the teammate character GK is switched between consecutive games, some players may feel annoyed. Considering the above circumstances, for example, a configuration in which a switching prohibition period is provided immediately after the teammate character GK is switched is conceivable.

  Further, the switching prohibition period may be provided immediately before the special sign last game. For example, three consecutive games including the special sign last game may be set as the switching prohibition period. According to the above configuration, the teammate character GK is not switched from three games before the development of continuous production. That is, it can be said that the three-game game after the teammate character GK is switched does not develop into a continuous performance. For example, when the teammate character GKA is developed into a continuous performance immediately after being displayed, some players may feel dissatisfied. According to the configuration in which the switching prohibition period is provided immediately before the special sign last game, it is possible to suppress the development to a continuous performance immediately after the teammate character GKA is displayed, and to reduce the above-mentioned dissatisfaction of the player.

  In the above configuration, the number of games during the switching prohibition period may be determined by lottery. In addition, the number of games during the switching prohibition period may be determined according to whether the current sign state or the prelude state. For example, in the case of the sign state, any one of the number of games “1” to “5” is set as the switching prohibition period. On the other hand, when the state is a precursor sign state, any one of the number of games “3” to “5” is set as the switching prohibition period. According to the above configuration, when the teammate character GK is switched to develop a continuous production in one game or two games, the player can recognize that the player has won the AT state. As another example, if the game is in the precursor state, one of the game counts “3” to “5” is set as a switching prohibition period, and if it is in this precursor state, any of the game counts “3” to “6” It is good also as a structure which makes these a switching prohibition period. According to the above configuration, when 6 games have elapsed since the ally character GK has been switched and has evolved into a continuous effect, when the ally character GK has been switched to have a continuous effect before the 6 games have elapsed. Compared to, the expectation for winning the AT state is higher.

(8) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the teammate characters GK (GKA, GKB, GKC) displayed in the special sign state are determined by lottery in each game, but the teammate character GK displayed in each game is a special sign. It is good also as a structure previously determined before a state starts. For example, scenario data for designating a teammate character GK displayed in the first game in the special sign state to a teammate character GK displayed in the special sign last game may be provided. Specifically, the scenario data is composed of N pieces of data, and each data designates a teammate character GK to be displayed in each game. For example, the nth (0 <n ≦ N) data in the scenario data designates the nth game ally character GK in a special precursor state. Further, a plurality of types of scenario data may be provided, and the scenario data used in the current special sign state may be determined by lottery. For example, scenario data for designating a teammate character GKC in a special sign last game and scenario data for designating other than the teammate character GKC are provided. Furthermore, in the above configuration, when the current sign state is the present sign state, the scenario data that designates the teammate character GKC for the special sign last game may be more easily selected than other scenario data. .

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the “bonus combination” may be stopped and displayed on the active line. For example, in a game in which a bonus combination is carried over, the bonus combination may be stopped and displayed by operating each stop button 25 in a specific operation mode. Specifically, “losing” is provided as a winning area, and when “losing” is won in a game in which a bonus combination is carried over, winning combinations other than the bonus combination are not stopped and displayed (withdrawal control). In the above configuration, the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line by stopping each symbol of the bonus combination within the drawing range in the game in which “losing” is won.

(10) In each of the above-described forms, the number of games that can be played in each stage from the first stage to the third stage (special game state) of the combo spinning effect is different from the number of games in the pseudo game. The configuration in which the probabilities of determining the added game information (added number) at each stage are different from each other is illustrated. However, the first added state and the second added state in the special game state are not limited to the examples described above. For example, it is good also as a structure from which the probability that extra game information is won in each game differs in each stage. Specifically, in the first stage, a maximum of three games are possible, and in each game, the extra game information is determined with a probability of about 1/2. In the second stage, a maximum of three games can be played (same as in the first stage). In each game, the added game information is determined with a probability of about 1/3. Also in the above configuration, the probability P1 that the added game information is determined in the first stage (first added state) is different from the probability P2 that the added game information is determined in the second stage (second added state) ( P1> P2).

(11) In the first embodiment, in the special addition effect, when the numerical value (added value) of the fourth display unit PD exceeds the threshold value of the second counter, the update operation invalid period is entered (see FIG. 69). . However, the timing for shifting to the update operation invalid period is not limited to the above-described example. For example, when the sum of the second counter (the value of the third display unit PC) and the value of the fourth display unit PD immediately before the special addition effect is executed exceeds the threshold value of the second counter, the update operation invalid period It is good also as a structure which transfers to. In the above configuration, for example, a case is assumed where the second counter immediately before the special addition effect is a numerical value “32”. In the above case, in the special addition effect, when the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD exceeds “68”, the update operation invalid period is entered.

(12) The trigger for the end of the update operation invalid period in the special addition effect is not limited to the above-described forms. For example, when a predetermined operation of the player is accepted during the update operation invalid period, the update operation invalid period may be terminated. Specifically, in the update operation invalid period, when the start lever 24 or the bet button (21, 22) is operated, the update operation invalid period may be ended.

(13) In the special addition effects in each form described above, the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is added each time the effect button 26 is pressed, but the update operation is not limited to the above-described example. For example, an operation for maintaining the state where the effect button 26 is pressed (long press operation) may be employed as the update operation. In the above configuration, the numerical value of the fourth display unit PD is repeatedly updated until a predetermined time elapses after the long press operation of the effect button 26 is started.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, when a special addition effect is started, an addition value to be added in the special addition effect is determined in advance (“50 pt”, “100 pt”, “150 pt”, “200 pt”, “ 250pt "or" 300pt "). However, the addition value in the special addition effect may be determined in a period in which the special addition effect is executed. For example, every time an update operation (depressing the effect button 26) is performed, any one of the added values “1pt” to “100pt” may be determined by lottery. Further, in the above configuration, when an update operation is performed, whether or not to end the special addition effect is determined by lottery together with the lottery of the above-described addition value. According to the above configuration, the addition value determined by one update operation and the number of update operations until the end is determined are random. Therefore, the added value that can be acquired by the special addition effect is rich in change, and the gameability is improved.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the return determination process determines the return to the AT state, the current AT state and the next AT state (the AT state after the return) are continuous. The AT state may be returned to the AT state via another sub-state. For example, when the current AT state is ended, the state may be shifted to the end preparation state, the main state is shifted to the main state 0, and then the start preparation state is shifted again. In the above configuration, the AT state may be returned to the AT state after executing the AT start spinning effect in the start preparation state, or may be returned to the AT state without executing the AT start spinning effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which returns to a start preparation state via completion | finish preparation state and a precursor state (normal state), when AT state is complete | finished.

(16) The combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the spinning effect is not limited to the above-described forms. For example, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the AT start spinning effect may be a white seven uniform or a black seven uniform instead of a red seven uniform. In addition, the line on which the combination of symbols stops and displays in the spinning effect is not limited to the above-described forms.

  Moreover, in the combo drum effect of each form described above, the black seven-alignment is stopped and displayed, but both the black seven-alignment and the white seven-alignment may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the first stage and the second stage of the combo drum effect, the black seven-alignment may be stopped and displayed, and in the third stage, the white seven-alignment may be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, in the first stage and the second stage, both black and white sevens can be stopped and displayed, and when white and sevens are stopped and displayed, a rush spinning effect is started. It is good.

(17) The display mode of the symbols (combination of symbols) in the spinning effect is not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, in the black and white seven-turn production, when the white seven uniform is stopped and displayed, each reel 12 may be rotated in reverse. According to the above configuration, whether or not to shift to the combo drum effect is notified according to the rotation direction of each reel 12.

  Further, for example, the display mode of the symbol combination in the spinning effect may be different from the display mode of the symbol combination in the normal game. Specifically, in the normal game, the combination of symbols is stopped (still) and displayed, and in the spinning effect, each symbol is vibrated and displayed. Specifically, in the spinning effect, the reel that has been subjected to a pseudo stop operation is moved by 1/12 frames in the reverse rotation direction for a period of 0.5 seconds, and then 1/12 in the forward rotation direction. Move the frame (hereinafter referred to as “vibration at stop”). The main CPU 301 vibrates the reel that has been pseudo-stopped, for example, every 2 seconds when stopped. By vibrating the combination of symbols when stopped, the player can recognize that the displayed symbol combination is the result of a pseudo game.

  In addition, it is not necessary to completely stop each seven assemblage in the rush fluctuation of the rush rotation effect. For example, the seven set displayed in the rush fluctuation may be vibrated when stopped. Further, in a rush fluctuation, the relative position of each reel 12 is moved to a position where the seven-alignment is displayed, and then each reel 12 is moved at a speed slower than the normal rotation, and the seven-alignment is moved into the display window 11. May be displayed.

(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the red seven match is stopped and displayed as a result of the normal game. For example, a winning combination of “Red Seven-Red Seven-Red Seven” symbol combination “Red Seven Finalist” may be provided, and in a game in which the Red Seven Finalist is selected, the red seven uniforms may be displayed in a stopped state. . In the above configuration, a privilege may be granted when a red seven-finalized role is played. For example, a configuration in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the red seven confirmed combination is won can be considered.

(19) In the normal state of each of the above forms, the first addition state (for example, the game state in the first lottery mode in the first lottery state) and the first addition state are likely to be given a large additional value. 2 addition states (for example, the game state of the second lottery mode in the second lottery state). In the above configuration, the modes of the first normal state and the second normal state are not limited to the above-described forms. For example, a special normal state is provided as the second normal state, and in the special normal state, the correct replay push order is notified, and when special replay is stopped and displayed, compared to when normal replay is stopped and displayed. A configuration in which a large added value is easily determined may be employed. According to the above configuration, in the special normal state, the expected value of the added value of each game is larger than that in the normal state where the correct push order of the special replay is not notified.

  In addition, a special addition effect may be executed in the normal state, and the first counter may be added in the addition effect. For example, when a rare combination is won in a normal state, it is determined whether or not to execute a special addition effect by lottery. In the above configuration, an addition value determined in the special addition effect may include an addition value that is larger than the threshold value of the first counter. For example, an addition value greater than “200” may be determined as a special addition effect. Further, as a result of adding the added value to the first counter, when the first counter becomes twice or more the threshold value, a periodic chance state of 20 games or more may be executed. In addition, when the numerical value of the first counter exceeds a specific numerical value greater than the threshold value “100”, it may be configured to shift to the AT state instead of the periodic chance state.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the AT state is terminated when the remaining number counter reaches the end value, that is, when the difference between the total number of payouts and the total number of bets reaches a predetermined threshold. However, the conditions for terminating the AT state are not limited to the above-described forms. For example, the AT state may be terminated when the number of games in the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold. In the above configuration, a remaining game number counter (remaining game information) indicating the number of remaining games in the AT state is provided in, for example, the sub RAM 414. Further, for example, when the value of the second counter reaches the threshold value, the number of games is added to the remaining game number counter.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, as an example of a configuration in which the AT state is terminated when the remaining game information (remaining number counter) reaches the end value, the remaining game information is subtracted to the end value (0). The configuration for ending the AT state is shown in FIG. 1, but the AT state may be ended when the remaining game information is added to the end value (N> 0).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of the configuration of “increasing the numerical value to the end value of the remaining game information”, the numerical value to the end value of the remaining game information is increased by adding the additional game information to the remaining game information. The configuration was shown. When the configuration in which the AT state ends when the remaining game information is added to the end value (N> 0) is adopted, the configuration of “increasing the numerical value up to the end value of the remaining game information” A configuration is adopted in which the numerical value up to the end value of the remaining game information is increased by subtracting the added game information.

  As understood from the above description, the game state that ends when the remaining game information reaches the end value includes the game state that ends when the remaining game information is subtracted to the end value, and the remaining game information. Both of the gaming states that end when added to the end value are included. In addition, “increase the value up to the end value of the remaining game information” adds the game information added to the remaining game information in a configuration in which the specific game state ends when the remaining game information is subtracted to the end value. In the configuration in which the specific game state ends when the remaining game information is added to the end value, the game information is added to the remaining game information and the game information is subtracted. Thus, both of increasing the numerical value up to the end value of the remaining game information are included.

(22) In each of the above-mentioned forms of spinning effect (pseudo game), the combination of symbols to be displayed in a stopped manner is determined in advance regardless of the stop operation position. For example, in the AT start spinning effect, the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation position. However, in the AT start spinning effect, the combination of symbols may be stopped and displayed according to the stop operation position.

  For example, in the AT start spinning effect, when the red 7 symbol on the reel 12L is stopped at the timing when it is located in the middle line (so-called bitter press), the red seven alignment is stopped and displayed on the interruption line, When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol is positioned, a configuration in which the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed on the upper right line or the lower right line is conceivable. Moreover, in the above structure, it is good also as a structure which provides a privilege, when a red seven uniform is stopped and displayed on a middle stage line. For example, a configuration in which an effect suggesting the set value of the gaming machine 1 is executed when the red seven uniform is stopped and displayed on the middle stage line is suitable.

  In the above-mentioned spinning effects of each form, even if the symbol to be stopped is not located in the pull-in range (5 frames range), the symbol is stopped and displayed only when it is located in the pull-in range. It is good also as a structure which makes the said symbol stop display. However, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the pseudo game is displayed, for example, to notify the determination of the number of additional cards or the transition of the state. In other words, one purpose of providing a pseudo game is to notify a state transition or the like by stopping and displaying a specific symbol combination. Therefore, in the pseudo game, when a configuration in which a combination of symbols for which stop display is determined may be missed, the above-described object may not be achieved. In the first embodiment, the combination of symbols for which stop display is determined is stopped in the pseudo game regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, there is an advantage that the above-described object is surely executed.

(23) In each of the above-described forms, the payout rate is calculated from the total number of betting medals and the total number of payout medals from when the power is turned on until the AT state is completed, and according to the payout rate Whether or not to return to the AT state is determined by the return determination process. However, whether or not to return to the AT state may be determined according to the payout rate other than the period from when the power is turned on until the AT state ends. For example, it may be determined whether or not to return to the AT state using a payout rate during a period from when the set value of the gaming machine 1 is changed to when the AT state ends.

  By the way, conventionally, when a player performs a predetermined operation (for example, input of a password) when starting a game, a technique for recording a game history (for example, the number of games or the number of jackpots) is known ( For example, a technique described in JP 2014-42573 A). Hereinafter, a period during which the game history is recorded is referred to as a game history recording period. In the above prior art, the game history recording period can be ended by performing a predetermined operation when the player ends the game.

  You may employ | adopt the above prior art in each form of this invention. Further, whether or not to return to the AT state may be determined according to the payout rate of each player during each game history recording period. According to the above configuration, when it is determined whether or not to return to the AT state in the game history recording period of a specific player, the game play rate in the game history recording period of other players is not affected. Therefore, whether or not to return to the AT state is determined on a fair basis for each player.

(24) In each embodiment described above, each storage area of the main RAM 303 can be appropriately configured. Part (a) of FIG. 114 is a conceptual diagram of each storage area of the main RAM 303 in the modification. The size of each storage area of the main RAM 303 is 2 bytes, and an address is assigned for each byte. The configuration of each storage area of the main RAM 303 is not limited to the above example. For example, each storage area may be larger than 2 bytes.

  The main RAM 303 of the modification includes a random number seed storage area, a set value storage area, an excitation counter, an internal medium flag storage area, and a general work area. The random number seed storage area stores a random number seed used for generating the random number value R2. The main CPU 301 generates a random value R2 by performing a predetermined calculation on the random number seed. The set value storage area stores set values (1 to 6). For example, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process using a winning area lottery table corresponding to the set value in the set value storage area. The excitation counter stores the number of times the drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) that rotates each reel 12. As described above, each time the drive pulse is output to the stepping motor 504 times, the reel 12 rotates once. The excitation counter is incremented by a numerical value “1” every time a drive pulse is output, and cleared to a numerical value “0” when the numerical value “504” is reached. The excitation counter is also cleared to a numerical value “0” when an ON signal is output from each reel sensor 111 that detects the reference position of each reel 12. That is, the excitation counter indicates the number of steps from the reference position of each reel 12.

  The internal medium flag storage area stores an internal medium flag indicating whether or not the winning combination “bonus combination” is carried over. The internal flag is set to ON when the “bonus combination” is carried over, and is set to the OFF state when the “bonus combination” is not carried over. For example, when the internal medium flag is in the ON state, the main CPU 301 shifts to the RT1 gaming state, and when the internal medium flag is in the OFF state, the main CPU 301 shifts to the RT0 gaming state. The general work area stores each data generated when the main CPU 301 executes each process.

  In each of the above embodiments, the initialization condition for initializing (clearing to 0) each area of the main RAM 303 can be appropriately set for each area. In the modification shown in part (a) of FIG. 114, each area of the main RAM 303 is initialized under each initialization condition including the first initialization condition and the second initialization condition. Both the first initialization condition and the second initialization condition are satisfied when the setting switch is operated. Specifically, the first initialization condition is satisfied when the above-described main RAM abnormality flag is in the OFF state and the process proceeds to the setting change process. On the other hand, the second initialization condition is satisfied when the main RAM abnormality flag is ON and the process proceeds to the setting change process.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the area of the main RAM 303 to be initialized is different for each initialization condition. For example, the random number seed storage area is maintained when either the first initialization condition or the second initialization condition is satisfied. The set value storage area can be changed when the first initialization condition is satisfied (when the setting change process is started). However, immediately after the first initialization condition is satisfied, the set value storage area is maintained. For example, when the setting value at the time when the first initialization condition is satisfied is “6”, the initial value of the setting value in the setting change process (the setting value before the change) is “6”. Further, even when the second initialization condition is satisfied, the change of the set value storage area is permitted. However, when the second initialization condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the value in the setting value storage area is abnormal, so the initial value of the setting value in the setting change process is corrected to “1”. The excitation counter is maintained when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and is initialized when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Other areas including the general workpiece are initialized when the first initialization condition or the second initialization condition is satisfied.

  The internal flag storage area is maintained when the first initialization condition is satisfied. That is, even when the setting change process is executed in a state where the winning combination “bonus combination” is carried over, the state where the “bonus combination” is carried over before and after the setting change process is maintained. On the other hand, when the second initialization condition is satisfied, that is, when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 303, the internal / middle flag storage area is initialized to the OFF state.

  For example, as a comparative example, a configuration is assumed in which when the first initialization condition is satisfied, the internal medium flag storage area is initialized to the OFF state. In the above comparison, when the set value is changed, the winning combination “bonus combination” is not carried over, that is, the RT0 gaming state. As described above, the RT0 gaming state in which the winning combination “bonus combination” is not carried over is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the RT1 gaming state in which the “bonus combination” is carried over. Therefore, in comparison, the gaming state immediately after the set value is changed is disadvantageous for the player and may reduce the player's willingness to play. In view of the above circumstances, in this modification, it is possible to maintain the state where the “bonus combination” is carried over before and after the setting change process and to maintain the RT1 gaming state after the setting change. According to the modified example, a decrease in gaming motivation is suppressed.

  In the modification described above, when the second initialization condition is satisfied, the main RAM abnormality flag is set to the OFF state. As described above, when the main RAM abnormality flag is turned on, the routine proceeds to the RAM error processing (see FIG. 74), the abnormality of the main RAM 303 is notified, and the game cannot be progressed. In the above configuration, an administrator of the gaming machine 1 (such as a game shop clerk) operates the setting switch to establish the second initialization condition, thereby changing the main RAM abnormality flag to the OFF state, Can allow progress. Each area of the main RAM 303 is maintained when the main RAM abnormality flag is turned on, but is initialized when the second initialization condition is satisfied.

  In the above modification, each area initialized under each initialization condition can be changed as appropriate. Further, each area of the main RAM 303 may be initialized under conditions other than the first initialization condition and the second initialization condition.

  Part (b) of FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining another modification. 114 described above (hereinafter referred to as “Modification 1”) and part (b) as a modification (hereinafter referred to as “Modification 2”), the second initialization condition (main RAM 303 of FIG. The area of the main RAM 303 initialized in the case of shifting to setting change processing at the time of abnormality is different. Specifically, in the second modification, when the second initialization condition is satisfied, the random number seed storage area is maintained, the setting value in the setting value storage area is corrected to “1”, and the change is permitted. This is the same as the first modification in that the areas and the like are initialized. On the other hand, Modification 2 is different from Modification 1 in that the excitation counter and the internal medium flag storage area are maintained when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, in Modification 2, both or one of the excitation counter and the internal medium flag storage area may be initialized under the second initialization condition.

  Modification 2 is different from Modification 1 in that the main RAM 303 is initialized under the third initialization condition in addition to the first initialization condition and the second initialization condition. The third initialization condition is that the power is turned on while the setting switch is ON and the process proceeds to the setting change process, and the setting value is determined in the setting change process (operation of the start lever 24; see S16 in FIG. 75) This is established when the power is shut off before the power is turned on, and then the power is supplied again with the setting switch turned on. That is, when the administrator of the gaming machine 1 wants to initialize the main RAM 303 under the third initialization condition, first, after turning on the setting switch, the power-on operation is performed. When the power is turned on and the process proceeds to the setting change process, the first initialization condition or the second initialization condition is satisfied according to the main RAM abnormality flag. The setting change process ends when the start lever 24 is operated as described above. However, when the third initialization condition is satisfied, the power button 511 is operated to turn off the power before the setting change process is ended. Cut off. After turning off the power, the third initialization condition is satisfied by turning on the power again while the setting switch is kept in the ON state.

  When the third initialization condition is satisfied, each area including the excitation counter and the internal medium flag storage area is initialized as shown in part (b) of FIG. That is, in the second modification, regardless of the state of the main RAM abnormality flag, the bonus combination is not carried over from the state in which the bonus combination is carried over (RT1 gaming state) according to the operation of the administrator of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to shift to a state (RT0 gaming state).

  In the second modification described above, when the second initialization condition is satisfied, as in the first modification, the main RAM abnormality flag is set to the OFF state. In the above configuration, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 changes the main RAM abnormality flag to the OFF state by enabling the second initialization condition, and allows the game to proceed as in the first modification. Can do.

  In Modification 1 and Modification 2 described above, when an operation unit other than the setting switch is operated, each initialization condition may be satisfied. For example, the main RAM 303 may be initialized when a clear switch different from the setting switch is operated. The clear switch is, for example, a push button switch provided inside the gaming machine 1. When the initialization condition is satisfied by pressing the clear switch, for example, each area including a general work area, an excitation counter, and an internal / middle flag storage area is initialized. According to the above configuration, when the administrator of the gaming machine 1 wants to start a game in a state where the bonus combination is not carried over, the administrator can operate the clear switch to shift to a state where the bonus combination is not carried over. it can. Each area of the main RAM 303 that is initialized by operating the clear switch can be changed as appropriate.

(25) The present invention can be applied not only to the above-described pachislot machines but also to pachinko machines, other gaming machines, and game machines in general.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention variably displays a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display means (each reel 12) for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols as a result of the game, and accepting the player's operation to start the game The game starting means (S103) to be operated, the internal lottery means (S106) for determining one of a plurality of types of winning combinations by lottery when the game is started, and the player operating to stop the symbol Stop operation means (each stop button 25), symbol variation control means (S110) for stopping each symbol according to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the player's operation mode for the stop operation means, variable display means Winning determination means (S111) for determining the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, and specific game determination for determining the transition to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state In step (S516), in a specific gaming state, point granting means (S516-3) for granting points under specific conditions, and point storage means (second counter) for storing the total value of points given by the point granting means ), And when the total value of the points given by the point giving means reaches a specific threshold value, a point storage means is obtained by subtracting the specific threshold value from the total value as a total value of the points given by the point giving means When the total value of the points given by the point subtracting means and the point granting means reaches a specific threshold value, the first privilege granting means (S541) for granting a privilege, and when the specific gaming state ends. The total of points stored by the point storage means at the time when the specific gaming state ends, whether or not a privilege is granted ; And a second privilege granting means for determining (S533) in accordance with.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not a privilege is granted when the specific gaming state ends is determined according to the point information at the time when the specific gaming state ends. Therefore, even if the point is less than the threshold, a privilege corresponding to the point is given and not wasted.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 300 ... Main control board, 301 ... Main CPU, 302 ... Main ROM, 303 ... Main RAM, 304 ... Random number generator, 305 ... I / F circuit, 400 ... Sub control board, 410 ... Production control board 411 ... I / F circuit, 412 ... sub CPU, 413 ... sub ROM, 414 ... sub RAM, 420 ... image control board, 421 ... liquid crystal control CPU, 422 ... liquid crystal control ROM, 423 ... VDP, 424 ... CGROM, 425 ... VRAM, 430 ... sound board, 431 ... sound source IC, 432 ... sound source ROM.

Claims (1)

Variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and stopping and displaying the combination of symbols as a result of the game,
Game starting means for accepting the player's operation and starting the game;
An internal lottery means for determining one of a plurality of types of winning combinations by lottery when a game is started;
Stop operation means operated by the player when stopping the symbol;
Symbol variation control means for stopping the symbols according to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery means and the player's operation mode for the stop operation means,
A winning determination means for determining a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the variable display means;
Specific game determination means for determining a transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state;
Point granting means for granting points under specific conditions in the specific gaming state;
Point storage means for storing the total value of the points given by the point giving means;
When the total value of points given by the point grant means reaches a specific threshold value, the point storage is performed by subtracting the specific threshold value from the total value as the total value of points given by the point grant means Point subtraction means to be stored in the means;
A first privilege granting unit for granting a privilege when the total value of the points granted by the point granting unit reaches a specific threshold;
Second privilege granting means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege when the specific gaming state ends according to a total value of points stored by the point storage unit at the time when the specific gaming state ends; A gaming machine comprising:

Images